c-550 lanovia scanner engineer’s reference guide

C-550 Lanovia ScannerEngineer’s Reference Guide

6700800003

IMPORTANT

Fujifilm products are so designed and constructed as to be safe and without risk to health whenproperly used (in accordance with the supplied documentation) and when the safety precautionscontained in this document are fully observed.

This document was produced by the Technical Publications Department, FUJIFILM ElectronicImaging Ltd.

1999FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd.Fujifilm HouseBoundary WayHemel Hempstead Tel: 01442 213440Hertfordshire HP2 7RH Fax: 01442 343432England Registered Number: 3244452

Preliminaries

(ii) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

This document must not be copied without prior written authorization, and although correct at thetime of writing is subject to change without notice. For further information contact the ProductInformation Manager, FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd, at the address given on the front page ofthis manual.

Preliminaries

(iii)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

WARNING

All precautions mentioned in this document must bestrictly observed at all times. Personnel MUST thereforeread the contents of the document BEFORE commencingany work on the equipment described in the document.

Improper use of controls and switches, failure to complywith warnings, and the performance of adjustments orprocedures not specified in this document, may exposepersonnel to danger.

Preliminaries

(iv) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

CAUTION

The attention of the engineer is particularly drawn to therequirement for ensuring that the site for installation andoperation of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner at thecustomers premises shall accord in all respects and at alltimes with the following environmental conditions.

Verify the environmental conditions. The temperature inthe work area must be within the range 20°C to 24°C. Thehumidity shall be within the range 50% to 70% RH(non-condensing), with a rate of change not exceeding 2%per hour. Low humidity causes a build up of staticelectricity which, if discharged, can cause data errors.High humidity leads to condensation and corrosionproblems.

Regularly inspect the scanner ventilation fans, to makesure they are working and that their grills have not beenaccidentally covered. If temperature limits are exceeded,the scanner switches off.

Preliminaries

(v)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to be compliant withthe limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCCRules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protectionagainst harmful interference when the equipment is operated in acommercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used inaccordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmfulinterference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in aresidential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case theuser will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Preliminaries

(vi) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

Electromagnetic Compatibility Information - Europe

This product has been found to satisfy the Class A limits for radiointerference of information technology equipment. Class A equipmentis intended for use in a light industrial or commercial environment forwhich the 30 metre protection distance is used. Operation of thisequipment in a domestic or residential environment may result ininterference to other equipment, in which case the user will be requiredto correct the interference at his own expense. In some countries thisequipment may be subject to restrictions on its use. Where applicablethe user should inform the relevant local authority that Class AInformation Technology Equipment has been taken into service.

This equipment may also be susceptible to strong electromagneticfields and should not be sited close to high power radio transmitters orradar installations. If the intended site of operation is prone toelectromagnetic disturbances due to lightning strikes, additionalprecautions should be taken to protect the equipment from the resultingelectromagnetic disturbance. Typical examples for the intendedenvironment of this equipment would include:

• business premises, for example, offices, banks, etc.

• retail outlets, for example, shops, supermarkets, etc.

• light industrial locations, for example, workshops,service centres, etc.

Locations which are characterised by being supplied directly at lowvoltage from the public mains are considered to be residential,commercial or light industrial.

This equipment conforms to the requirements of EC directives:

73/23/EEC - Low Voltage Directive89/336/EEC - EMC Directive.

Preliminaries

(vii)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

About this Document

The purpose of this Guide is to provide suitably qualified service personnel with sufficientinformation to maintain a C-550 Lanovia Scanner. This Guide includes details of the systemand PCB configurations, field replacements, setup procedures, fault diagnosis, and theroutine maintenance procedures. It also gives a comprehensive technical description of themain sub-systems for use by engineers during an approved training course.

• Chapter 1 - System Description. Describes the main features of the C-550 LanoviaScanner and shows its construction and connections to peripheral equipment.

• Chapter 2 - Safety Practices. Explains the Fujifilm recommended safety guidelines,identifies relevant precautions and interlock strategy, and the antistatic precautions.This chapter must be read before any servicing or replacement procedures areimplemented.

• Chapter 3 - Functional Description. Provides brief functional descriptions about theoptical system, the electronic systems, and motion control.

• Chapter 4 - Field Replacements. Provides recommended procedures for thereplacement of spared modules.

• Chapter 5 - Terminal Diagnostics. Describes the terminal diagnostics system for theC-550 Lanovia Scanner and provides the useful menu commands.

• Chapter 6 - Alignments and Calibrations. Describes the test targets, the setup menus,the carriage alignments, and system calibrations. Before any alignments or calibrationsare performed, C-550 Lanovia Scanner must be free of any functional problems.

• Chapter 7 - Workstation Diagnostics. Describes the screen menus, the ElectronicRepro test for quality conformance - performed after fault diagnosis, corrections,alignments, and system calibrations - and the identities of the SCSI buffers.

• Chapter 8 - Maintenance. Describes the safety interlock checks, cleaning proceduresfor the optical components, and the health (confidence) check of the C-550 LanoviaScanner.

• Appendix A - Electrical Reference Data. Shows the locations of the electricalmodules and provides the physical data of the PSU, system board, CCD headboard,digitizer board, lamp driver board, distribution boards and display board.

• Appendix B - Fault Diagnosis Describes certain image defects and provides faultdiagnosis tables in support to the customer service engineer.

Preliminaries

(viii) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

Associated Documents

C-scan Application Tutorial 67008610. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-scan Application User’s Guide 67008600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-550 Lanovia Scanner with C-scan User’s Guide 67008620. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C–550 Lanovia Safety Manual 67008890. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-550 Lanovia Installation Manual 67008370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sprint Option Installation Manual 67009280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sprint Upgrade Installation Manual 67009290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trademarks and Copyright

C-scan and Lanovia are trademarks of FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd that may beregistered in certain jurisdictions.

Fuji and Fujifilm are trademarks of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd that may be registered incertain jurisdictions.

Apple, AppleShare, AppleTalk, , System 7, Power Macintosh and Macintosh aretrademarks of Apple Computer Inc. that may be registered in certain jurisdictions.

Kermit is a trademark of Columbia University that may be registered in certainjurisdictions.

Sun, Sun Ultra, Solaris and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc. that maybe registered in certain jurisdictions.

All other company names, products or brand names are trademarks of their respectiveholders.

Preliminaries

(ix)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

Contents

Chapter 1 System Description

1.1 Overview of Features 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1.1 Workstation 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1.2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1.3 Modules 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner Modules 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.1 Introduction 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.2 Mechanical Modules 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main Carriage 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X-slide Carriage 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lens Mount 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CCD Mount 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.3 Optical Components 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Illumination 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission Lamp 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reflection Lamps 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light Table Lamps 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Platen 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mirror Mount 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lens 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CCD Headboard 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.4 Electrical Modules 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Supplies 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lamp Driver Module 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lamp Driver Control 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main Carriage Servo Motor 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X-slide Carriage Stepper Motor 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enlargement Stepper Motor 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(x) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

Focus Stepper Motor 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fans 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.5 Electronic Components 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Board 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Controller 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FLASH Memory 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sensors and Interlock Control 1-13. . . . . . . . . .

Image Processor 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCSI Controller 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motion Control 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Synchronization Control 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Environment Monitoring 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CCD Headboard 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digitizer Board 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digitizer Board Monitoring 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Board 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.6 Interlocks and Sensors 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Datum Sensors 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Limit Sensors 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 C-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.1 Introduction 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Workstation Diagnostics 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminal Diagnostics 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4 System Fault Diagnosis 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4.1 Introduction 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4.2 Diagnostic Tests 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5 Alignment and Calibration 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5.1 Introduction 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5.2 Alignment and Calibration 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xi)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

1.6 Workstation Diagnostics and Electronic Repro 1-19. . . . . . . .

1.6.1 Workstation Diagnostics 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6.2 Electronic Repro 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.7 Accessory Kit 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.7.1 Long Registration Bar 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.7.2 Coded Copyholders 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.7.3 A3 Cover Glass 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2 Safety Practices

2.1 Health and Safety at Work 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1 Warnings and Cautions 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 Site Safety 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.1 Safety Signs, Labels, and Indicators 2-2. . . . . . . . . .

2.3 General Precautions 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1 Safety Devices 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.2 Unattended Equipment 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 Electrical Safety 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5 Mechanical Safety 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6 Antistatic Precautions 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7 Interlock Strategy 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.8 Lamp Driver Precautions 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 Functional Description

3.1 System Overview 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.1 Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.2 System Operation 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xii) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

3.1.3 Optical System 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.4 Electronics 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Supply and Distribution 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Control 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Image Data Path 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motion Control 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Illumination System 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.5 Structure 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.6 Electrical Reference Data 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.7 Fault Diagnosis 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 System Operation 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1 Introduction 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.2 Basic Principles 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Line Scan CCD Camera 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fixed Platen - Moving Camera Scanning 3-11. . . . . .

Fluorescent Illumination 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Variable Magnification Optics 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Autofocus 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X-Slide Carriage Movement 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three-Stripe CCD Colour Separation 3-13. . . . . . . . .

Image Re-alignment 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphics and Line-art Scanning 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reading Copyholder Details 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Calibration System 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control System 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.3 Sequence of Scanning Operations 3-15. . . . . . . . . . .

Stabilize Lamps 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X-Slide Setting 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enlargement Setting 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Focus Setting 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exposure Control 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Autofocus 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xiii)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

Black Balance 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

White Balance 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scan 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lamp Control 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 Optical System 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.1 Introduction 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.2 Illumination 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

White Balance Areas 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission Illumination 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission White-balance Area 3-24. . . . . . .

Reflection Illumination 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reflection White-balance Area 3-25. . . . . . . . . .

Light Table Illumination 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.3 Platen 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aqua Strip 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Copy Holder Registration Edges 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission Format 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reflection Format 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.4 Mirror 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.5 Lens 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optical Baffles 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.6 CCD Image Sensor 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CCD Description 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CCD Clocks 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 Electronics 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.1 Introduction 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.2 Power Supply 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

+5 V 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

+24 V 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

+18 V 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-12 V 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.3 CCD Headboard 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xiv) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

CCD Clock Drivers 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Output Buffers 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4 Digitizer Board 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Modes 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CCD Signal 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input Multiplexer and Level Shifter - RGB 3-38. . . .

Correlated Double Sampling (CDS) 3-39. . . . . . . . . .

RGB Multiplexer 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) 3-40. . . . . . . .

Voltage Sensor 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Temperature Sensor 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Control 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Image Processing (Formatting) 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.5 System Board 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Controller 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Image Processor 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clock Generation and Synchronization 3-49. . . . . . .

SCSI Controller 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motion Control 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stepper Motors 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Servo Motor 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.6 Lamp Driver Board 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lamp Driver Block Diagram 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lamp Driver Blocks 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input RFI Filter 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Soft Inrush Current Circuit 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

+5 V and +14 V Regulators 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Low Voltage Monitor 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Boost Converter 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Temperature Monitor 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Serial DAC 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Serial ADC 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Five Lamp Interlock Circuit 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xv)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCO) 3-62. . . . . . . .

Heater Drivers 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ballast Circuit 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.7 Sensors 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enlargement Datum Sensor 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Focus Datum Sensor 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X-Slide Datum Sensor 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main Carriage Datum Sensor 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main Carriage Limit Sensors 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.8 Interlocks 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.9 Display Board 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.10 Distribution Boards 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LH Distribution Board 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RH Distribution Board 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly 3-71. . . . .

3.5 Motion Control 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.1 Main Carriage Drive Mechanism 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . .

Main Carriage Sensors 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Forward Limit Sensor 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reverse Limit Sensor 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Datum Sensor 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.2 Stepper Motor Control 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ramping 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Software Limits 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.3 X-Slide Carriage Drive Mechanism 3-75. . . . . . . . . .

3.5.4 Enlargement Drive Mechanism 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.5 Focus Drive Mechanism 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6 Structure 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.1 Introduction 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.2 Stand 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.3 Pedestal 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.4 Base 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xvi) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

3.6.5 Platen Support 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.6 Enclosure Fan Filter Housing 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.7 Main Cover 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.8 Lid 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4 Unit Replacement Procedures

4.1 Recommended List of Tools 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 Preparation for Replacement Procedures 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Replacement Procedures 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 Lightbar Assembly 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4.1 Lightbar 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removal Procedure 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacement Procedure 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4.2 Transmission Lamp 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lamp Removal Procedure 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking, Cleaning and Removing the Diffuser 4-7

Lamp Replacement Procedure 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4.3 Transmission Lamp Detector Board 4-8. . . . . . . . . .



4.5 Lightbar Interlock 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.6 Reflection Tray and Transmission Column 4-12. . . . . . . . . . .



4.7 Stand Covers 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Preliminaries

(xvii)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003


4.8 Enclosure Fan Filter 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.9 RFI Box Modules 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.1 RFI Box Cover 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.9.2 System Board 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.9.3 Dongle for Sprint Operation 4-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.9.4 PSU and Cable Loom 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.9.5 RFI Box Cooling Fan 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.9.6 Main Power Switch 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.10 Protective Covers and Gas Struts 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.1 Lid Gas-Struts 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.10.2 Lid Assembly 4-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Preliminaries

(xviii) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

4.11 Main Cover 4-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Open Procedure 4-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Close Procedure 4-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11.1 Reflection White-Balance Strip 4-35. . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.11.2 Main-Cover Gas-Struts 4-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.11.3 Main-Cover Assembly 4-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.12 Moving the Main Carriage 4-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.1 Workstation Diagnostics Method 4-41. . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.2 Terminal Diagnostics Method 4-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.3 Mechanical Method 4-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13 Safety Interlocks 4-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.1 Main Cover Interlocks 4-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.13.2 Lid Interlocks 4-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.14 Platen 4-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.15 Reflection Lamps Assembly 4-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.15.1 Reflection Lamps 4-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Preliminaries

(xix)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

4.15.2 Reflection Lamp Holders 4-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.15.3 Reflection Lamp Detector Boards 4-54. . . . . . . . . . .



4.15.4 Mirror 4-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.16 Light Table Assembly 4-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.16.1 LT -Lamps 4-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.16.2 LT-Lamp Holders 4-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.17 Lamp Driver Module 4-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18 Base and Structure Modules 4-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.18.1 Flexicable - 50-Way 4-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.2 Flexicable - 62-Way 4-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.3 Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly 4-68. . . . .



Preliminaries

(xx) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

4.18.4 Main Carriage Datum Sensor 4-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.5 Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor 4-74. . . . . . . . .



4.18.6 Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor 4-75. . . . . . . . .



4.18.7 Standby Switch 4-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.8 Standby Switch Cable 4-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.9 Display Board 4-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.10 Display Board Ribbon Cable 4-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.11 LH Distribution Board 4-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.12 LH Ribbon Cable 4-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.13 RH Distribution Board 4-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.18.14 RH Ribbon Cable 4-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Preliminaries

(xxi)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

4.18.15 Enclosure Fan 4-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.19 Main Leadscrew Assembly 4-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.19.1 Leadscrew Nut Clamp Plate 4-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.19.2 Main Carriage Leadscrew 4-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.19.3 Main Leadscrew Motor 4-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.19.4 Main Leadscrew Coupling 4-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.19.5 C-Bearing Assembly 4-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.19.6 Fit Front Transit Fixing 4-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.19.7 Remove Front Transit Fixing 4-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.19.8 Main Carriage Wheel Bearings 4-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Two-Wheel Carriage 4-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removal Procedure 4-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacement Procedure 4-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

One-Wheel Carriage 4-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removal Procedure 4-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacement Procedure 4-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.20 X-Slide Carriage Assembly 4-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.20.1 Moving the X-Slide Carriage 4-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.20.2 Moving the Lens Mount 4-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.20.3 Moving the CCD Mount 4-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxii) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

4.20.4 X-Slide Carriage 4-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.20.5 X-slide Carriage Bearings Assembly 4-108. . . . . . . . .



4.20.6 Digitizer Board Cover Plate 4-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.20.7 Digitizer Fan 4-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.20.8 Digitizer Board 4-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.20.9 Focus Motor Rack 4-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Replacement/Alignment Procedure 4-115. . . . . . . . . .

4.20.10 Focus Motor and Cable Loom 4-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.20.11 Focus Datum Sensor and Cable Loom 4-117. . . . . . . .



4.20.12 Enlargement Datum Sensor and Cable Loom 4-119. . .



4.20.13 Enlargement Leadscrew 4-120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.20.14 Enlargement Leadscrew Clamp 4-122. . . . . . . . . . . . .



Preliminaries

(xxiii)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

4.20.15 Enlargement Motor and Cable Loom 4-123. . . . . . . . .



4.20.16 Cam Follower 4-124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.21 X-slide Leadscrew Assembly 4-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.21.1 X-slide Datum Sensor and Cable Loom 4-127. . . . . . .



4.21.2 X-slide Leadscrew 4-128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



4.21.3 X-slide Leadscrew Motor and Cable Loom 4-130. . . .



4.21.4 X-slide Leadscrew Clamp 4-132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Chapter 5 Terminal Diagnostics

5.1 Overview 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Power-up Sequence 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1 Power-on Tests 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Terminal Diagnostics User Interface 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1 The Terminal Diagnostics Display 5-5. . . . . . . . . . .

VT100 Emulation Operation 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Access on a Macintosh/PC 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The VT100 Display 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Entering Commands 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxiv) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

5.3.2 Global Commands 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Command Line Editing 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Soak Test Operation 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verbose Command 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.3 Standard Monitor Commands 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Monitor Mode Operation 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Servo Motor Commands 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stepper Motor Commands 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.4 Display Utilities 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 Terminal Diagnostic Tests 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5 System Board Tests 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.1 Introduction 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.2 CPU Tests 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

cpu_test Menu Path 5-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.3 Sys_brd Tests 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCSI_Tests 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

scsi_tests Menu Path 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DSP_Tests 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

dsp_tests Menu Path 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sync_Tests 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

sync_tests Menu Path 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.4 Mcb_brd Tests 5-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

mcb_brd Tests Menu Path 5-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6 Digitizer Board Tests 5-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.1 Introduction 5-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.2 Digitizing System 5-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.3 Dig_brd Tests 5-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Tests Menu Path 5-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Function Tests Menu Path 5-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxv)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

5.7 Lamp Driver Board Tests 5-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.1 Introduction 5-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lamp_brd Tests Menu Path 5-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.8 Utilities 5-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.8.1 Introduction 5-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Utilities Menu Path 5-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.9 Optics Tests 5-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.9.1 Introduction 5-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optics Menu Path 5-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.10 Mechanical Tests 5-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.10.1 Introduction 5-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mech Menu Path 5-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.10.2 Service Menu 5-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Menu Path 5-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Alignments and Calibrations

6.1 Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Camera Alignment 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Carriage Alignment 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Calibration 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-dot SP Calibrations 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 Test Films 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 Setup Introduction 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.1 Setup Menu Path 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 Carriage Alignment 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4.1 Carriage Menu Introduction 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Carriage Tests Menu Path 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4.2 Light_bar Alignment 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxvi) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

Lightbar Alignment Target 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparation 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alignment Procedure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4.3 Diff_Focus Alignment 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustment Procedure for Two-wheel Carriage 6-11.

Adjustment Procedure for One-wheel Carriage 6-14.

6.5 System Calibration 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.1 Calibrate Menu Introduction 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrate Tests Menu Path 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.2 System Calibration Target Areas 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.3 Main Carriage Datum 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.4 X-slide Carriage Datum 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.5 Enlargement & Focus Calibration 6-21. . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.6 Start of Scan Offsets 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.7 Bad (CCD) Pixel Elimination 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.8 All 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.9 Registration Bar Calibration 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.10 Copyholder Search Enable/Disable 6-28. . . . . . . . . .

6.6 C-dot SP Calibrations 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.1 C-dot Platen Calibration for Sharpnessat 36 Lines/mm 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.2 C-dot Platen Calibration for Sharpnessat 45 Lines/mm 6-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.3 Swathe Scanning Calibration 6-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxvii)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

6.7 Saving Calibration Data to a Secure Location 6-41. . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7 Workstation Diagnostics

7.1 Introduction 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 Launching the Diagnostics Application 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 Workstation Diagnostics Menus 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3.1 File Menu 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Save As 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Preview 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Setup 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verbose 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Temperature Readings 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clear Logs 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quit 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3.2 View menu 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3.3 Window Menu 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Arrange Icons 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanner 0 - 6 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3.4 Configuration Menu 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rescan 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanner 0 - 6 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Details 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Carriage Positions 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3.5 Buffers Menu 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Load Code 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Write Buffer 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Read Buffer 7-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3.6 SCSI Buffers 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanner Application System 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DRAM Area 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxviii) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

Boot System 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Data 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanner Application System Log 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostics FLASH Log 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostics RAM Log 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scripts Buffer 7-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Statistical Data 7-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3.7 Tests Menu 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostic Tests (Ctrl+T) 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electronic Repro (Ctrl+R) 7-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Soak Tests (Ctrl+S) 7-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3.8 Calibrate Menu 7-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 Tool Bar Buttons 7-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5 Diagnostic Tests 7-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6 Electronic Repro Tests 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6.1 Electronic Repro Test Subjects 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6.2 Positioning the Electronic Repro Test Subject 7-33. .

7.6.3 Electronic Repro Procedure 7-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7 Downloading Firmware to the Scanner 7-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8 Maintenance

8.1 Introduction 8-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.1 Maintenance and Service 8-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.2 Safety Interlock Checks 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3 Cleaning Procedures 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3.1 Handling and Cleaning of Optical Components 8-3.

Recommended List of Tools 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Approved Materials 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxix)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

Policy 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visual Inspection 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning Processes 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3.2 Cleaning Preparations and Completions 8-6. . . . . . .

8.3.3 Platen Cleaning Procedures 8-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Topside Procedure 8-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Underside Procedure 8-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3.4 Mirror Cleaning Procedure 8-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3.5 Lens Cleaning Procedure 8-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3.6 CCD-Window Cleaning Procedure 8-10. . . . . . . . . . .

8.4 Scanner Health (Confidence) Check 8-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix Electrical Reference Data

A.1 Module Locations A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.1.1 Flexicable Looms A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.2 Power Supply Unit (PSU) A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.3 System Board A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.3.1 System Board Connectors A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL1 to LH Distribution Board A-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SK1 to RH Distribution Board A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SK2 to Main Carriage Servo Motor A-14. . . . . . . . . .

SK3 to Lamp Driver Board A-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SK4 to Digitizer Board A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.3.2 Fuses A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.3.3 Switches A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.3.4 LEDs A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.3.5 Relays A-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.3.6 Links A-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.4 CCD Headboard A-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.4.1 CCD Headboard Connector A-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxx) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

SK1 to Digitizer Board A-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.5 Digitizer Board A-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.5.1 Digitizer Board Connectors A-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL1 to Enlargement Datum Sensor A-25. . . . . . . . . . .

PL2 to Enlargement Motor A-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL3 to Focus Motor A-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL4 to Digitizer Fan A-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.5.2 Test Points A-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6 Lamp Driver Board A-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.1 Lamp Driver Board Connectors A-29. . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL1 to Reflection Lamps A-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL2 to Transmission Lamp A-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL3 to Light Table Lamps A-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SK1 to Lamp Detector Boards A-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.2 Test Points A-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.3 LEDs A-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.4 Links A-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.5 Lamp Detector Boards A-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lamp Detector Connections A-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.7 RH Distribution Board A-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.7.1 RH Distribution Board Connectors A-35. . . . . . . . . . .

PL3 to Main Carriage Datum Sensor A-36. . . . . . . . .

PL4 to Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor A-36. . .

PL5 to Main Cover - RH Interlock A-37. . . . . . . . . . .

PL6 to Lid Interlocks A-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.8 LH Distribution Board A-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.8.1 LH Distribution Board Connectors A-38. . . . . . . . . . .

PL1 to Enclosure Fan A-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL2 to Display Board A-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL3 to Main Cover - LH Interlock A-40. . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxxi)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

PL4 to Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor A-40. . .

A.9 Flexicable Distribution Boards A-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.9.1 Flexicable Distribution Boards Connectors A-42. . . .

PL4 to X-slide Motor A-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL5 to Lightbar Interlock A-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL6 to X-slide Datum Sensor A-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PL7 to Focus Datum Sensor A-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.10 Display Board Layout A-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix Fault Diagnosis

B.1 Image Defects B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.1 Introduction B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.2 Lack of Sharpness B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.3 Streaks B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light Streaks B-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deep Streaks in Shadows B-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.4 Distortion B-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Skew B-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compression or Stretching B-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.5 Tonal Problems B-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.6 Subtle Colour Errors B-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.7 Patterning B-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.8 Cropping Errors B-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.9 Graininess B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analogue Noise B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lack of Smoothness B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.2 Troubleshooting Guide B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.2.1 Introduction B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.2.2 Symptom Indications B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.2.3 Loss of Power Faults B-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxxii) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

B.2.4 POST Failures B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.2.5 Application Error Messages B-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.2.6 Image Defects B-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.2.7 Diagnostic Test Numbers B-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index Index-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figures

Figure 1.1 C-550 Lanovia Scanner system 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1.2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner construction 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1.3 Electrical module locations within the scanner 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2.1 Warning label inside RFI box and on lamp-driver module 2-2. . . . . . . . . Figure 2.2 Serial rating label 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2.3 Warning label in front of enclosure fan 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2.4 Caution labels under main cover 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2.5 Servo motor encoder labels 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3.1 Overview of system blocks 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.2 Transmission scanning 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.3 Transmission and reflection scan illumination 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.4 Mirror, lens mount and CCD mount (camera sub-assembly) 3-21. . . . . . . Figure 3.5 Transmission illumination 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.6 Reflection illumination 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.7 Transmission format 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.8 Reflection format 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.9 CCD image sensor 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.10 Electrical module locations within the scanner 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.11 CCD headboard 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.12 Digitizer 1 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.13 Digitizer 2 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.14 System board block diagram 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxxiii)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

Figure 3.15 Scanner image-data flow – original system board 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.16 Scanner image-data flow – Kicker system board 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.17 A stepper motor electronic block 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.18 Servo motor electronic blocks 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.19 Lamp driver module 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.20 Lamp driver block diagram 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.21 Lamp driver switched-mode PSU 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.22 Lamp driver system board interface 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.23 Transmission lamp driver 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.24 Reflection lamps driver 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.25 Light table lamps driver 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.26 Flexicable sensor interconnections 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.27 Ribbon cable sensor interconnections 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.28 Interlock system 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.29 Flexicable distribution boards assembly 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.30 X-Slide leadscrew backlash nut 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.31 Schematic of X-slide carriage interfaces 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.32 Enlargement drive 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.33 Focus drive mechanism 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.34 C-550 Lanovia scanner structure 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.35 Base and platen support 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 4.1 Service tree 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.2 Lightbar assembly 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.3 Transmission lamp 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.4 Transmission lamp detector board 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.5 Lightbar interlock 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.6 Reflection Tray and Transmission Column 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.7 Stand covers 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.8 Enclosure fan filter 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.9 RFI box - removing cover 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.10 System board 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.11 Removing and fitting the dongle 4-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.12 WA 304 PSU and cable loom 4-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.13 Sirius 250 PSU and cable loom 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.14 RFI-box cooling fan 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxxiv) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

Figure 4.15 Mains power switch 4-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.16 Lid gas-struts 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.17 Lid assembly 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.18 Opening the main cover 4-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.19 Reflection white-balance strip 4-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.20 Main-cover gas-struts 4-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.21 Main cover removal 4-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.22 Workstation diagnostics display 4-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.23 Carriage positions menu 4-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.24 Mech - service menu 4-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.25 Moving the main carriage 4-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.26 Main cover interlocks 4-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.27 Lid interlocks 4-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.28 Platen 4-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.29 Reflection lamps assembly 4-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.30 Reflection lamp replacement 4-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.31 Mirror 4-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.32 Light table assembly 4-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.33 LT lamps removal 4-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.34 Lamp driver module 4-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.35 Flexicables: 50-way and 62-way 4-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.36 Flexicable distribution boards assembly 4-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.37 Main carriage datum and reverse limit sensors 4-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.38 Main carriage left-end limit sensor 4-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.39 Standby power switch 4-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.40 Display board 4-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.41 LH distribution board 4-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.42 RH distribution board 4-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.43 Enclosure fan 4-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.44 Leadscrew nut clamp plate 4-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.45 Main carriage leadscrew 4-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.46 Main leadscrew motor and coupling 4-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.47 C-bearing assembly 4-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.48 C-bearing alignment 4-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.49 Main carriage wheels 4-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.50 Main carriage wheel 4-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxxv)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

Figure 4.51 Moving the X-slide carriage 4-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.52 Moving the lens mount 4-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.53 Moving the CCD mount 4-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.54 X-slide leadscrew nut 4-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.55 X-slide bearing alignment 4-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.56 X-slide carriage bearing on guide bar assembly 4-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.57 X-slide guide bar alignment 4-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.58 Digitizer board cover plate 4-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.59 Digitizer fan removal 4-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.60 Digitizer board 4-113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.61 Focus motor rack alignment 4-115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.62 Focus motor 4-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.63 Focus datum sensor 4-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.64 CCD baffle and enlargement sensor 4-119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.65 Enlargement leadscrew and clamp 4-121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.66 Enlargement motor and cable loom 4-123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.67 Cam follower 4-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.68 X-slide datum sensor and cable loom 4-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.69 X-slide leadscrew 4-129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.70 X-slide leadscrew motor and cable loom 4-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5.1 Menu Map for the scanner 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5.2 Power-up and software access diagram 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5.3 Terminal diagnostics opening screen 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5.4 Elec/menu tree 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5.5 Terminal view of the mtr_sens display 5-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5.6 Terminal view of the lmp_sens display 5-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5.7 Terminal view of the sys_sens display 5-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6.1 Engineer’s Calibration Chart 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.2 Lightbar alignment target, 75524070 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.3 Alignment target fitted to the lightbar 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.4 Location of interface plate adjustment screws 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.5 Engineer’s Calibration Chart on platen 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.6 Differential focus bar 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.7 Adjusting screw 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.8 Placement of Engineer’s Calibration Chart 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxxvi) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

Figure 6.9 Registration bars 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.10 Fitting registration bars to platen 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.11 C-dot scanner calibration target on platen 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.12 Swathe scanning calibration target on platen 6-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.13 Swathe scanning calibration target on platen showing cross-hairs 6-39. .

Figure 7.1 Electronic Repro Transparency 7-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7.2 Engineer’s Calibration Chart 7-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7.3 Electronic repro image 7-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 8.1 Optical components 8-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure A.1 Electrical module locations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.2 Arrangement of flexicables A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.3 Main system interconnections A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.4 Distribution board interconnections A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.5 Lamp driver board interconnections A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.6 PSU Layout A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.7 System board layout: pre-Kicker A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.8 Kicker System board layout A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.9 CCD headboard layout A-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.10 Digitizer board layout A-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.11 Lamp driver board layout A-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.12 Lamp detector board layout A-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.13 RH distribution board layout A-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.14 LH distribution board layout A-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.15 Flexicable distribution boards layout A-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.16 LED display board layout A-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure B.1 Lack of sharpness example B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure B.2 Example of a light streak B-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure B.3 Example of distortion B-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure B.4 Tonal problem example B-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure B.5 Example of patterning B-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure B.6 Example of a cropping error B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure B.7 Example of graininess B-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxxvii)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

Tables

Table 3.1 Enlargement resolutions 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5.1 Flashing fault-lamp modes 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.2 Global commands 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.3 Standard monitor commands 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.4 Servo motor test commands 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.5 Stepper motor test commands 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.6 Display logs menu 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.7 CPU_test menu 5-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.8 Sys_brd tests 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.9 SCSI_tests 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.10 dsp_tests 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.11 Sync_tests 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.12 mcb_brd tests 5-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.13 Dig_brd tests 5-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.14 Basic tests 5-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.15 Function tests 5-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.16 lamp_brd utilities and tests 5-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.17 Utils menu 5-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.18 Optics tests 5-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.19 Mechanical tests 5-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.20 Service tests 5-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6.1 Setup Menu Tests 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6.2 Carriage tests 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6.3 Calibrate tests 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 7.1 SCSI Buffer identities 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A.1 PSU AC-connections A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.2 PSU DC-connections A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.3 System board connectors A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.4 System board to LH distribution board connections A-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.5 System board to RH distribution board connections A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.6 System board to main carriage servo motor connections A-14. . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxxviii) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

Table A.7 System board to traverse distribution board tolamp driver board connections A-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A.8 System board to traverse distribution board todigitizer board connections A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A.9 Fuses on system board A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.10 Switches on system board A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.11 LEDs on system board A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.12 Relays on system board A-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.13 Links on system board A-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.14 CCD headboard to digitizer board connections A-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.15 Digitizer board connectors A-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.16 Enlargement datum sensor connections A-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.17 Enlargement motor connections A-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.18 Focus motor connections A-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.19 Digitizer fan connections A-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.20 Digitizer board test points A-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.21 Lamp driver board connectors A-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.22 Reflection lamps connections A-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.23 Transmission lamp connections A-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.24 Light table lamps connections A-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.25 Lamp detector board connections A-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.26 Test points on lamp driver board A-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.27 LEDs on lamp driver board A-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.28 LEDs on lamp driver board A-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.29 Lamp detector connections A-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.30 RH distribution board connectors A-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.31 Main carriage datum sensor connections A-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.32 Main carriage reverse limit sensor connections A-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.33 Main cover RH interlock connections A-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.34 Lid interlock connections A-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.35 LH distribution board connectors A-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.36 Enclosure fan connections A-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.37 Display board connections A-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.38 Main cover LH interlock connections A-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.39 Main carriage forward limit sensor connections A-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.40 Connectors on Traverse and X-slide distribution boards A-42. . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xxxix)Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

Table A.41 X-Slide motor connections A-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.42 Lightbar interlock connections A-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.43 X-slide datum sensor connections A-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.44 Focus datum sensor connections A-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table B.1 Loss of power faults B-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B.2 POST failures B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B.3 Application error messages B-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B.4 Image Defects B-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B.5 Diagnostic test numbers B-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminaries

(xl) C–550 Lanovia Scanner

Issue Records

Third issueChanges to Accessories Kit sectionMinor technical changeNew section on reading copymount details. Also revised fornew system board and power supplyChanges in replacement procedures for transmission lightbar,the main carriage leadscrew + bearings, system board /dongle and power supply. Also other minor changes.New procedure for moving stepper motor and changes todiagnosic commandsRevised for differential focus adjustment, register barcalibration, C-dot calibrations and other changesChange to Electronic Repro procedure and other changesNon-technical changeChanges for new system board and PSUNon-technical changes onlyThird issue

02020203

03

02

02

0202030202

Prelim123

4

5

6

78

App AApp BIndex

Chap Pages Issue Date Comments/Changes

40228

84

132

40

44

481244288

06/9906/9906/9911/99

11/99

06/99

06/99

06/9906/9911/9906/9906/99

Note: The ISSUE STATE of a document or chapter is indicated by the last two digits of its document number (e.g. the firstre-issue of document 6500123000 becomes 6500123001, and the second re-issue becomes 6500123002 etc.). Achange of issue state indicates that substantial changes have been made to the document or chapter, although thisdoes not necessarily mean that the contents of each page have changed.

1-1Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800002

1 System Description

This chapter provides a general overview of the C-550 LanoviaScanner and describes its major features.

1.1 Overview of FeaturesThe C-550 Lanovia Scanner is a versatile A3-format scanningsystem. The two major components are:

• a Macintosh workstation,

• the scanner.

Figure 1.1 shows the typical C-550 Lanovia Scanner system.

WORKSTATION

C-550 LANOVIASCANNER

Figure 1.1 C-550 Lanovia Scanner system

The C-550 Lanovia Scanner is a floor-standing unit designed andstyled to fit in a desktop publishing environment.

System Description

1-2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner

The C-550 Lanovia Scanner will scan transmission and reflectionoriginals up to a maximum size of 470 mm x 350 mm.

The flush platen allows oversize originals to be scanned.

The C-550 Lanovia Scanner will scan copy objects up to 4 mmthick, without removing the lightbar assembly (transmission-lightsource). For thicker copy or 3D objects, the lightbar assemblymust be removed.

1.1.1 Workstation

The function of the workstation is to control the scanner, provideworkflow management and job setup tools, perform colourcorrections and image sharpening processes on scanned images,and also report the status of the scanner.

The workstation is also used to operate the diagnostic software,the system setup, the alignment and calibration software, and theelectronic repro software.

The workstation is connected to the C-550 Lanovia Scanner by asingle-ended SCSI cable.

1.1.2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner

The C-550 Lanovia system is an A3-size flatbed input scannerwhich supports a variety of scan techniques:

• transmission copy,

• reflection copy,

• line-art,

• 3D objects,

• oversized originals.

Images are captured by a CCD image sensor, digitized, and thenstored as image files.

System Description


The scanner has a horizontal fixed-glass platen. Scanning isperformed by moving the camera head sub-assembly under theplaten. Illumination for transmission copy is from a lightbar,mounted above the platen, which moves in unison with the mirrorand the camera.

The scanner will scan both reflection and transmission copy insizes from 35 mm to A3. Copy may be mounted directly on tothe platen or on special copy holders.

The scanner provides an RS232 interface port for terminaldiagnostics by way of a VT100 type terminal.

The scanner has four casters. It also has two adjustable feet toraise the base and so fix its position.

The scanner is provided with an extensive suite of diagnosticswhich are available to both the customer and the field serviceengineer. However, the customer does not have access to theterminal diagnostics facility.

1.1.3 Modules

The design of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner allows the equipmentto be built and serviced in modular form.

Modules are available as field replaceable units (FRUs). Thediagnostics test the functionality of the modules with a pass orfail status.

The major physical modules are summarized in Figure 1.2.

The electrical/electronic modules are summarized in Figure 1.3.

System Description


MIRROR

REFLECTIONLAMPS

MAIN CARRIAGEDRIVE

LIGHTBAR ASSEMBLY

LAMP DRIVERMODULE

PLATEN

MAINCARRIAGE

BASE ANDSTRUCTURE

X-SLIDE CARRIAGE

X-SLIDELEADSCREW

CAMERAHEAD

ENLARGEMENTDRIVE

FOCUSDRIVE

STEPPERMOTORS

MAINLEADSCREW

LENS

LIGHT TABLE

Figure 1.2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner construction

System Description


DIGITIZERBOARD

CCDHEADBOARD LAMP DRIVER

BOARD

LAMPDETECTOR

BOARDS

RHDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

SYSTEMBOARD

PSU

MAINSWITCH

RFI BOX

REFER TO Figure 3.29FOR FLEXICABLES

STANDBYSWITCH

VIEWEDFROM FRONT

LHDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

DISPLAYBOARD

Figure 1.3 Electrical module locations within the scanner

System Description


1.2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner Modules

1.2.1 Introduction

The scanner has several aspects of operation which influence itsmodular construction:

• Mechanical,

• Optical,

• Electrical,

• Electronics,

• Interlocks and Sensors.

1.2.2 Mechanical Modules

The mechanics involve the hardware modules which control themovements and positioning of the scanning components.

The structure module provides the base for the main carriage, theplaten supports and the positive pressure cooling fan. At the backof the pedestal, the RFI box houses the PSU and system controlelectronics.

The main carriage supports the X-slide carriage, the light table,and the Reflection column.

The X-slide carriage supports the the camera-head assembly. Thisconsists of the lens, the CCD mount and drive mechanisms toenable accurate positioning.

Main Carriage

The main carriage moves in the slow scan direction. The forwarddirection is from right-to-left and the reverse direction is fromleft-to-right.

System Description


The datum and park positions of the main carriage are at theright-hand end of the scanner.

The main carriage provides support for the X-slide drivemechanism.

X-slide Carriage

The X-slide carriage provides the platform for the lens mount, theCCD-mount, and the stepper motors which position the camerafor focussing and enlargement of the received image.

The X-slide carriage supports the camera-head slide and trays.

This carriage is moved to bring the centre line of the camera intoalignment with the copy positioned on the platen.

Lens Mount

This mount supports the lens which can be moved along thecamera-head slide in a variable relation to the CCD mount.

The lens mount is fixed to the enlargement leadscrew assemblywhich mechanically moves the mount along the camera-headslide. The lens is positioned by its own stepper motor inrelationship with the CCD mount.

The enlargement datum sensor is situated under the camera headand it references the distance to the lens mount.

CCD Mount

The CCD mount supports the CCD headboard, the digitizerboard, two stepper motors, and the digitizer fan.

The CCD mount is moved by the focus motor pinion along afixed rack relative to the X-slide carriage.

A focus-datum sensor is situated behind the enlargement motorand it references the position of the CCD mount.

System Description


1.2.3 Optical Components

The optical components include:

• Illumination system (fluorescent lamps),

• Image forming system (mirror and lens),

• Three-stripe CCD image sensor.

Illumination

Three sources of light are provided. They are as follows:

• Transmission lightbar,

• Reflection lamps,

• Light table.

Transmission Lamp

The lightbar source provides variable illumination fortransmission scanning. Transmission scanning uses a light sourcethat is above the platen. Transmission light passes through theoriginal which is placed on the platen.

Reflection Lamps

The reflection lamps provide variable illumination for reflectionscanning. Reflection scanning uses the illumination providedunder the platen. Reflection light reflects off the original placedon the platen.

System Description


Light Table Lamps

The light table source provides fixed illumination to theunderside of a diffused sheet having grid lines. These grid lineshave been provided to assist the user in mounting an original.

The light table uses a front and a rear lamp to illuminate theunderside of transparencies.

The diffuser sheet provides uniform illumination over the wholearea of the platen.

Platen

The glass platen supports originals, whether they are2-dimensional or 3-dimensional objects.

A portion of the platen is used for Transmission white-balancereferencing. This area may be also used for reflection scanningbut not transmission scanning.

Mirror Mount

The fixed mirror is mounted on the main carriage at 45 to theplaten face. The mounted mirror travels with the main carriage.

The mirrored image is reflected to the lens of the camera.

Lens

The lens is mounted on the lens mount and is moved by theenlargement drive-mechanism.

Together the mirror and lens form an image of the copy, receivedthrough the platen, on the CCD array. The relative positions ofthe copy, the lens, and the CCD array are controlled by theenlargement and focussing drive-mechanisms.

The lens mount is a part of the X-slide carriage assembly.

System Description


CCD Headboard

The camera uses a tri-linear CCD sensor array. One line is used todetect the red spectral region. Another is used to detect the blueand the third to detect the green.

The CCD assembly is mounted on the CCD headboard which sitsin front of the digitizer board. Both boards are housed in a metalenclosure which also supports a cooling fan.

1.2.4 Electrical Modules

A single PSU provides all of the required DC voltages for thewhole scanner system.

Power Supplies

The power supply voltages produced are listed as follows:

• +5 V Logic for system and digitizer boards,

• +24 V Power for the motors, fans and lamps,

• +18 V For the CCD and digitizer analogue circuits,

• -12 V For the CCD and digitizer analogue circuits.

Lamp Driver Module

The lamp driver module is located at the rear of the light table. Itreceives its +24 V supply from the system board by way of theflexicable distribution system.

Power to all five fluorescent lamps is delivered from thelamp-driver module.

System Description


Lamp Driver Control

The light-table lamps have a fixed intensity level, whereas thetransmission and reflection lamps have dimmer and detectioncontrols.

The transmission and reflection lamps have opto-sensors tomeasure the presence and intensity of light.

Main Carriage Servo Motor

The DC-servo motor encoder drives the leadscrew whichtraverses the main carriage. The encoder output is 2,000 clockpulses per rotation. With such accuracy the main carriage can bepositioned in steps of 1 micron.

X-slide Carriage Stepper Motor

The X-slide stepper-motor drives the leadscrew which traversesthe X-slide carriage. One rotation of the pinion is completed in400 half-steps. One step (running in half-step mode) moves thecarriage by 10 microns.

Enlargement Stepper Motor

The enlargement stepper-motor drives the leadscrew whichtraverses the lens mount along the camera slide. One rotation ofthe pinion is completed in 400 half-steps. One step (running inhalf-step mode) moves the lens mount by 10 microns.

Focus Stepper Motor

The focus stepper-motor uses a rack and pinion drive to traversethe CCD mount along the camera slide. One rotation of thepinion is completed in 800 quarter-steps. One step (running inquarter-step mode) moves the CCD mount by 15.707 microns.

System Description


Fans

There are three cooling fans. They are used as follows:

• The enclosure fan is internally located at the left-hand end ofthe base and structure assembly. If the safety interlocks areactivated, then the fan is disabled.

• The RFI box fan is located at the rear of the scanner.

• The digitizer fan is located on the backplate of the digitizermodule.

1.2.5 Electronic Components

The electronics involve the hardware on the printed circuit boardsand the interfacing control which synchronize the mechanics andoptics to produce the required imaging output.

System Board

The system board is the central control board of the scanner andhas the functional blocks described below. It also provides theplug for the connection of the dongle which enables Sprintfuntionality.

System Controller

This system controller manages all operating functions andcommunication links with all of the other control blocks.

FLASH Memory

The system controller uses FLASH memory. The FLASHmemory is divided into the following sections:

• Application software,

System Description


• Diagnostic software,

• System profile data from the calibration tests.

The contents of the FLASH memory can be changed by thesystem controller by downloading new data from the workstation.

Sensors and Interlock Control

The system board contains the circuits for the scanner interlocksystem.

Image Processor

The image processor performs the image processing functions,using a Digital Signal Processor (DSP).

SCSI Controller

The SCSI controller controls the SCSI communications link withthe workstation.

Motion Control

The system board contains the motion circuits that control theservo motor and the three stepper motors.

The three stepper-motor drives are identical except for theirresolution, which is quarter or half-step. They drive the X-slidecarriage leadscrew, the focus rack, and the enlargement leadscrew.

Synchronization Control

Synchronization ensures that lines of the image data are capturedat the correct position in the scan.

System Description


Environment Monitoring

The system board contains circuits that perform voltagemonitoring and temperature sensing.

CCD Headboard

The CCD headboard buffers the CCD clock signals. It alsoconnects the signal outputs to the digitizer board.

Digitizer Board

The digitizer board is part of the camera head and it provides thefront-end analogue electronics for the CCD array.

Digitizer Board Monitoring

The digitizer board contains circuits that perform voltagemonitoring and temperature sensing.

Display Board

The display board has three LEDs to indicate status conditions.

The three display LEDs are used as follows:

• Status reporting while in boot mode,

• Scanner operating states,

• Power.

1.2.6 Interlocks and Sensors

Interlocks and sensors are used to:

System Description


• provide safety switching of motor driven mechanisms, lampsand the fan when the lid or main cover is opened,

• provide datum and limit sensing of the moving carriages.

The transmission lightbar has a switch interlock to indicate thepresence of the lightbar. This interlock activates the lid interlocks.

The magnetic lid interlocks prevent the operation of the maincarriage drive when the lid is opened and the lightbar is present.

The magnetic main cover interlocks prevent the operation of allmechanical parts, the enclosure fan and fluorescent lampswhenever the main cover is opened.

Datum Sensors

The main carriage, X-slide carriage, lens mount, and CCD mounteach have a datum sensor to initialize the carriage positions whenthe scanner is booted up.

Limit Sensors

The main carriage has limit sensors to cut the supply of power toits servo motor under fault conditions.

System Description


1.3 C-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics

1.3.1 Introduction

There are two levels of diagnostics. They are the workstationdiagnostics and the terminal diagnostics.

Workstation Diagnostics

The workstation diagnostics are used by both the customer andthe field-service engineer. Communication between theworkstation and the scanner is via the single-ended SCSI link.

Note: Using this method, it is only possible to run a subset of theterminal diagnostics. For access to the full set, refer to theterminal diagnostics section.

The workstation diagnostics can perform most of the availabletests and it can use its SCSI buffers to either upload existingprogram code from the system board or download new code to aremote facility.

Terminal Diagnostics

The terminal diagnostics program is only available to the fieldservice engineer.

With a RS232 cable fitted, the scanner can run its own diagnosticroutines using either a remote terminal or a terminal-emulationprogram that runs on a Macintosh or PC.

The terminal diagnostics program can run the complete range oftests.

Chapter 5 covers the use of the terminal-diagnostic routines.

Chapter 6 covers the use of the alignment and calibration routinesvia the Setup menu of the diagnostics program.

Chapter 7 covers the workstation-diagnostics menus and accesspaths.

System Description


1.4 System Fault Diagnosis

1.4.1 Introduction

System faults are broadly categorized into four levels (SeeAppendix B).

• Non-active scanners in which the power supply - or thesystem processor - has completely failed.

• Power-up Self Test (POST) failures which are discovered bythe boot routines.

• Error message reporting at the workstation.

• Image defects which affect the quality of the scan eventhough the scanner passes all of the diagnostic tests.

1.4.2 Diagnostic Tests

Diagnostic tests are provided to test most of the field replacementunits (FRUs). A systematic approach to diagnostics is as follows:

• If the scanner develops a fault, run the diagnostic tests.

• The diagnostic tests will detect many of the electrical, optical,and mechanical problems and so help to identify the relevantunit that is associated with the failure. Always investigate thefirst test to fail.

• If the diagnostic tests all pass, then it is probably an optical ora mechanical problem. Refer to Appendix B for faultdiagnosis guidelines.

• Special care must be exercised to maintain the cleanlinessstandards of all the optical components.

• Within the scanning application that operates on theworkstation, error messages are raised when a problem withthe scanner is detected.

System Description


1.5 Alignment and Calibration

1.5.1 Introduction

The alignment and calibration procedures are only run after asuccessful pass of the diagnostic tests.

These procedures are first run at the factory after the scanner hasbeen built. They are then run when either an important FRU hasto be replaced with a new unit and after scan failures have beenreported.

The alignment and calibration procedures provide valuablefeedback for making the required mechanical adjustments. Thecalibration procedures measure the various characteristics of thescanner for producing a system profile. This system profile isthen used during each scan operation.

When certain units have to be replaced with new units, it isnecessary to run some, or all, of the alignment and calibrationprocedures to rebuild the system profile.

The camera-head assembly which is mounted on the X-slidecarriage is pre-aligned in a special test rig at the factory.

1.5.2 Alignment and Calibration

When certain modules have been replaced, it is necessary to usethe appropriate software to set up the various alignments andcalibrations which ensure the scanner system operates correctly.

The calibration task assists a user to measure any inaccuracies inthe scanner system operation, so that a characterization profilecan be used to alter the raw data that is stored in FLASHmemory.

However, the service engineer may need to perform setupprocedures using the workstation diagnostics software.

System Description


1.6 Workstation Diagnostics and Electronic Repro

1.6.1 Workstation Diagnostics

Workstation diagnostics are completed across the SCSI link. Thepurpose is to perform a selection of the diagnostic tests that areavailable on the scanner.

1.6.2 Electronic Repro

The purpose of electronic repro test is to check that the scannercan produce images of the required quality.

Electronic repro consists of a series of software tests performedon a scanned test image. The tests are able to identify subtleimage quality faults, such as jitter on sharp edges, noise, or flare,which cannot be detected using other diagnostics.

See Section 7.6 for more information.

System Description


1.7 Accessory KitThe accessory kit comprises the following:

• a long registration bar,

• a selection of coded copyholders,

• an A3 cover glass.

1.7.1 Long Registration Bar

The two registration bars fit into the registration holes on theplaten surround. The short bar (supplied as basic equipment) fitson the right-hand edge of the platen and the long bar fits alongthe rear edge of the platen.

The two bars provide a 90 corner into which the copyholderscan be located.

1.7.2 Coded Copyholders

Coded copyholders enable automatic image cropping oftransparencies. They have a series of holes moulded along theedges of the holder. When the scanner lid is closed a platen scanis performed and the orientation, location and size of any holderspresent is detected.

As with the earlier copymounts, the copyholders allowtransparencies to be mounted off-line and the holders can beplaced quickly on the platen without the need for accuratepositioning. A range of copyholder sizes provide an opaquesurround suitable for common transparency sizes. This eliminatesthe need for masking the platen.

System Description


1.7.3 A3 Cover Glass

The cover glass is used to hold flat transmission originals. Theglass has an anti-Newton ring coating.

System Description



2 Safety Practices

This chapter explains the Fujifilm recommended safety guidelinesfor completing any approved form of maintenance ormodification to the C-550 Lanovia Scanner, its interlock strategy,and its antistatic precautions. This chapter must be read beforeany work is performed.

2.1 Health and Safety at WorkAll personnel are advised to familiarize themselves with any localor national legislation relating to health and safety at work.

Particular attention should be given to those sections coveringpersonal responsibility regarding safe working practices whichmust be strictly observed at all times.

This chapter explains the safety conventions used in this manualand highlights safety practices specific to this equipment.

It also covers the interlocking systems to protect the scanner, theuser, and the service engineer from any harm due to normal, orforeseeable abnormal circumstances.

2.1.1 Warnings and Cautions

There are two safety categories:

• WARNINGS are given for conditions which may endangerlife.

• CAUTIONS are given for conditions which may causedamage to equipment or materials.

Safety Practices


2.2 Site SafetyMost accidents can be avoided if you follow these simple rules.

• Familiarize yourself with the location of the main andstandby switches on the scanner and all equipment on/offswitches.

• Always obey the warnings, cautions, and any otherinstructions included in this guide, and in other associatedequipment manuals.

• Never attempt to perform procedures that are not included inthis guide.

• Always perform the replacement procedures as recommendedin this guide.

2.2.1 Safety Signs, Labels, and Indicators

Safety labels are fitted to the equipment to warn you of potentialhazards. These labels must not be defaced or removed.

Typical warning labels, for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner, areshown in Figure 2.1, Figure 2.2, Figure 2.3, and Figure 2.4.

Attention!high tension

Vorsicht!Hochspannung

Precaution!haute tension

Precaucion!alta tension

Figure 2.1 Warning label inside RFI box and on lamp-driver module

Safety Practices


92206CONFORMS TO

UL STD 1950

Product:

Model No:

Serial No:

Volts

Max Current:

Manufactured:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rulesand is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause any harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived including interference that maycause undesired operation.

and

This Class A digital apparatus meets all therequirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing

Equipment Regulations.Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte

toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matérielbrouilleur du Canada.

50/60 Hz ~

FUJIFILM ELECTRONIC IMAGING LTD.

PETERBOROUGHENGLAND

7550 878D 01

110/230 V

4/2 A

May 1999

C550ANnnnn

75484700A0

C-550 Lanovia

Figure 2.2 Serial rating label

Safety Practices


WARNING MOVING PARTS

KEEP LOOSE CLOTHING, HAIR, AND

7541-5800JEWELLERY ETC. CLEAR.

Figure 2.3 Warning label in front of enclosure fan

CAUTIONPINCH POINT

KEEP HANDSCLEAR

ELOIGNER LES MAINS

HÄNDE FERNHALTEN

TENERE LE MANIAL SICURO

MANTENGA LAS MANOSALEJADAS

Figure 2.4 Caution labels under main cover

Safety Practices


2.3 General PrecautionsThe following basic precautions apply to the scanner, and also toits associated equipment.

WARNING

Do not attempt to lift heavyequipment by yourself.

2.3.1 Safety Devices

Read all warning labels as shown in Figure 2.1 to Figure 2.4.

Make sure that all safety controls, such as the interlocks, areworking correctly:

CAUTION

Do NOT attempt to override, negate,or bypass any of the safety devices.

• Always close covers to prevent internal access.

• Avoid leaving electrical cables trailing where anyone may tripover them.

• Make sure that servicing is undertaken only by authorizedpersonnel (i.e. trained by Fujifilm).

2.3.2 Unattended Equipment

Never leave equipment unattended unless it is in a safe condition.

Safety Practices


2.4 Electrical SafetyElectrical safety is ensured by interlocks, which make access to‘live’ parts impossible without the intentional use of tools.

High tension exists inside the lamp driver module.

A double-pole isolating switch, located on the RFI box, ismarked ‘1’ and ‘0’.

All mains voltages are contained within the main RFI box.

There is an additional low-voltage standby switch located at thefront right-hand corner of the scanner.

The power-on green LED is extinguished when the standbyswitch is activated.

WARNING

Hazardous voltages exist behind theprotective covers. Do not remove anyprotective cover, unless directlyinstructed to do so by this guide.

• Do not move or lift the unit while it is switched on orconnected to its electrical supply.

• Regularly, verify that the mains cable is not worn ordamaged.

• Make sure that water and other liquids do not come intocontact with the scanner or its associated equipment.

• Do not attempt to operate the equipment while flammable orvolatile substances are present in the atmosphere.

• Make sure that electrical servicing is undertaken only byskilled personnel authorized by Fujifilm.

Safety Practices


2.5 Mechanical SafetyMechanical safety is ensured by making access to moving partsimpossible without the intentional use of tools.

It is possible to trap fingers at the back by the light-bar support,when the lid is open. Care must be taken while changing lamps.

Mechanical damage may result, if the traversing lightbarassembly hits an object on the platen.

2.6 Antistatic PrecautionsApply the full antistatic practices when handling any PCB orsimilar static sensitive devices. This includes the main carriageservo motor.

WARNINGPrecision Optical Encoder Fitted

Handle With CareDo Not Strike Shaft

Figure 2.5 Servo motor encoder labels

Safety Practices


2.7 Interlock StrategyThe strategy is to de-activate the associated interlock byremoving the 24 V supply to de-energize the isolating relay, andso remove the supply of power:

• to the electronic systems that control all moving parts, and

• to all lamps.

When the main cover is opened (mainly for changing the lamps)the high-voltage supply to the lamps and the enclosure fan isdisabled.

All motors are disabled to prevent powered movement.

If the lightbar is fitted, then main carriage motor will not moveuntil the lid is closed.

If the lightbar is not fitted, the main carriage motor will move,whether the lid is open or closed.

2.8 Lamp Driver PrecautionsThe lamp driver module is contained within a metal enclosurethat is located on the rear support of the main carriage.

High voltages, for driving the lamps, are generated on board.

Lamp wiring and holders are located behind suitable protectionwhich prevents the operator from touching any contacts.


3 FunctionalDescription

This chapter provides a description of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner and its major functions for the hardware modules.

3.1 System Overview

3.1.1 Introduction

The C-550 Lanovia Scanner is a flatbed scanner, which uses thethree-plane (x, y, and z) principle to give high-resolutionscanning over the entire platen and focus at any point above theplaten.

The scanner has a stationary platen for placing various types oforiginal, or objects, to be scanned. A copy holder kit is providedto mount various sizes of media up to 4 mm above the platen.

Illumination is by fluorescent lamps which have apertures toconcentrate the intensity of light.

Scans can be either transmission or reflection copies frommultiple 35 mm originals to a single A3 original.

The A3 original can only be mounted in the landscapeorientation. The largest portrait original is the A4 size.

Since the original is stationary, the scanning system has totraverse (normally from right to left) during the scanning process.

The X-slide carriage can position the camera anywhere across thewidth of the platen for high resolution scanning.

Functional Description


MIRROR

REFLECTIONLAMPS

MAIN CARRIAGEDRIVE

LIGHTBAR ASSEMBLY

LAMP DRIVERMODULE

PLATEN

MAINCARRIAGE

BASE ANDSTRUCTURE

X-SLIDE CARRIAGE

X-SLIDELEADSCREW

CAMERAHEAD

ENLARGEMENTDRIVE

FOCUSDRIVE

STEPPERMOTORS

MAINLEADSCREW

LENS

LIGHT TABLE

Figure 3.1 Overview of system blocks



3.1.2 System Operation

The CCD headboard is fixed to a moveable CCD mount and itslens is fixed to a lens mount. Both mounts are independentlymoved along the camera slide by two dedicated stepper motors.The camera slide is positioned parallel to the front of the scanner.

The CCD mount is moved by the focus stepper-motor, and thelens mount is moved by the enlargement stepper-motor.

These units are collectively known as the ‘camera head’sub-assembly and they are an integral part of the X-slide carriageassembly. The camera head is traversed along its slide from leftto right.

The X-slide carriage is moved independently by a leadscrew anddrive system. The X-slide leadscrew is turned by the X-slidestepper-motor. The X-slide carriage traverses along a guide fromfront to back.

The X-slide carriage is mounted on the main carriage assemblywhich is driven by a leadscrew mechanism. The main carriage ismoved by the main leadscrew that is driven by a DC servo-motorThis has an integral encoder for closed-loop control.

When the scanner is ready, an original piece of film or media isplaced on the platen.

The scan details are planned at the workstation and theapplication software instructs the scanner to perform the requiredscanning process.

From the original piece of film or media, either a transmission ora reflection image is mirrored to the lens of the camera.

The camera head is moved to its optimum position on the X-slidecarriage. The X-slide carriage is then moved to centralize thecamera with the centre of the mirrored image.

The X-slide carriage is now set up for the scanning process.

The DC servo-motor moves the main carriage forward and theCCD captures the image one line at a time as each line is imagedonto it.

As each scanned line is processed to the workstation display, sothe image begins to develop until the original is fully scanned.



3.1.3 Optical System

The functions of the optical system are concerned with thefollowing:

• All aspects of illumination,

• An original on the platen,

• The mirror,

• The lens,

• The CCD baffle,

• The CCD.

3.1.4 Electronics

The electronics can be divided functionally into five main areas:

• Power supply and distribution,

• System control,

• Image data path,

• Motion control,

• Illumination system.

Power Supply and Distribution

The scanner is powered from a single power supply unit (PSU)connected to the AC mains. The mains switch located at thebottom right-hand side of the scanner is only normally used tocompletely power down the machine e.g. when a service isrequired. The remote standby switch is also connected to thePSU. This disables all the DC outputs from the PSU but leavesthe AC mains connected.



The PSU DC outputs are distributed to the rest of the scanner viathe system board. The exception is the RFI box fan which isdirectly connected to the PSU output. The system board alsoprovides a connection from the signal and power grounds tochassis ground. The DC outputs provide the following functions:

• Digital +5 V supply for the system board, the digitizer boardand the distribution boards to power the sensors.

• Analogue +18 V and -12 V supplies for the digitizer board.The system board also regulates the +18 V supply down to+11.5 V for the digitizer board.

• +24 V supply for the motors, the lamp driver board and theenclosure fan.

System Control

The scanner is controlled via commands issued from theworkstation across the SCSI link. All of the operations of thescanner are controlled and monitored by a Motorola 68332microprocessor. The control functions are as follows:

• Set up and control the devices on the system board i.e. theSCSI controller, the DSP and the motor controllers,

• Set up and control the digitizer board, lamp driver board, andthe display board,

• Synchronize the scanned lines received from the digitizerwith the main carriage servo-motor drive,

• Control stop/start when the workstation cannot remove dataquickly enough,

• Monitor all sensors and safety interlocks.



Image Data Path

Image data is generated by the CCD and passes through the CCDheadboard, digitizer board, system board, and finally to theworkstation where the image is stored on disk.

Light from the original is directed onto a 3-line CCD where it isconverted into red, green, and blue voltage outputs. The voltagelevels are proportional to the original light intensities. Theseanalogue signals are buffered by the CCD headboard and thenpassed to the digitizer board. The digitizer board conditions thesignal levels and multiplexes the RGB channels into a singleserial stream. This is then fed through an analogue to digitalconverter to generate a digital output.

The digital data, multiplexed as sequential RGB is passed down aflexicable to the system board. A digital signal processor (DSP)on the system board is used to manipulate the digital data into asuitable form for the workstation. Some of the functionsperformed by the DSP are black and white balance, line cropping,line reversal, and thresholding of line-art data.

Since there is a physical gap between the RGB lines on the CCD,the data needs to be realigned within the DSP. This isimplemented using memory on the DSP which stores sufficientlines so that realigning can be done. The memory is also used tostore intermediate calculations from the DSP e.g. when averagingdata across scan lines.

The DSP then passes the data through the SCSI interface anddown a SCSI cable to the workstation.

Motion Control

All the mechanisms within the scanner are controlled byelectronic drivers on the system board. The mechanisms whichare driven are:

• Main carriage using a DC servo motor,

• X-slide using a stepper motor,

• Optical enlargement using a stepper motor,



• Focus using a stepper motor.

Since the CCD is a linear array, the camera must be traversedacross the image during scanning. A brushed DC servo-motor isused to drive the main carriage. The motor has an optical encoderbuilt in which indicates its position. The system board uses aservo controller and a power-driver stage to control the motor,with the encoder providing feedback. Software is used to controlthe positioning, velocity, and acceleration of the motor. A datumsensor is used to indicate the home position of the motor.Forward and reverse limit switches prevent the main carriagefrom being driven into the mechanical end stops.

The scanner can scan at the maximum resolution for originalsplaced anywhere on the platen. This is implemented by movingthe camera across the platen on a X-slide carriage that is drivenby a stepper motor. Software is used to control the number ofsteps, direction, velocity, and acceleration applied to the motor.

Optical enlargement is adjusted by varying the lens-to-CCDdistance. A stepper motor controlled by a driver on the systemboard varies the distance. Software is used to control the numberof steps, direction, velocity, and acceleration applied to the motor.

Focus is adjusted by varying the lens-to-mirror distance. Astepper motor controlled by a driver on the system board variesthe distance. Software is used to control the number of steps,direction, velocity, and acceleration applied to the motor.

Illumination System

The electronic system is required to drive five fluorescent lamps.These are as follows:

• Transmission lamp,

• Reflection lamps (2 off),

• Light table lamps (2 off).

The lamp-driver board drives all 5 lamps. The lamp-driver boardis powered from the +24 V supply, routed via the system boardinterlocks and down the flexicables. Control signals are alsopassed down the cables which switch the lamps on and off and



control the lamp brightness. The +24 V supply is converted into+320 V DC using a switch mode power supply. This is thenchopped and applied to the lamps via ballast circuits.

The transmission lamp is preheated by applying a voltage to thelamp cathodes. This ensures rapid starting. A ballast circuit isused to generate a constant arc current through the lamp when itlights up. The lamp brightness is controlled by varying the arccurrent. This is implemented by varying the chopped frequencyapplied to the ballast. An optical-detector diode is used tomonitor the brightness of the lamp. This is passed back to thelamp-driver board, converted into digital form and fed back to thesystem board. The system board monitors the lamp brightnessand adjusts the arc current to maintain a constant brightness usingclosed-loop feedback control. The optical-detector diode feedbackis also used in diagnostics to prove that the lamp is working.

The reflection lamps work in a similar way except that there is aseparate detector diode for each lamp. Both signals are passedback to the system board where they are summed in software.Only one signal is passed back to control the average lampcurrents.

The light table lamps do not have detector diodes and can only beswitched on or off at full brightness. Diagnostics cannot be usedto prove that the lamps are working. This must be done visually.

3.1.5 Structure

The structure of the scanner has been designed to provide suitablesupports for the major assemblies and to enclose them withcovers to keep out dirt, dust and moisture.

3.1.6 Electrical Reference Data

All data relating to the layouts of boards and their associatedconnectors, links, LEDs, fuses, and cable looms are available inAppendix A.



3.1.7 Fault Diagnosis

Failure charts are available in Appendix B.



3.2 System Operation

3.2.1 Introduction

This section describes the basic principles of the scanner, andfollows the sequence of operations necessary to perform a scan.

3.2.2 Basic Principles

The scanner has the following functional features:

• Line scan CCD camera,

• Fixed platen, moving camera scanning,

• Fluorescent illumination,

• Variable magnification optics,

• Autofocus,

• X-Slide carriage movement,

• Three-stripe CCD colour separation,

• Image re-alignment,

• Graphics and line-art scanning,

• Automatic calibration system,

• Control system.

Line Scan CCD Camera

The scanner uses a line-scan system. This means that the opticalsystem can read only one line of the image at a time. Thecomplete image is built up by moving the optical system relativeto the original, one line at a time. The line-scan optical system,also called the camera, consists of a CCD and a lens. The CCD



converts light intensity into an electrical signal for one line at atime. The lens focuses one line of the original onto the CCD.

TRANSMISSIONLIGHTBAR

CCD HEADBOARD‘CAMERA HEAD’

MIRRORLENS

Figure 3.2 Transmission scanning

Note: The platen remains stationary while the illumination andoptical elements move in unison.

Fixed Platen - Moving Camera Scanning

The original is stationary on a fixed, horizontal glass platen, andthe line-scan optical system is moved underneath it by anelectro-mechanical system using a leadscrew and servo motor.

So that the camera can be fitted more easily into the spaceavailable, a mirror is used; this means that the camera can bemounted horizontally, but still look up at the underside of theplaten via the mirror.



Fluorescent Illumination

Two sources of illumination are provided. Transparent originalsmust be illuminated from above, and reflective originals frombelow. In each case, only the single line of the original that isbeing read needs to be illuminated, so a long, thin light source isused.

Variable Magnification Optics

To read the whole of the platen, the optical system must bedesigned so that the whole width of the platen is imaged onto thelength of the CCD. However, because the CCD has limitedresolving power, this is not ideal when originals much smallerthat the platen are being scanned. To get the best performance,the optical system is made variable, so that the width of originalwhich is imaged onto the length of the CCD is controllable over awide range. To achieve this the components of the camera, thelens and CCD are independently positioned.

Autofocus

Having the lens and CCD moveable also allows the camera to beable to focus on originals which are not actually in contact withthe platen, for example a picture in a frame. To find the best focusposition, a part of the original is imaged at a number of differentpositions of the lens and CCD and a special algorithm applied tothe data read to determine the sharpness for each position. Thealgorithm then uses interpolation to find the position for bestsharpness.

X-Slide Carriage Movement

When the optical system is set to image less than the full width ofthe platen, there will be areas of the platen which cannot be read.To overcome this, another mechanism is used to drive the camerafrom side-to-side over the width of the platen, so that the camera



is able to use its high-resolution setting on a small originalanywhere on the platen.

Three-Stripe CCD Colour Separation

To read colour information in a single pass, the scanner uses aCCD that has three lines of optical sensors in the same device,very close together. Each CCD stripe has a colour filter in front ofit, one red, one green, and one blue.

Image Re-alignment

The data produced by the CCD during a scan is not in the sameformat that is required in the output image file. The mostimportant difference is that, as the red, green and blue colourchannels are read by three lines of CCD elements that are closetogether, but not co-incident, it is necessary to delay the signalfrom two of the lines so that they are properly aligned with thethird line. It may also be necessary to select only part of eachline, or reverse the order along the line, to suit the outputrequired. All of this is done by a special format processor knownas the DSP that is within the system board. After the formatting,the image data are passed out of the scanner over the outputinterface.

Graphics and Line-art Scanning

When scanning colour images, such as photographs, the C-550Lanovia Scanner converts the image into a digital representationwith a colour value at each pixel. It is also capable of operating ina line-art mode, in which internal software thresholding replaceseach pixel value with just a single-bit on-off value.



Reading Copyholder Details

When the top lid is closed a scan of the platen is performed todetect the position, orientation and size of any copyholders. Thisdata is obtained from the coded holes along the edge of thecopyholders.

For successful detection it is necessary that the first copyholder ispositioned to top right of the platen (as viewed from the front ofthe scanner) and located with its edges against the horizontal andvertical registration edges. Subsequent copyholders must first bebutted against this copyholder, then against each other to form aregular pattern. Copyholders may be rotated in 90 degreeincrements to obtain optimum image orientation.

When called for by the application software this data is processedto display the crop areas (the windows in the copyholders) on theplaten display in the Acquire Image window.

Automatic Calibration System

There are two levels of automatic calibration within the scanner.One level is operated on every scan, and is designed tocompensate for irregularities in the optical system, and the otheris operated at manufacture and in certain service situations, and isdesigned to compensate for mechanical tolerances.

The once-per-scan calibration comprises the following:

• exposure control,

• black balance,

• white balance.

Exposure control adjusts the sensitivity of the CCD to match theavailable illumination, ensuring that the best use is made of theoperating range of the CCD.

Black balance is used to cancel the variation in dark signal fromthe CCD. It is measured by putting the CCD into the dark, andmeasuring the response of each CCD element. This value is thenused to correct that element during the following scan.



White balance is used to cancel the combined effects of CCDsensitivity variation and the illumination being non-uniform. TheCCD is shown the illumination at the white point (clear platen fortransmission and a white strip for reflection) and the correctionfactor for each CCD element is determined. This value is thenused to correct that element during the following scan. Thisprocess is very sensitive. Any errors built in during the balanceprocedures will affect the same pixel all through the scan, causingstreaks.

The service calibrations are designed to reduce the amount ofmechanical setting up required, both in the factory and in thefield, when major components are changed. By scanning a specialchart, the scanner is able to measure various critical dimensions,and save them in the non-volatile storage. These settings are thenused during all subsequent scans.

Control System

All of the operations of the scanner are controlled and monitoredby a microprocessor system that is located on the system board.

3.2.3 Sequence of Scanning Operations

A scan is initiated by a scan request sent from the workstation.On receipt of the request, the following functional operationsoccur in sequence:

• Stabilize lamps,

• X-slide setting,

• Enlargement setting,

• Focus setting,

• Exposure control,

• Autofocus,

• Black balance,



• White balance,

• Scan control,

• Lamp control.

Stabilize Lamps

If necessary, the appropriate lamp (reflection or transmission) isswitched on, and the other switched off. The scan carriageremains at the park position while the brightness of the lamps ismonitored by the optical feedback sensors. When the lamp issufficiently stable for the type of scan to be performed (e.g.overview, preview, or high-resolution), the lamp control system isset and the next operation is initiated. Once the lamp is stable,this step is omitted until the next time the lamp is switched on.

X-Slide Setting

The X-slide carriage is moved to bring the centre-line of thecamera into line with the centre-line of the area of platen to bescanned. This movement may overlap the following twomovements.

Enlargement Setting

The enlargement drive is moved to the pre-set position for theoptical magnification required for the scan.

Focus Setting

The focus drive is moved to the pre-set position for the opticalmagnification required. This position will focus the camera eitheronto the surface of the platen or on the grain of the original.



Exposure Control

The carriage is moved to the white balance position and theexposure control on the CCD is checked and adjusted if necessaryto suit the light level.

Autofocus

The carriage is moved to the centre of the region to be scannedand the camera is focused onto the copy. This step is omitted inoverview and preview scans.

Black Balance

The carriage is moved to the black-balance area and, forreflection scans only, the lamp is switched off briefly, for theCCD black compensation to be set up.

White Balance

The carriage is moved to the white-balance area for the CCDwhite compensation to be set up.

Scan

The carriage is then re-positioned close to the start point of thearea to be scanned. The servo and CCD are synchronized, and thecarriage is run up to the start of scan. At the start-of-scan point,image data start to flow from the CCD through the imageprocessor (DSP) (see Figure 3.15) and out through the SCSIinterface to the workstation.

If, during a scan, the workstation is unable to accept data fromthe scanner, the flow will stop, and the scanner will back up.When the workstation becomes ready to accept further data, the



servo and CCD are again synchronized, run up to speed, and dataflow re-started with the next line after the stop.

Lamp Control

At the end of a scan, the carriage is returned to the park position.The lamps are switched according to a set of rules designed tominimise the waiting time before the next scan. If the scanner isunused for two hours, the lamp or lamps will switch off to savepower and extend their life.



3.3 Optical System

3.3.1 Introduction

The optical system comprises the following components:

• Illumination - transmission, reflection, and light table,

• Platen,

• Mirror,

• Lens,

• CCD Image Sensor.

Originals, mounted on the platen surface, are illuminated byfluorescent lamps.

A single fluorescent lamp, used for transmission scanning, ismounted in a removable lightbar that sits above the platen.

Two fluorescent lamps, used for reflection scanning, are mountedin a tray that sits on the reflection column of the main carriagewhich is under the platen.



Figure 3.3 Transmission and reflection scan illumination

A further pair of fluorescent lamps, together with a reflector anddiffusing sheet comprise the light-table which sits below theplaten. The light table lamps help the operator to mount originalson the platen.

A mirror, located on the end of the main carriage, reflects theoptical path through 90. The function of the mirror is tocompact the optical system.

The fixed focal-length lens forms an image of the original at theCCD. The CCD has a linear array of three channels. One channelfor red (R), another for green (G), and the third for blue (B).

The CCD image sensor is mounted on the CCD headboard. Thelens is housed on the lens mount and the CCD headboard ishoused on the CCD mount. Both mounts are independentlymoved along the same camera slide so that they maintainalignment at different optical resolutions.



Figure 3.4 Mirror, lens mount and CCD mount(camera sub-assembly)

To achieve high quality scans over the specified range ofresolutions, the system software has the ability to change theoptical magnification over a wide range of settings.

The camera sub-assembly is a part of the X-slide carriageassembly. The electro-mechanical X-slide assembly can move thecamera sub-assembly to any position across the width of theplaten. These functions, in conjunction with the main (scan)carriage movements, allow high resolution scans to be performedanywhere on the whole surface area of the platen.

3.3.2 Illumination

Illumination is provided by five aperture fluorescent lamps. Asingle lamp is used for transmission scanning, a pair of lamps areused for reflection scanning, and another pair of lamps are usedfor the light table. All lamps are of an identical type.

The uniformity of illumination, over the full field width at allresolutions, is better than 2:1. This allows the full dynamic rangeto be achieved anywhere on the platen. Illumination uniformity is



affected by the lamp output, the lens quality, and the CCDnon-uniformity.

Fluorescent lamps are susceptible to light output and colourvariations during the warm-up period of the lamps. An adequatetime period, and the use of closed-loop control, allows the lampsto stabilize before a scanning operation is begun.

Feedback opto-detectors, in the transmission and reflection lampcircuits, monitor the light levels and provide the feedback neededfor closed-loop control.

White Balance Areas

There are two white-balance areas. One is the transmissionwhite-balance area and the other is the reflection white-balancearea.

At the white balance area the CCD image sensor is exposed tofull illumination where there is a direct view of either thetransmission light source, through the platen, or of the whitecalibration strip for the reflection light-source.

The function of these white-balance areas is to provide areference level for each CCD pixel in white light so thatcompensation can be introduced for the non-uniformity ofillumination.



Figure 3.5 Transmission illumination

Transmission Illumination

The transmission light-source consists of a single-aperturefluorescent lamp, mounted within the lightbar. The light sourceprovides illumination over a narrow rectangular area covering thefull width of the platen.

The lightbar has an optical-feedback detector for monitoring thetransmission-light level.

The height of the lightbar, above the platen surface, allows theoptimum image quality performance between scratch rejectionand sharpness.

The aperture of the lamp must face downward towards the platensurface when the lightbar has been assembled on the scanner.



Transmission White-balance Area

The transmission white-balance area is a strip of clear glass thatis part of the platen area adjacent to the aqua strip.

Transmission light is passed to the mirror through thetransmission white-balance area.

Reflection Illumination

The two aperture fluorescent lamps are positioned to give thenecessary light level and also to prevent shadows appearing fromnon-flat originals, such as paste ups and textured surfaces.

The reflection lamps are covered by the reflection-tray baffle thathas slots to allow a path for the light to reach the scan line of theoriginal placed on the fixed platen.

SCAN DIRECTION

FIXED PLATEN

Figure 3.6 Reflection illumination

The reflected image passes through the bottom slot of thereflection tray to reach the angled mirror.

Each lamp has an optical feedback detector for monitoring itslight level.

The reflection tray forms part of the reflection column which ismounted on the main carriage above the mirror. The reflection



tray is extendable, to allow easy access to the lamps forreplacement.

Reflection White-balance Area

The reflection white-balance area is a white strip of plastic fittedto the underside of the main cover at the right-hand end of theplaten.

Light from the reflection white-balance strip is reflected onto themirror.

Light Table Illumination

The light table assists the operator in viewing originals placed onthe platen area prior to a scanning operation, and also to provide abasic light table for on-line mounting.

The platen viewing area is illuminated by two aperturefluorescent lamps that are housed at the front and rear of the lighttable structure.

Light from the lamps is reflected from a profiled reflector andprojected upward through a diffuser to produce a uniform levelacross the whole platen area.

The light-table lamps come on when the main carriage is in theparked position and the lid is open.

3.3.3 Platen

The fixed platen provides a suitable support for various types oforiginals. Any combination of 35 mm to A3 reflection ortransmission originals can be arranged on the platen area. Ifrequired, transmission originals may be oil mounted on theplaten.

The mounted originals are held flat relative to the imaging planeat the CCD array. The flatness tolerance limit of 0.5 mm is



determined by the the depth of focus of the lens at the highestoptical magnification setting.

The platen is directly supported by four machined pads in thealuminium alloy casting. These pads act as a datum plane for theplaten. The fixed platen will support a maximum weight of 4 kg.

The optical clear aperture of the platen is 470 mm x 350 mm. Anarea 350 mm x 15 mm at one end of the platen is reserved forwhite balance for the transmission mode. Extra care should betaken to ensure that this area is free from dirt and surfacescratches.

Both sides of the platen glass have an anti-reflection coating.This reduces the effect of any image ghosting which may becaused by any multiple reflections between surfaces.

The glass type and coating allows adequate transmission of light,at all visible wavelengths, to achieve the required opticalperformance of the scanner.

The colour performance of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner is notaffected by the spectral transmission of the platen glass.

The platen has a ringed groove with three locating pots at theleft-hand end and three at the rear end. This ringed groove is usedto locate the copy holder registration edges or the registrationruler.

Aqua Strip

The function of the aqua strip is to provide a suitable referencepoint on the platen. Originals should not be placed over thetransmission white-balance area during transmission scanning.

This aqua strip is also used to locate the various test targets onthe platen for alignment and calibration. The aqua strip hasgraduations marked in centimetres and covers a distance of about35 cm.



Copy Holder Registration Edges

There are three edges as follows:

• Short registration edge fits over the aqua strip,

• Long registration edge fits over the rear edge of the platen,

• Registration ruler fits across the width of the platen.

The registration edges are used to form a right-angle point ofreference at which any of the provided copy holders can beaccurately positioned.

The registration ruler allows the operator to precisely locate anoriginal on the platen. This ruler has both straight linegraduations and radial graduations in 10 elements.

Transmission Format

The maximum transmission scan area is shown in Figure 3.7.

A3

350 mm

455 mm

25 mm

Figure 3.7 Transmission format

Reflection Format

The maximum reflection scan area is shown in Figure 3.8.



350 mm

470 mm

25 mm

A3 +

Figure 3.8 Reflection format

3.3.4 Mirror

The function of the mirror is to re-direct the optical path by 90.The reflecting surface is an aluminium coating on the front face.

The mirror has a high quality optical flat finish to ensure goodimaging performance.

3.3.5 Lens

A single lens covers the full range of resolutions, from22.5 lines/mm (580 dpi) to 192 l/mm (4900 dpi). The lens has afixed aperture setting of f 5.6.

The lens has been specifically designed for use with linear CCDsand is targeted mainly for the input scanner industry.

It has been designed for an image field length of 72 mm and itsmagnification range accommodates original sizes from 35 mm toan A3 format.

Care has been taken to minimize distortion and in particular thelongitudinal and lateral chromatic aberrations.



Optical Baffles

Optical baffles are mounted on the CCD-mount casting and onthe lens-mount casting.

These baffles have been coated with a special non-reflective paintto help prevent stray light being reflected from the inside surfacesof the scanner which could fall directly onto the CCD array.

3.3.6 CCD Image Sensor

The CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor is part of thecamera head and is horizontally mounted into a socket in theCCD headboard. The CCD image sensor contains three lines ofphotodiodes (photosites) with integral red (R), green (G), andblue (B) colour filters over each line. Light from the original isimaged via the lens onto the CCD lines which creates chargepackets within the photosites. Voltage outputs are obtained byclocking each line out serially through a charge to voltageconverter. The three analogue outputs are passed via the CCDheadboard to the digitizer board.

The CCD is accurately mounted into the camera-headmounting-plate during the factory camera alignment process. Itmust not be disturbed otherwise a new camera head will need tobe fitted.

CCD Description

Each CCD line consists of a linear array of 8000 photosites (seeFigure 3.9). When photons fall onto the photosites, electrons aregenerated which fill the photosite wells. The number of electronsin each well is proportional to the light intensity.

To avoid the wells filling up (saturation) and spreading intoadjacent wells (blooming), a variable exposure time is used foreach colour depending on the maximum light intensity. At theend of the exposure time, the charge packets are transferred to ananalogue shift register via the transfer gates.



Charge packets in the analogue shift-register are clocked seriallyalong and out of the register. The charge packets are fed through acharge to voltage converter and an output amplifier whichgenerates a voltage output. Prior to each charge packet, the chargeto voltage converter is reset. This defines an output voltage whichis the dark-reference level. When the charge packet is shifted intothe charge to voltage converter, a valid video level is generated.The resulting output is a square wave in which the differencebetween the dark_reference and valid video levels is proportionalto the original light intensity.

All three lines operate in parallel producing three concurrentanalogue outputs. While the analogue shift registers are beingclocked out, the photosites are accumulating the charge packetsfor the next line.

ANALOGUE SHIFT REGISTER

TRANSFER GATE 2

LOG R

PHI1A/B

TG2

TG1

TRANSFER GATE 1

PHOTO SITES – RED

OUTPUTAMP

CHARGETO

VOLTAGE

RESETPHIRRED CHANNEL

PHI2A/B

GREEN CHANNEL

BLUE CHANNEL

ANALOGUEOUTPUT

RED

OUTPUTAMP

CHARGETO

VOLTAGE

ANALOGUEOUTPUT

BLUE

OUTPUTAMP

CHARGETO

VOLTAGE

RESETPHIR

ANALOGUEOUTPUTGREEN

RESETPHIR

Figure 3.9 CCD image sensor



CCD Clocks

The CCD uses the following clocks:

• Exposure control clocks, LOGR, LOGG and LOGB for thered, green, and blue lines. These determine the exposuretimes to prevent saturation. The exposure times aredetermined by measuring the light from the white balancestrip to ensure that the pixel with the highest level is out ofsaturation.

• Transfer Gates 1 and 2 clocks, TG1 and TG2. These allow thecharge packets to be transferred between the the photositesand the analogue shift registers.

• Transport clocks PHI1A, 1B, 2A and 2B. These move thecharge packets along the analogue shift registers into thecharge-to-voltage converters.

• Reset Clock PHIR. This resets the charge to voltage converterfor each pixel prior to moving the charge packet into it.



3.4 Electronics

3.4.1 Introduction

The electronics are physically divided into several modules whichcan be individually tested using diagnostics. The use of modulesenables faults to be found and repaired more quickly therebyreducing the cost of replacement in the field. Figure 3.10 showsthe electronic modules.

DIGITIZERBOARD


BOARD

LAMPDETECTOR

BOARDS

RH DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

SYSTEMBOARD

PSU

MAINSSWITCH

RFI BOX

STANDBYSWITCH

VIEWEDFROM FRONT

LH DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

DISPLAYBOARD

Figure 3.10 Electrical module locations within the scanner

There are a number of ancillary components, sensors, interlocksand stepper motors which are connected via distribution boardsso that they can be individually replaced. Each ancillarycomponent can also be checked using diagnostics.



This chapter describes each electronic module functionally.Physical details (e.g. connector pin-out information) are given inAppendix A, the Electrical Reference Data section.

The analogue electronics relating to the CCD and headboard arepart of the camera.

The power circuits driving the illumination systems are locatedwithin the lamp-driver module.

Minor PCBs are also used for distribution and display panelpurposes. All PCBs are connected with either ribbon orflexicables.

3.4.2 Power Supply

The power supply unit converts the AC mains supply into thelow-voltage DC supplies required by the electronic modules. Thesupply uses switch-mode technology and provides fourfully-regulated outputs. It has no service adjustments orexchangeable internal parts. Dangerous voltages are presentinside the unit, possibly even after disconnection from the supply.

Two versions of power supply may be fitted:

• The original supply (WA 304) is suitable for mains suppliesof 85 V to 132 V or 176 V to 264 V (it will automaticallyselect the correct input range).

• The replacement supply is a Sirius 250 series. It is suitablefor a mains supply of 85 V to 264 V a.c. with a frequencyrange of 47 to 63 Hz. This PSU is power-factor corrected.

The DC-outputs from the power supply are: +5 V at 15 A(minimum 3 A), +24 V at 6 A, +18 V at 500 mA and -12 V at500 mA. These outputs are used for the following purposes:

+5 V

• System board logic,



• Power-on LED,

• Digitizer-board logic,

• Digitizer fan,

• On the original system board the +5 V is also used togenerate the 3.3 V supply. On the later Kicker board the +5 Vgenerates the 3.3 and 2.75/2.5 V supplies.

+24 V

• RFI box fan,

• Enclosure fan,

• All stepper motors,

• Carriage servo-motor,

• System-board motor-control circuits,

• Interlock system,

• Power to lamp-driver module,

• +12 V regulated supply.

+18 V

• Analogue circuits on the digitizer board,

• +11.5 V supply for the digitizer board.

-12 V

• Analogue circuits on the digitizer board and servo system.



There are no connections between these supplies within thepower supply itself; all ground connections are made within thesystem board.

The power supply contains an over-temperature trip which willdisable the unit completely if the cooling fails. This trip will reseton cooling.

There is also a remote-switching capability via a separateconnector above the output terminals which is connected to thestandby switch on the front of the scanner; closing the switchdisables the power-supply unit. If the WA 304 PSU is disabled,the output voltages will be low, but not zero. If the laterSirius 250 PSU is disabled the output voltage will be zero.

All supplies are protected against short circuit. If the currenttaken from any output exceeds the maximum, the whole supplywill shut down. The PSU will attempt to restart at intervals of afew seconds until the fault is cleared.

3.4.3 CCD Headboard

The CCD headboard is part of the camera sub-assembly and isused to provide the electrical interface to the CCD sensor. TheCCD headboard contains the clock drivers which take TTLsignals from the digitizer board and produce clocks of the correctvoltage levels, rise, and fall times and overlaps required by theCCD sensor. The CCD headboard also buffers the red, green andblue analogue outputs before sending the signals down a flexiblecable to the digitizer board.

The CCD sensor is mounted into the CCD headboard using asocket. The CCD sensor is accurately clamped onto the CCDmounting plate while the CCD headboard is flexibly attached toit. Both the CCD sensor and the CCD headboard must not bedisturbed otherwise the alignment of the scanner will be affected.



CCD IMAGE SENSOR (see Figure 3.9)

VIDEO BLUERED GREEN

LogR

EXPOSURECONTROL

RED

EXPOSURECONTROL

GREEN

EXPOSURECONTROL

BLUERESETCLOCK

TRANSFERGATE-1

TRANSFERGATE-2

PHI1B

PHI2A

PHI2B

LogB

LogG

PHI1A

VIDEO VIDEO

BLUERED GREEN

Figure 3.11 CCD headboard

CCD Clock Drivers

The CCD clock drivers required by the CCD sensor are:

• Exposure control clocks for the RGB channels. These are lowto accumulate charge in the photosites.

• Transfer Gate 1 and 2 clocks. These clocks are common to allthree channels and are high to transfer charge from photositesto shift registers.

• Transport clocks PHI1A, 1B, 2A and 2B. These square-waveclocks are common to all three channels and they transportthe charge down the shift registers.



• Reset clock. This clock is common to all three channels andis high to reset the charge to voltage converters.

Each clock driver comprises a discrete transistor amplifier whichproduces the correct voltage levels for the CCD image sensor.The rise and fall times of each output are controlled by the outputimpedance of each driver in conjunction with the capacitance ofthe CCD input pins.

Output Buffers

The red, green, and blue (RGB) analogue output signals arebuffered by emitter followers and series resistors which providean impedance match to the 30-way flexicable. These allow thesignals to be sent to the digitizer board without degradation.

3.4.4 Digitizer Board

The digitizer board (see Figure 3.12 and Figure 3.13) is part ofthe camera head and it provides the front end analogueelectronics for the CCD image sensor. The digitizer boardprovides clock signals and power to the CCD headboard andreceives back the analogue signals from the red, green, and blueCCD stripes. These are converted to digital using an ADC andpassed to the system board. The interface to the system board(including power) is via a flexicable.

A voltage sensor indicates if one of the incoming power supplyrails has failed. A temperature sensor indicates if there is anover-temperature in the vicinity of the camera head.

Operating Modes

The digitizer board can operate in either the normal CCD inputmode or in diagnostics modes. In normal CCD mode, thedigitizer performs the following functions:

• Level shifts each analogue input to around 0 V.



• Performs correlated double sampling on each analogue inputi.e. converts the CCD square-wave signals into continuousvideo signals.

• Multiplexes the three colour-channels into sequential RGBanalogue data.

• Converts the sequential data into digital form using a 16 bitADC.

• Passes the data as 2 bytes-per-pixel to the system board.

• Continuously monitors the power-supply volts and thetemperature.

• Distributes signals to the focus and enlargement steppermotors and to the enlargement datum sensor.

In the diagnostics modes, operation is similar to the above excepttest data is injected via input multiplexers into the three analogueinputs via a diagnostic DAC controlled by the system board. Thisallows the entire image data path to be checked from the digitizerinput through to the system board.

CCD Signal

The CCD generates simultaneous RGB analogue signals, eachbeing a square wave, offset from 0 V. The amplitude of eachsquare wave signal is proportional to incident light intensity. Forno light, the signal is at the dark reference-level. As the lightlevel is increased, the square wave switches between thedark-reference level and a valid-video level. The valid-video levelis negative relative to the dark-reference level.

Input Multiplexer and Level Shifter - RGB

A square wave similar to the CCD output for diagnostic purposesis generated by chopping between the diagnostic DAC output and0 V. The input multiplexer selects either the CCD or diagnosticsquare waves for the three colour channels. The circuit also



includes level shifters which shifts the CCD dark-referenceoffsets close to 0 V.

Correlated Double Sampling (CDS)

The wanted video signal is obtained by taking the differencebetween the valid video signal and the dark reference signal on apixel by pixel basis. This is done by clamping the dark referenceaccurately to 0V and then applying a sample/hold during thevalid video period. After CDS, the square wave becomes acontinuous video signal which is updated at each pixel. CDS isperformed in parallel on all three colour channels.

RGB Multiplexer

The three video channels are pixel interleaved using the RGBmultiplexer. This selects one channel at a time, using the controlsignals: MUXRED, MUXGREEN, and MUXBLUE, and passesthese analogue signals to the ADC for conversion.



RGB MUX OUTRGB

MULTIPLEXER

MUXRED

MUXGREEN

MUXBLUE

CORRELATEDDOUBLE

SAMPLING

CLAMP SAMPLE

INPUTMULTIPLEXER

AND LEVELSHIFT RED

SELECTMUX

CCD RED

DIAG DAC

0 V (A)

SEE Figure 3.13

CORRELATEDDOUBLE

SAMPLING

CLAMP SAMPLE

INPUTMULTIPLEXER

AND LEVELSHIFT GREEN

SELECTMUX

CCD GREEN

DIAG DAC

0 V (A)

CORRELATEDDOUBLE

SAMPLING

CLAMP SAMPLE

INPUTMULTIPLEXER

AND LEVELSHIFT BLUE

SELECTMUX

CCD BLUE

DIAG DAC

0 V (A)

Figure 3.12 Digitizer 1

Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC)

The ADC (see Figure 3.13) takes the colour interleaved analoguesignals and converts each one to 16 bit resolution. Digitalmultiplexers are then used to send first the high byte and then thelow byte along the interface to the system board. The datatransfer rate is at 3.2 MHz or twice the input sampling rate to theADC.



Voltage Sensor

A window comparator is used to check that the input supplyvoltages to the digitizer are within limits. If any supply is outsidelimits or if the interface cable is not properly connected, a powerfail signal is sent back to the system board. The supplies checkedare:

• + 18 volts,

• + 11.5 volts,

• - 12 volts.

Temperature Sensor

An on-board temperature sensor is used to monitor the operatingtemperature in the vicinity of the camera head. The sensor is adigital device in which an over-temperature trip point can beprogrammed from the system board via the serial interface. If theboard temperature exceeds the trip point, a temperature fail signalis sent back to the system board. The temperature of the digitizercan also be directly read back by the system board.

Digital Control

The digitizer is controlled from the system board by thefollowing interfaces:

• A 3-bit parallel interface which sets up the operating mode.

• A bi-directional serial interface which is used to write to thediagnostic DAC, set up the temperature sensor, and read backthe board temperature.

The pixel transfer rate is determined by a pixel demand clockgenerated by the system board. This is received by the digitizerwhich then returns pixel data in byte form with a double speeddigitizer clock back to the system board. To correctly time theCCD clocks, multiplexers, CDS and ADC, a high speed clock isrequired on the digitizer. This is generated by multiplying up the



1.6 MHz pixel demand clock to 25.6 MHz using a phase lockloop (PLL).

RGB MUX OUT

PAL

16-BITADC

OUTPUTMULTIPLEXER

DATA D 0:7

3-BIT MODE CONTROL

DIAG DAC

PHASELOCKED

LOOP

VOLTAGESENSOR

TEMPERATURESENSOR

VOLTS OKVOLTS INPUT

MOTOR STEPS

TEMP OK

DIAGNOSTICDAC

SERIAL INTERFACE

PIXEL DEMAND

ENLARGEMENT DATUM SENSOR BUFFERED DATUM SENSOR

ENLARGEMENT STEPPER MOTOR

FOCUS STEPPER MOTOR

DIGITIZER FAN

CLOCK 1.6 MHz

25.6 MHz

16-BIT DATA BUS

CLOCK 3.2 MHz

DIG DATA VALID

CCD CLOCKS

(see Figure 3.12)

Figure 3.13 Digitizer 2

Image Processing (Formatting)

A single programmable logic device (PAL) provides all of thedigital timing on the digitizer board. The functions in the PALare:

• Generation of the CCD clocks,



• Generation of the clocks for input multiplexer, CDS, RGBmultiplexer, ADC and output multiplexer,

• Implementation of 3-bit parallel interface for mode control,

• Implementation of serial interface,

• Divide-by-16 used in the PLL,

• Interface to the temperature sensor.

3.4.5 System Board

The system board, mounted upright in the RFI box at the rear ofthe pedestal, provides overall control of the scanner. While thesystem board is a single module, it can be considered as havingseveral functional blocks (see Figure 3.14).

The functions of the system board include:

• Interfacing with the digitizer board and processing the picturesignal data received.

• Controlling the lamps in the scanner via the lamp driverboard.

• Controlling the motor drive system within the scanner.

• Monitoring all sensors and safety interlocks located in thescanner.

• Controlling the data transfers via the single-ended SCSIinterface.

• Providing the means to test the scanner through itsdiagnostics software.



IMAGEPROCESSOR

SCSICONTROLLER

SCSIINTERFACE

DIGITIZERCONTROL

CLOCKGENERATION AND

SYNCHRONIZATION

68332CENTRAL

PROCESSORUNIT

SERIALRS232 PORT

DIGITIZERBOARD

SERVOCONTROL

STEPPERCONTROL

INTERLOCKS/SENSORS

LAMPINTERFACE

CONTROLLER

INTERLOCKS/SENSORS

LAMP DRIVERBOARD

STEPPERMOTORS

SERVOMOTOR

MOTION

FIFO (ONKICKER

BOARD ONLY)

Figure 3.14 System board block diagram

The main blocks within the system board are described below:

System Controller

The system-controller block is the intelligent supervisor of thescanner. It receives commands from the peripheral workstation onthe single-ended SCSI interface and uses this information tocontrol and drive the electronic sub-systems of the scanner.



The heart of the system controller block is the 68332 CPU with a32-bit processing core, running at 20 MHz. The CPU has abuilt-in-time processor unit which is used to drive the steppermotors. Provided on-board are 2 M of Flash PROM and 2 M ofDRAM to run the application and the diagnostics code. Thesystem controller has direct control over the image processor, theSCSI controller, the motion controller, the lamp-driver board, thedigitizer board, and the synchronizer block.

As a background task, the system controller monitors theenvironment within the scanner and disables scans if a faultcondition or an interlock violation is detected. The monitoredfault conditions are over temperature on the system board and thedigitizer board and out-of-range supply voltages on the digitizerand the lamp-driver boards.

The main communications with the workstation is via the singleended SCSI interface. Commands received on this interfaceallows the scanner to run application or diagnostics procedures.There is also a serial RS232 communications interface to thesystem board. This is intended for running a more comprehensiverange of diagnostics using the same workstation or a separateterminal.



CAMERA

DIGITIZER CAMERAINPUTLATCH

DIGITIZERDEBUGLATCH

BYTESWAP

SCSI

SRAM DRAM SRAM

IMAGEPROCESSOR

(DSP)

CPU

DRAM

FLASH

IMAGE DATAFLOW

8

16

16

24 16 16

24

16

16

16

8 8

8

16

SCSIDMA

LATCH 16

SYSTEMCONTROLLER

WORKSTATION

Figure 3.15 Scanner image-data flow – original system board



CAMERA

DIGITIZERCAMERA

INPUTDOUBLELATCH

DIGITIZERDEBUGLATCH

FIFO SCSI

SRAM DRAM

IMAGEPROCESSOR

(DSP)

CPU

DRAM

FLASH

IMAGE DATAFLOW

8

16

16

24 16

24

16

16

16

8 8

8

16

SYSTEMCONTROLLER

WORKSTATION

Figure 3.16 Scanner image-data flow – Kicker system board

Image Processor

The Image Processor block receives the image data from theDigitizer. It processes this data and passes it onto the SCSIinterface. The main component in this block is the digital signalprocessor (DSP) which performs all the data transfer and imageprocessing functions, under the direction of the mainsystem-control processor. Program code is loaded into the DSPby the system-control processor through a dedicated hostprocessor port. The DSP then runs the downloaded program. Theimage processor block on the original system board includes 2 Mx 16 DRAM, 128 K x 24 SRAM and 384 K x 16 SRAM, whichare used to store and process the image data. On the Kicker board



the image processor block includes 4 M x 16 DRAM and512 K x 24 SRAM.

Once a scan is initiated, the 16-bit data from the digitizer board istransferred to the image processor in 2 bytes, across an 8-bit busat the rate of 3.2 MHz. This data is then written to the single16-bit camera input latch (dual on Kicker), in the order RGBRGBetc. Each time the data is received at the latch, the decode circuitwill generate one of three sequential interrupts, IRQA, IRQB, andIRQC, one for each colour. Each interrupt drives a separate DMAchannel of the DSP which transfer the data from the camera latchto the memory, thus effectively separating the colours on the fly.The incoming data is then processed by the DSP and written tothe 16-bit SCSI DMA latch (256 x 16 bit FIFO on Kicker), to beread by the SCSI controller.

On the original system board the DSP runs at 66 MHz whereasKicker runs at 66 MHz without the dongle and 100 MHz with it.

Some of the functions performed by the image processor blockare:

• Black balance,

• White balance,

• Tone correction,

• Bad-pixel removal,

• Tri-linear re-alignment,

• Cropping,

• Padding,

• Averaging,

• Line reversal,

• A4 C-dot on original board and Kicker board without dongle,A3 C-dot on Kicker with dongle,

• Line-art algorithms,

• Autofocus.



During diagnostics, the system controller is capable of injectingtest data into the image processor via the digitizer debug latch totest its operation.

Clock Generation and Synchronization

The synchronization block controls the timing of the camera anddigitizer board and synchronizes it to the main (scan) carriagemotor and to the DSP to ensure that the lines of image data arecaptured from the original at the correct position in the scan. Thesynchronizer gives fine control over the line length in terms ofthe number of pixel clocks and coarser control over the threecolour-channel integrate timers to control the amount of lightcaptured by the CCD image sensor.

During a scan, it is necessary to keep the line time period of theCCD system synchronized to the carriage feed rate and to theintegration timers. This is ensured by generating the CCD clocksignals (1.6 MHz pixel clock) and the servo-controller clock(8 MHz motor clock) from the same master clock running at48 MHz.

The clock generator produces a pixel clock and a line clock forthe digitizer as well as the three integration control clocks for theCCD image sensor. Once the clock generator is set up, thedigitizer board sends data continuously to the DSP. This data isrejected by the DSP, until it is primed by the system controller.The line clocks start each scan line, giving an interrupt to theCPU in the system controller. In this way, the DSP data issynchronized with the incoming data.

SCSI Controller

The SCSI controller block interfaces the scanner and theworkstation. The workstation can send application commands,diagnostics commands or download scanner software through theSCSI interface. The scanner can reply with status information orscanned image data.



The scanner only supports a single-ended 8-bit SCSI interfacewith synchronous and asynchronous data transfers up to10 Mbytes/s.

The SCSI block is controlled from the system-controller blockbut receives its data from the image-processor block. On theoriginal system board the 16-bit image data is transferred into theSCSI block from the SCSI DMA latch (see Figure 3.15). On theKicker board this data is transferred into the SCSI block via the256 x 16 bit FIFO (see Figure 3.16). This process is controlled byone of the DMA channels on the DSP.

On the original board, when the SCSI controller is ready toaccept data, it raises an interrupt (IRQD) on the DSP which thenwrites the image data to the SCSI DMA latch under DMAcontrol.

On the Kicker board data transfer works as follows. The outputDMAs are enabled during scanning and the DSP writes processedimage data into the FIFO as long as there is space available. Thedata from the FIFO is then read by the SCSI chip and sent to theworkstation. Providing that there is available space in the FIFO,the DSP interrupt IRQD is generated, which causes the DSP towrite the next pixel to the FIFO, through the DMA process.

The SCSI interface has two parallel connectors on the systemboard. One of these is used for connecting the scanner to theworkstation while the other is used for connecting an externalterminator.

Motion Control

The system board controls the stepper motors used for the focus,enlargement, and cross-slide drive mechanisms, and a servomotor used for the main carriage drive.

Stepper Motors

The drive for the stepper motors performs the followingfunctions:



• Commutation sequencing. (i.e. quarter stepping for the focusmotor and half-stepping for the X-slide and enlargementmotor),

• Current control,

• Short circuit protection,

• Over-temperature protection for the drive electronics.

Over-travel detectors are not provided for any of thestepper-motor driven mechanisms; they all have mechanical endstops.

TPU

PROFILEGENERATOR

SYSTEMCONTROLLER

STEPPERMOTOR

CONTROLLER DAC

DIRBRAKE

STEP(10)

STEP(1-4)

DAC

DIRBRAKE

STEP(12)

STEP(5-8)

STEPPER MOTOR

TPU (1)

TPU (2)

ENABLE

MOTOR DRIVE

PHASEQUADRATURE

X-SLIDE

Note: This figureshows only one of thethree stepper motors

Figure 3.17 A stepper motor electronic block

The stepper-motor electronics block diagram (see Figure 3.17)shows the main functional blocks and their connections for asingle motor. When a move is requested by the system software itpasses a requested position, a starting step period and a slewingstep period to the timer processor unit (TPU).

The TPU outputs two phase-quadrature signals. The phasedifference between these signals determines the direction ofmotion and the period between transitions is the step period.



START STOP

TIME

VELOCITY

SLEW ATCONSTANTVELOCITY

RAMP UP RAMP DOWN0

During the move, the step period is ramped from the starting-stepperiod to the slewing-step period and then back down again, tofinish at the requested position.

The stepper-motor controller divides down each step out of theTPU into either a half or quarter step at the motor.

The DAC, inside the motor driver, allows fine control of themotor current giving fine control of the motor position. Onerevolution of the stepper motor takes 400 steps when driven inhalf-step mode or 800 steps when driven in quarter-step mode.

The brake line is pulled active by the resistor when the maincover is open and driven inactive by the main-covers interlockrelay when the covers are shut. When the brake line is active+24 V is applied to both sides of the motor-winding setting themotor current to zero and disabling any movement.

Servo Motor

The drive for the servo motor performs the following functions:

• Closed-loop position control,

• Move profile generation,

• Servo-loop compensation,

• Current drive and control,

• Over-travel protection,

• Short-circuit protection.



The servo-motor electronics block-diagram (see Figure 3.18)shows the main functional blocks and their connections.

The servo controller receives, from the system controller, thetarget position, acceleration rate, and velocity settings. It usesthese parameters to drive the servo-motor leadscrew.

The servo motor produces encoder clock pulses ENCA, ENCBand ENCI. The ENCA and the ENCB pulses are used toincrement or decrement the actual position register of the servocontroller. The actual position is then compared with the desiredposition to give the error measured in encoder counts. This isthen multiplied by a scaling factor and written to the DAC, togive the bipolar demand signal.

ACTUAL

MULTIPLIER

POSITION

DESIREDPOSITION

SERVOCONTROLLER

ERROR

DAC

DAC

12–BITS

BIPOLARDEMAND

+/– 5 V

ANALOGUECOMPENSATOR

G(s)

CMPDEMAND

+/–12 V

ABSOLUTEVALUE

CIRCUIT

SIGNCIRCUIT

DEMANDMAGNITUDE

0 TO +5 V

DIRECTION

PWMCURRENTCONTROLAMPLIFIER

REF

DIR

LIMITSENSOR

LOGIC

FWD LIM

REVLIMDATUM

BRAKE

INTERLOCKRELAY

SERVOMOTOR

ENCODER

ENCAENCI

ENCB

DEMAND

Figure 3.18 Servo motor electronic blocks



Bipolar demand is fed to the analogue compensator. This is anactive analogue filter which corrects the phase and gain of theservo system to maintain its stability.

The compensated demand (CMP Demand) is split into sign andmagnitude by the sign and absolute value circuit. The PulseWidth Modulator (PWM) current-control amplifier drives acurrent proportional to the demand magnitude through the motorwinding in the direction indicated by demand direction. Thedemand magnitude signal is connected to the reference input ofthe PWM current-control amplifier.

The interlock relay disconnects the motor from the driver when:

• The lid is opened and the lightbar is fitted or,

• The main cover is open.

When the motor is disconnected from the driver, it is shorted outby a braking resistor. The de-energized state of this relay is withthe motor disabled, forcing it to fail to a safe state.

The limit-sensors logic disables motion of the carriage in theoutward direction only. If the carriage is on the forward limitforward motion is prevented. If the carriage is on the reverse limitreverse motion is prevented. This protects the machine againstrunning into the mechanical end stops but allows it to reversedrive itself from a limit sensor. The limit-sensor signals arepulled high on the system board making them fail to a safe state.

3.4.6 Lamp Driver Board

The lamp-driver board is mounted within a metal enclosure fixedto the main carriage casting at the rear of the light table. Thelamp driver operates from a +24 VDC supply, from the systemboard, which provides power to all five lamps in the scanner. Theinterface to the system board, including power, is via a flexicable.

The transmission and two reflection lamps can be switched onand off and driven with variable currents which are set from thesystem board by writing to a DAC. These three lamps also haveassociated opto-detectors which feed analogue signals back to thelamp driver. These signals are passed to an ADC which converts



them to digital form. The digital signals are then returned to thesystem board so that the lamp brightness can be controlled via asoftware feedback loop.

FIXEDBRIGHTNESS

LAMPS

LAMP DRIVER MODULE

VARIABLEBRIGHTNESS

LAMP

VARIABLEBRIGHTNESS

LAMPS

LIGHT TABLELAMPS DRIVER

REFLECTIONLAMPS DRIVER

TRANSMISSIONLAMP DRIVER

PL3PL1 PL2

Figure 3.19 Lamp driver module

The two light-table lamps can be switched on and off but withfixed brightness only.

The lamps need to be warmed up prior to use to maintain goodbrightness and colour stability. To shorten the warm-up time, it ispossible to have several lamps on at once with the followingrules:

• Up to four lamps can be on at once, e.g. two light-table plustwo reflection lamps.

• If all five lamps are demanded at once, an interlock within thelamp driver switches off the reflection lamps.

Lamp Driver Block Diagram

The blocks within the lamp driver board are as follows:

• Figure 3.20 shows an overview of all five blocks,

• Figure 3.21 shows the switched-mode PSU circuit,



• Figure 3.22 shows the system-board interface circuit,

• Figure 3.23 shows the transmission-lamps driver circuit,

• Figure 3.24 shows the reflection-lamps driver circuit,

• Figure 3.25 shows the table-lamps driver circuit.

DISABLE REFLECTION LAMPS

TRANSMISSIONLAMP LEVEL

TRANSMISSIONLAMP DETECTOR

REFLECTION LAMP 1 DETECTOR


TRANSMISSIONLAMP CIRCUIT

(see Figure 3.23)

REFLECTIONLAMP CIRCUIT

(see Figure 3.24)

LIGHT TABLELAMP CIRCUIT

(see Figure 3.25)

SWITCHEDMODE PSU

(refer toFigure 3.21)

+320 V

+18 V

REFLECTION LAMPS LEVEL

SYSTEMBOARD

INTERFACE(refer to

Figure 3.22)

TRANSMISSIONLAMP ON

REFLECTION LAMPS ON

LIGHT TABLE LAMPS ON

+24 V

SYSTEMBOARD

Figure 3.20 Lamp driver block diagram

Lamp Driver Blocks

• Input RFI filter.



• Soft inrush current circuit.

• +5 V and +14 V regulators.

• Low-voltage monitor which checks that the +24 V inputsupply reaches a minimum limit.

• Boost converter to generate a floating high voltageDC-supply for the lamps. Since the supply floats, it reducesthe danger if a single point is accidently touched. An isolationbarrier separates the low-voltage and high-voltage sides.

REGULATORS

RFIFILTER

TEMPERATUREMONITOR

SOFT INRUSHCURRENTCIRCUIT

INPUT VOLTS OK

TEMP OK

SUPPLY

FLYBACKBOOST

CONVERTER

LOWVOLTAGEMONITOR

+24 V DC

SOFTSTART

+5 V

+14 V

+320 V

+18 V

Figure 3.21 Lamp driver switched-mode PSU

• Temperature monitor which trips out the boost converter ifthe board exceeds 75C. The circuit restarts when thetemperature drops back below the limit.

• Dual serial DAC to set transmission and reflection-lampbrightness.

• Serial ADC with 4-channel multiplexer to convert the threelamp-detector signals to digital form. The fourth channel isused as a loopback via the transmission-DAC output fordiagnostic purposes.

• Five lamp interlock circuit.



• Voltage controlled oscillators (VCOs) set by the DACoutputs. The variable-frequency outputs are used to controlthe lamp currents, the lowest frequency corresponding tomaximum lamp current and brightness.

• Heater drivers which are used to provide cathode-heatingcurrents to each lamp which ensures rapid starting.

• Ballast circuits which chop the high-voltage supply, generatea starting voltage and limit the arc current through each lamp.

DUALSERIAL

DAC12-BIT

SERIALADC

12-BIT

FIVE LAMPINTERLOCK

CIRCUIT

DISABLE REFLECTION LAMPS

TRANSMISSION LAMP LEVEL

REFLECTION LAMPS LEVEL

TRANSMISSION LAMP DETECTOR



SERIAL DATA IN

SERIALCLOCK

ADC DATA OUT

TRANSMISSION LAMP ON

REFLECTION LAMPS ON

LIGHT TABLE LAMPS ON

CH0

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH1

LOOPBACK

DAC DATA OUT

Figure 3.22 Lamp driver system board interface



BALLASTCHOKE ANDCAPACITOR

OPTODETECTOR

TRANSMISSIONLAMP LEVEL

TRANSMISSIONLAMP ON

+18 V

TRANSMISSION LAMP DETECTOR

HALFBRIDGE

VCO

SWEEPCIRCUIT

HEATERDRIVER

LAMPCATHODES

SET MAXCURRENT

+320 V

Figure 3.23 Transmission lamp driver

Input RFI Filter

The boost converter and ballast circuits create high levels ofripple current on the +24 V supply which would appear on theflexible cable. To reduce this, a common-mode choke and in-linechoke are used to reduce the ripple which reduces RFI emissionsfrom the cable (see Figure 3.21).

Soft Inrush Current Circuit

The main-cover interlock breaks the +24 V supply to the lampdriver. If the cover is closed and the supply reconnected with thepower on, the reservoir capacitors on the lamp driver would put amomentary short across the +24 V supply causing the PSU to tripout the +5 V supply. This would cause the system board to reset.To prevent this, the soft inrush current circuit limits the chargingcurrent to the reservoir capacitors to a safe limit. In addition, asoft-start circuit on the boost converter limits the current surgewhen the converter starts up (see Figure 3.21).



+5 V and +14 V Regulators

These regulators generate +5 V and +14 V supplies from the+24 V input supply. These supplies are used for the DAC, ADC,VCOs and associated amplifiers and comparators(see Figure 3.21).

Low Voltage Monitor

The voltage of the +24 V supply is checked and if below +18 V, apower-fail signal is sent back to the system board via anopto-isolator. Also, the boost converter is disabled if the inputvoltage is too low. An LED on the board lights if the supply ishigher than the threshold.

Boost Converter

A flyback boost converter is used to step up the +24 V supply to+320 VDC. A MOSFET is used to switch the +24 V across aninductor. The current and therefore the flux builds up in theinductor core until the MOSFET is switched off. At this point theflux decays, transferring power to the secondary windings and toan auxiliary winding which generates +320 V and +18 Vrespectively. The 18 V output is regulated via a switched modepower supply chip while the +320 V output follows the +18 Voutput by virtue of the turns ratio between them. The +18 Voutput is used to generate the cathode heating currents while the+320 V output generates the lamp arc currents. An LED on theboard lights if the boost converter is generating high voltage).

Temperature Monitor

An analogue temperature chip is used to monitor the temperatureof the lamp driver. The output of this is checked with acomparator and the output fed back to the system board via anopto-isolator. A temperature higher than 75C will be reported asan over-temperature failure. An over-temperature also causes the



boost converter to shut down. This starts up again if theover-temperature condition is removed (see Figure 3.21).

Serial DAC

The serial DAC (see Figure 3.22) is a single-chip 12-bit devicewith dual analogue outputs. The DAC is driven from the systemboard via opto-isolators to maintain good noise immunity. Thesystem board supplies data and clock to the DAC and the dataafter passing through the DAC shift register is clocked back tothe system board to act as a loopback check. The two channelsare used as follows:

• Channel 0 sets up the current for the transmission lamp,

• Channel 1 sets up the current for both reflection lamps.

Serial ADC

The serial ADC (see Figure 3.22) is a 12-bit device with fouranalogue inputs switched via a multiplexer. The same serial linesused for the DAC also control the ADC. The digital data from theADC is fed back serially to the system board via an opto-isolator.The four channels are used as follows:

• Channel 0 is used for the transmission lamp detector,

• Channel 1 is used for the reflection lamp 1 detector,

• Channel 2 is used for the reflection lamp 2 detector,

• Channel 3 feeds back DAC channel 0 as a loopback test.

Five Lamp Interlock Circuit

This circuit (see Figure 3.22) checks to see if there is a demandfor all five lamps. If so, the reflection lamps are disabled.



Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCO)

To control lamp brightness, three separate VCOs (seeFigure 3.23, Figure 3.24, and Figure 3.25) are used for thetransmission, reflection, and light table lamps. As the frequencyis reduced, the lamp current goes up. The minimum frequency ofeach VCO corresponds with maximum current which is set upusing a potentiometer. The VCO pots are factory preset andshould not be changed in the field.

The DAC is used to control the transmission and reflection VCOswhile the light table VCO is preset and fixed.

Heater Drivers

To heat the cathodes of the lamps, the +18 V supply is choppedand the square wave fed via a heater transformer (see Figure 3.23,Figure 3.24, and Figure 3.25) to the lamp cathodes. Thepreheating of the cathodes ensures that the lamps will rapidlystart.




REFLECTIONLAMPS LEVEL

REFLECTIONLAMPS ON

+18 V


HALFBRIDGE

VCO

SWEEPCIRCUIT

HEATERDRIVER

LAMP 1CATHODES

SET MAXCURRENT

OPTODETECTOR


LAMP 2CATHODES

+320 V

DISABLEREFLECTIONLAMPS (seeFigure 3.22)

REFLECTION LAMP 2 DETECTOR OPTODETECTOR

Figure 3.24 Reflection lamps driver

Ballast Circuit

There are three ballast circuits (see Figure 3.23, Figure 3.24, andFigure 3.25), one for each of the transmission, reflection, andlight-table lamps. The +320 V supply is chopped using a pair ofMOSFETS arranged in a half bridge. The square wave is thenpassed through a ballast choke which limits the square wavecurrent through the lamp. There are five ballast chokes, one foreach lamp. In addition, a capacitor across each lamp is used to aidstarting. When the lamp is switched on, the frequency of theVCO is swept downwards through the resonance of the ballastchoke and capacitor. This causes a high initial voltage across thelamp to ensure efficient starting.




LIGHT TABLELAMPS ON

+18 V

HALFBRIDGE

VCOFIXED

FREQU

SWEEPCIRCUIT

HEATERDRIVER

LAMP 1CATHODES

SET LIGHTTABLE

CURRENT


LAMP 2CATHODES

+320 V

Figure 3.25 Light table lamps driver

3.4.7 Sensors

Enlargement Datum Sensor

The enlargement-datum sensor (see Figure 3.26) is used toposition the enlargement leadscrew drive to a known position atpower-up. It is an accurate Hall-effect sensor mounted on theCCD carriage, operated by a metal vane attached to the lenscarriage. Errors in the position of this sensor will result in imageswith the wrong size in one direction only; these errors can becorrected by re-calibration.

Focus Datum Sensor

The focus-datum sensor (see Figure 3.26) is used to position thefocus rack-and-pinion drive to a known position at power-up. It isan optical sensor mounted on the X-slide carriage, operated by a



metal vane attached to the CCD carriage. Errors in the position ofthis sensor may result in preview scans being out of focus, butwill not normally affect high-resolution scans as these useautofocus; such errors can be corrected by re-calibration.

TRAVERSEDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

X-SLIDEDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

DIGITIZERBOARD

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

SK2

PL3 PL2

SK3 SK4

X-SLIDEDATUM

SENSORPL6

FOCUSDATUM

SENSOR PL7

SYSTEMBOARD

ENLARGEMENTDATUM SENSOR

PL1

Figure 3.26 Flexicable sensor interconnections

X-Slide Datum Sensor

The X-slide datum sensor (see Figure 3.26) is used to position theX-slide leadscrew drive at a known position at power-up. It is anaccurate Hall-effect sensor mounted on the main carriage,operated by a metal vane attached to the X-slide carriage. Thedatum position is near the middle of the X-slide motion. Errors inthe position of this sensor may affect cropping of scans; this canbe corrected by re-calibration.



Main Carriage Datum Sensor

The main-carriage datum sensor (see Figure 3.27) is used toposition the main-carriage leadscrew-drive at a known position atpower up. It is an optical sensor mounted on the base casting nearthe park end of the travel, operated by a metal vane attached tothe main carriage. This sensor is used in combination with theencoder index pulse to provide an accurate datum position. Errorsin the position of this sensor may, under some circumstances,cause gross errors in the alignment of overview scans to the cleararea of the platen, which can be corrected by re-calibration.

CARRIAGEFORWARD

LIMIT SWITCH

PL4 PL3PL1

PL5

PL2

PL6

PL6PL2

PL4

PL1

PL5

MAIN COVERINTERLOCK

LH

DISPLAYBOARD

LIDINTERLOCK

LH

LIDINTERLOCK

RH

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

ÄÄÄÄÄÄENCLOSURE

FAN

MAIN COVERINTERLOCK

RH

SYSTEM BOARD(PL1)

CARRIAGEREVERSE

LIMIT SWITCH

CARRIAGEDATUM

SENSOR

MAINCARRIAGE

MOTOR

SYSTEM BOARD(SK1)

ÄÄÄÄÄ

PL3 RHLH

PL1

Figure 3.27 Ribbon cable sensor interconnections



Main Carriage Limit Sensors

At each end of travel of the main carriage there is an over-travelsensor. These sensors (see Figure 3.27) disable operation of theelectronic drive to the main servo-motor in the outwards directiononly. For example, the sensor at the forward end of travel (ie.when the main carriage is moving from right to left) preventsfurther motion in that direction but allows travel in the reversedirection. This protects the machine against damage in the case ofcertain fault conditions, while still allowing it to recover itself.The over-travel sensors are optical sensors operated by the samevane on the main carriage that operates the carriage datum sensor.

3.4.8 Interlocks

The interlock system (see Figure 3.28) has been designed toprotect the user and service engineer from mechanical andelectrical hazards. The scanner has been designed so that all userand field service operations can be carried out without the need tooverride the interlocks.

The interlock system associated with the lid is designed toprevent hazards due to the movement of the transmission lightbarabove the platen. It disables the main servo-motor when the lid isopen with the lightbar fitted.

The interlock system associated with the main cover is designedto prevent hazards from the movement of the scannermechanisms and the high voltages used to power the fluorescentlamps. It disables all of the motors and the main enclosure fanand removes the DC power from the lamp driver when the coveris open.

The interlock system associated with the transmission lightbarprevents high voltages from appearing on the exposed connectorface when the lightbar is removed.

The safety interlocks operate through two relays fitted to thesystem board. The left-hand (looking from the back of thescanner) relay interrupts the current to the main servo-motor; theright-hand relay interrupts the 24 V supply to the lamp driver andthe main enclosure fan and also disables the stepper-motor drive



circuits via logic on the system board. The relays have a redindicator to show when they are energised; for both relays theenergised state is the state in which the corresponding motors canmove.

SERVOMOTORDRIVER

SERVOMOTOR

LIDINTERLOCKSWITCHES

MAINCOVER

INTERLOCKSWITCHES

+24 V +24 V

PULL UP TOSTEPPER MOTOR

BRAKE LINES

TO LAMPANDFANS

LIGHTBARINTERLOCK

SWITCH

+24 V

0 V0 V

LEFTHANDRELAY

RIGHTHAND

RELAY

+5 V

Figure 3.28 Interlock system

Two magnetic reed switches, fitted one each side of the maincover and wired in series, supply power from the 24 V supply toboth relays. If the cover is open the reed switches are also openand both relays are released.

Power to the left-hand relay is also wired through two magneticreed switches, one on each side of the lid, and a mechanicalswitch fitted into the transmission lamp support column. For thisrelay to be energised, as well as the main covers being closed,either both of the lid interlock reed switches must be closedand/or the transmission-lamp column switch must be closed. Thecolumn switch is normally closed, and is forced open by thepresence of a pin fitted to the transmission bar mounting plate, sothat when the bar is present the switch is open.

There are current sensing elements within the interlock circuitswhich enable the control software to monitor the state of theinterlock switches, but the operation of the interlocks iscompletely independent of other circuits on the system board.



3.4.9 Display Board

The display board is mounted to the base casting at the front leftof the machine. It provides a visual indication to the operator ofthe state of the scanner. The board contains three LEDs which aredriven by the system board. Current-limiting resistors for theLEDs are on the system board. The display board is connectedvia a ribbon cable to the LH distribution board and from there viaanother ribbon cable to the system board. The display bezelwhich is part of the main cover uses light pipes to overcomeproblems with mechanical alignment.

The functions of the three LEDs, from left to right are as follows:

• Green LED for power on indicates +5 V supply present onthe system board. This LED is off in standby mode.

• Yellow LED indicates when the scanner is ready and flasheswhen busy scanning.

• Yellow LED on during power on diagnostics and flashes ifdiagnostics fails or flashes if a fault develops during normaloperation.

All of these LEDs are high intensity types so that they are clearlyvisible.

3.4.10 Distribution Boards

The distribution boards allow peripheral devices to be easilyreplaced in the field without disturbing the main wiring. Thereare four distribution boards in the scanner as follows:

• LH distribution board - mounted on the base casting at theleft of the scanner,

• RH distribution board - mounted on the base casting at theright of the scanner,

• Main-carriage distribution board - mounted on the maincarriage and is part of a flexicable distribution boardsassembly,



• X-slide distribution board - mounted on the X-slide carriageand is part of the flexicable distribution boards assembly.

LH Distribution Board

This connects via a 15-way ribbon cable to the system board. Thedevices connected to it are as follows:

• Enclosure fan,

• Display board,

• Main-cover LH interlock,

• Main-carriage forward-limit sensor.

PL3 PL4

PL1

PL2

PL5 PL6


RH Distribution Board

This connects via a 25-way ribbon cable to the system board. Thedevices connected to it are as follows:

• Main-carriage datum sensor,

• Main-carriage reverse-limit sensor,

• Main-cover RH interlock,

• Lid interlocks.



PL1

PL4

PL2

PL3

PL5

PL6


Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly

These are part of a complex flexicable assembly whichinterconnects via other flexicables to the system board. Thedevices connected to them are as follows:

• X-slide motor,

• X-slide datum sensor,

• Lightbar interlock,

• Focus datum sensor.

Figure 3.29 Flexicable distribution boards assembly



3.5 Motion Control

3.5.1 Main Carriage Drive Mechanism

This mechanism comprises a DC servo-motor, with an attachedencoder, which drives a leadscrew via a coupling. The leadscrewnut is clamped to the main carriage by a clamp plate.

The leadscrew has a pitch of 8 mm. The servo motor produces2000 clock pulses per revolution. Encoder Data A and Data B at90° phase shift produce 8000 clock edges per revolution. Thismeans, that for every encoder step of the motor, the leadscrewgives a linear motion of 1 micron.

The main carriage drive has a datum sensor and two limit sensorswhich have been described earlier.

The main carriage is supported by a pair of C bearings (located atthe rear of the scanner) and a pair of wheels that are bridged bythe differential focus bar (located at the front).

The main carriage has a traversing length of about 540 mm, witha maximum velocity of 100 mm/s.

In the operating state, there is no direct access to the drivemechanism. However, when access is required the main cover isopened and the interlocks are activated to remove power from themotor circuit.

Main Carriage Sensors

These sensors control the traversing limits and the actual positionof the main carriage assembly.

The servo motor is disabled if there is no possibility of access tothe moving parts. That is when the:

• main cover is open,

• lid is open and the lightbar is fitted.



Forward Limit Sensor

This sensor is located near to the servo motor and it is anopto-electric device that has its beam cut when the main carriagemoves too far forward (i.e. toward the motor end of the mainleadscrew) beyond the light-table removal position.

Reverse Limit Sensor

This sensor is another opto-electric device that has its beam cutwhen the main carriage moves too far back from the datumsensor (i.e. beyond the park position).

Datum Sensor

This sensor is located next to the reverse limit sensor, and is usedat power up to find the actual position of the main carriage. Theprecise datum position is defined by the encoder. However, thedatum sensor is needed because the encoder can only define theshaft position within one revolution of the servo motor.

3.5.2 Stepper Motor Control

Commutation sequencing is achieved by decoding two TPUchannels inside an ISP to produce a half-step sequence to thestepper-motor driver.

The mechanical system has been designed to avoid the use ofholding currents to lock motor positions.

Ramping

Ramping has been implemented using the TPU microcode.

This gives a maximum number steps in the ramp of 56 and itmeans that the motor must ramp up to full speed in 56 steps in



full-step mode (quarter of a rev) or 56 half steps in half-stepmode (eighth rev).

The maximum step rate is determined by the motor torque andthe mechanism drag coefficients.

Ramping is used when the stepper motor cannot achieve a highenough speed for the mechanism in one step.

The maximum speed a mechanism can achieve in one step iscalled the pull-in speed.

The maximum speed a mechanism can achieve when ramped iscalled the pull-out speed.

Ramping is used to accelerate the mechanism from its pull-inspeed to the required traversing speed.

When the inertia of the motor load is high, the pull-out speed canbe a lot higher than the pull-in.

The default ramp profile has a constant acceleration rate from astarting rate that is less than the pull-in rate of the mechanism, toa slewing rate that is less than the pull-out rate of the mechanism.

Note: To achieve a constant acceleration the acceleration ratiotable is not linear.

An algorithm to generate the ramp table for a linear accelerationhas been implemented.

Software Limits

On power up the carriage will automatically traverse to the homesensor and achieve datum position.

From then on the carriage travel limits will be defined bysoftware for the full position range ( 160 mm from centre).



3.5.3 X-Slide Carriage Drive Mechanism

The X-slide drive mechanism comprises a stepper motor attachedto the well of the main-carriage casting. This stepper motor drivesa leadscrew via a clamp. The anti-backlash nut of the leadscrew isattached to the side of the X-slide carriage.

Figure 3.30 X-Slide leadscrew backlash nut

The X-slide leadscrew has a pitch of 4 mm. The stepper motorprovides 400 steps per revolution of the leadscrew. This means,that for every step of the motor, the leadscrew will give a linearmotion of 10 microns.

The X-slide drive mechanism has a midpoint datum-sensor fixedto the well of the main-carriage casting. The sensor vane is fittedto the end of the X-slide carriage. This feature ensures that theX-slide drive datum position can be set to an accuracy of within10 microns (see Section 3.4.7).

The X-slide carriage is supported by a pair of C bearings that arelocated at the right-hand end and a single cam follower that islocated at the left-hand end. A guide bar maintains theperpendicular movement. The maximum travel is +/- 12200 steps



away from the datum position. This translates to +/- 122 mmaway from the datum sensor.

DIGITIZER

CCD

EN

LAR

GE

ME

NT

X–SLIDE

DS

FAN

DS

DS

LEADSCREWMOTORFAST SCAN

MO

TOR

SLO

W S

CA

N

LENS

SK1

SK1

30–W

AY

PL3

SK230–WAY

X-SLIDEDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

PL1

PL2 FOCUSMOTOR

RACK

MAINCARRIAGE

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

PL6 PL4

PL7

PL4

ENLARGEMENTDATUM SENSOR

DATUMFOCUS

SENSOR

MAINCARRIAGE

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

DATUM SENSORX-SLIDE

Figure 3.31 Schematic of X-slide carriage interfaces

3.5.4 Enlargement Drive Mechanism

The enlargement-drive mechanism comprises a stepper motorwhich directly drives a leadscrew via a clamp. The anti-backlashnut is attached to the lens mount (see Figure 3.32).

The enlargement leadscrew has a pitch of 4 mm. The steppermotor provides 400 steps per revolution. This means, that forevery step of the motor, the leadscrew gives a linear motion of10 microns.



Figure 3.32 Enlargement drive

The enlargement-drive mechanism has a datum sensor locatedjust below the CCD baffle. The sensor vane is fitted to the rear ofthe lens mount. This feature ensures that the enlargement-drivedatum can be set to an accuracy of within 10 microns (seeSection 3.4.7).

The maximum travel of the lens, away from the CCD mount, is13,600 steps away from the datum position. This translates to136 mm away from the datum sensor.

Table 3.1 Enlargement resolutions

Resolution

Horizontal enlargement @ 12 l/mm

Vertical enlargement @ 12 l/mm

Enlargement resolution

Enlargement accuracy

Image Quality

20% to 2000%

20% to 2000%

0.1%

+/- 0.3%



3.5.5 Focus Drive Mechanism

The focus-drive mechanism comprises a stepper motor with apinion meshed to a fixed rack that is fixed to the side of theX-slide carriage casting (see Figure 3.33).

The rack is a ground helicoidal stainless-steel item, with amodule of 0.4. The stepper motor provides 800 steps perrevolution. This means, that for every step of the motor, the rackgives a linear motion of 15.7 microns.

PL3

RACK

PINION

FOCUSMOTOR

Figure 3.33 Focus drive mechanism

The focus-drive mechanism has a datum sensor fixed to the rearof the left-hand end of the X-slide carriage casting. The sensorvane is fitted to the rear of the CCD mount. This feature ensuresthat the focus-drive datum can be set to an accuracy of within15.7 microns (see Section 3.4.7).

The maximum focus travel is 15,400 steps away from the datumposition. This translates to 241.78 mm away from the datumsensor.

Both the CCD mount and the lens mount are traversed along acommon camera guide rail which utilizes a linear recirculatingball-bearing system.



3.6 Structure

3.6.1 Introduction

The structure supporting the unit modules comprises four mainload bearing sub-assemblies and several enclosures which coverthe unit modules. These unit modules and enclosures are shownin Figure 3.34.

LID

ENCLOSURE FANFILTER HOUSING

PEDESTALSTAND

STANDCOVERS

BASE AND PLATENSUPPORT

MAIN COVER

Figure 3.34 C-550 Lanovia scanner structure

3.6.2 Stand

The stand is that part of the structure which makes contact withthe floor. The stand has four castors for moving the scanner andtwo adjustable feet for levelling the scanner when in position.

The primary function of the stand is to support the pedestal andbase. The stand does not form any part of the EMC protection.



Two stand covers are provided for an aesthetic effect.

3.6.3 Pedestal

The pedestal is that part of the structure which interfaces betweenthe stand and the base. Its height determines a comfortableworking level for the fixed platen.

The pedestal does not form any part of the EMC protection.However, the RFI box is connected to an external groundconnection through the main switch.

3.6.4 Base

The base is the major part of the structure because it supports allmodules except those which are contained in the RFI box.

The base has several functions which are as follows:

• to support the main carriage guide rails and to maintain theirparallel relationship,

• to support the main-carriage assembly which supports andcontains several sub-assemblies,

• to support the fixed platen support sub-structure and tomaintain its parallel relationship to the main-carriage guiderails,

• to support the main cover and its interlocks,

• to support the main carriage datum and limit sensors,

• to support the enclosure fan-filter housing,

• to house the following major electrical components:

• main-carriage servo-motor and its cable loom,

• standby switch and cable loom,



• enclosure fan and cable loom,

• display board and ribbon cable,

• LH and RH distribution boards and their ribbon cables,

• 50-way and 62-way flexicables.

The base does not form any part of the EMC protection.

Figure 3.35 Base and platen support



3.6.5 Platen Support

The platen support is that part of the structure which is mountedon to the base. The functions of the platen support are as follows:

• to locate and support the fixed glass platen to maintain theparallel relationship with the main carriage guide rails in boththe vertical and horizontal planes,

• to locate and support the lid and its interlocks,

• to provide a load base for the following items:

• originals and copyholders,

• 3D objects or bound books up to 4 kg in weight,

• to provide a load-bearing path through the base, pedestal, andstand, for any loads placed upon the lid and main cover.

The platen support does not form any part of the EMC protection.

3.6.6 Enclosure Fan Filter Housing

This housing encloses the filter which prevents the ingress of dustand dirt through the enclosure fan. Its functions are as follows:

• to support a filter of adequate size,

• to position the filter at an adequate distance from the fanblades, to ensure consistent cooling for the electricalcomponents housed within the base, and within the maincarriage assembly,

• to allow for a quick removal of the filter for cleaning orreplacement.

The filter housing does not form any part of the EMC protection.



3.6.7 Main Cover

The main cover encloses the scanning assemblies which aredriven by electrical motors. The main cover does not enclose thefixed platen glass. Its functions are as follows:

• to form a safety barrier between the operator and all movingparts that are contained by the base and the main carriageassembly,

• to protect the non-load bearing sub-assemblies,

• to provide the operator with an access path to the reflectionlamps and to the light-table lamps (that are containedunderneath the fixed platen) for changing them,

• to minimize any light spillage from the internal fluorescentlamps,

• to provide a suitable support for the reflection white-balancestrip,

• to provide the customer-service engineer with an easy accessto the unit modules that may need to be replaced during thelife of the scanner,

• to protect the internal unit modules from the ingress of dust,dirt, or moisture,

• to provide suitable ventilation for the escape of any heatgenerated by the internal electrical components.

The main cover does not form any part of the EMC protection.

3.6.8 Lid

The lid encloses the lightbar assembly and covers the platen areaIts functions are as follows:

• to form a safety barrier between the operator and the movingtransmission scanning lightbar,

• to minimize any light spillage from the transmissionfluorescent lamp,



• to protect the platen glass and to minimize the amount offalling dust and dirt.

The lid does not form any part of the EMC protection.


4 Unit ReplacementProcedures

This chapter provides a detailed description of each replaceableunit and any adjustments required.

4.1 Recommended List of ToolsThe following tools may be required for the removal of certainreplaceable units.

• Range of metric ball-ended hexagonal wrenches (e.g. Allenkeys),

• Range of metric open-ended spanners,

• Crosspoint screwdriver set,

• Flatpoint screwdriver set,

• Disposable antistatic wrist strap,

• Antistatic pliers,

• Engineer’s terminal and cable (Laptop PC with terminalemulation software),

• RS232 Terminal diagnostic cable,

• Digital multimeter with probes,

• Lightbar alignment target,

• Lightbar alignment tool,

• Differential focus target,

• System calibration target,

Unit Replacement Procedures


• Electronic repro slide,

• Protrusion height ruler,

• Antistatic cleaning fluid,

• Repro wipes,

• Cotton buds,

• Latex disposable gloves,

• Squeeze bulb - without brush

• Lint-free cloth for general cleaning,

• Sable brush,

• VT Terminal or laptop,

• Glass polishing cloth,

• Selvyt cloth,

• Supports for the lid and main cover.

4.2 Preparation for Replacement ProceduresThe term replacement always relates to the fitment of a new ordifferent unit. This term does not relate to the re-fitment of thesame unit as part of a complex replacement procedure.

Before performing any of the following replacement procedures,make certain that the correct units and tools are available.

Re-fit always relates to the fitment of the existing unit.



4.3 Replacement ProceduresCertain modules can be accessed and replaced without having toopen the main cover. These are as follows:

• Light bar assembly,

• Enclosure fan filter,

• Stand covers,.

• Lightbar interlock,

• RFI box components (modules),

• Lid assembly and its gas struts.

See Figure 4.1 for the hierarchical menu for reaching the relevantmodule to be replaced.

Main CarriageAssembly

Lid Assembly

ReflectionColumn

AssemblyLightTable

LightbarAssembly

MainLeadscrew

Drive

X-slideCarriage

Assembly

PSU

Standby Switch

LampDriver

Module

Main-CoverAssembly

Interlocks

EnclosureFan Filter

LightbarInterlock

LEVEL-1 MODULES

LEVEL-2 MODULES

Stand Covers

ReflectionWhite Balance

Strip

EnclosureFan

Mirror

Platen

SystemBoard

RFI BoxFan

MainsSwitch

Sensors

LEVEL-0 MODULES

Figure 4.1 Service tree



The main cover must be opened before any of the Level 1modules can be replaced.

The light table must be removed before any Level 2 modules canbe replaced.

Once a faulty component has been identified, follow the relevantinstructions to ensure a correct operation of the scanner:

1. Replace the module as described in the followingsub-sections of this section.

2. Run terminal diagnostics (see Section 5.4) via the RS232 portto validate the elimination of the fault.

3. Perform the carriage alignment procedures when required (seeSection 6.4.2 and Section 6.4.3).

4. Perform the system calibration procedures when required (seeSection 6.5).

5. Perform the electronic repro test procedure (see Section 7.6)before handing the scanner back to the customer.



4.4 Lightbar Assembly

4.4.1 Lightbar

The following preparations must be made.

Open the lid.

Removal Procedure

1. Unscrew the lightbar knob.

2. Lift the lightbar assembly and remove it from the interfaceplate of the reflection column.

Figure 4.2 Lightbar assembly

Replacement Procedure

Note: The term replacement always relates to the fitment of anew or different unit.



1. Slacken the four caphead screws securing the lightbarinterface plate.

2. Fit the replacement lightbar assembly.

3. Loosely secure the lightbar knob.

4. Perform the lightbar alignment procedure (see Section 6.4.2).

5. Fully tighten the lightbar knob.

6. Close the lid.

4.4.2 Transmission Lamp

Figure 4.3 Transmission lamp




1. Open the lid.

2. Remove the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1).

Lamp Removal Procedure

1. Turn lightbar assembly over to reveal the transmission-baffleplate.

2. Undo the four slotted captive screws.

3. Remove the transmission-baffle plate.

4. Rotate the lamp to align the electrical contact pins with theexit slots.

5. Lift out the transmission lamp.

Checking, Cleaning and Removing the Diffuser

1. An opal acrylic diffuser is attached to the inside of thetransmission baffle. This must be checked for cleanliness andsigns of deterioration.

2. With the baffle removed as described in the previous section,inspect the diffuser.

3. If dusty, brush both surfaces with an anti-static brush.

4. If the diffuser has deteriorated, replace it.

a) Remove the old diffuser. It is attached with double-sidedtape.

b) Remove the protective backing from the strips of tape onthe new diffuser.

c) Attach the diffuser to the inside of the transmission baffleso that the window in the baffle is covered by the diffuser.



Lamp Replacement Procedure

1. Fit the replacement transmission lamp.

Note: Ensure the lamp aperture is facing upward (i.e. toward the transmission-baffle plate).

2. Rotate the lamp to align the electrical contact pins with theentry slots.

3. Re-fit the transmission-baffle plate.

4. Fit the four slotted captive screws.

5. Re-fit the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1).

6. Close the lid.

4.4.3 Transmission Lamp Detector Board

LAMP DETECTORBOARD

Figure 4.4 Transmission lamp detector board


1. Open the lid.




3. Remove the transmission lamp (see Section 4.4.2).

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect cable plug.

2. Remove the 2 mm countersunk screw to release the lampdetector board.

3. Remove the plastic screw to release detector board baffle.


1. Fit screw to secure baffle to replacement lamp detector board.

2. Fit countersunk screw to secure replacement detector board.

3. Connect cable plug.

4. Re-fit transmission lamp (see Section 4.4.2).

5. Re-fit transmission baffle plate.


7. Close the lid.



4.5 Lightbar InterlockThe following preparations must be made.

1. Open the lid.


Figure 4.5 Lightbar interlock

CAUTION

Do NOT attempt to adjust thelightbar interface plate.

Removal Procedure

1. Remove one capscrew retaining the keep plate.

2. Lift out cable connector, with its keep plate, from its slot.



3. Disconnect two wires from the interlock switch.

4. Remove two screws securing the interlock switch to its keepplate.

Note: Retain the keep plate.


1. Fit two screws to secure the keep plate to the replacementswitch.

2. Connect two wires to the new interlock switch.

3. Fit keep plate and secure with one capscrew.


5. Close lid.



4.6 Reflection Tray and Transmission ColumnHIGH VOLTAGE

CONNECTOR

Figure 4.6 Reflection Tray and Transmission Column

Note: If the high-voltage connector is damaged thereflection-tray and transmission column assembly must bereplaced using the procedure described below.


1. Open the lid.


3. Open the main cover.

Removal Procedure

1. Remove the plate support (6 screws), complete with theplaten.

2. Remove the cover from the lamp-driver board.

3. Remove the light table, (see Section 4.16).



4. Disconnect the transmission and reflection connectors, PL1and PL2 from the lamp-driver board.

5. Disconnect the 25-way D-type connector, SK1, from thelamp-driver board.

6. Disconnect the earth cable between the column assembly andthe lamp-driver board.

7. Remove the two screws at the front of the reflection-lampdriver tray.

8. Remove the four, 5 mm Allen screws from the base of thecolumn.

9. Move the camera head to the front of the scanner by rotatingthe X-slide leadscrew.

10. Remove the two black wires to the transmission-arminterlock switch from the cable guides cutting the tie-wrapswhere necessary.

11. Disconnect PL5 from the traverse distribution-board(transmission-arm interlock cable).

12. Lift off the complete reflection-tray and column assembly.


1. Fit the new reflection-tray and column assembly.

2. Tighten the four screws at the base of the column.

3. Connect the transmission-interlock cable to PL5 on thetraverse distribution-board.

4. Re-fit the tie-wraps and position the cable under the cableguides.

5. Connect PL1 and PL2 to the lamp-driver board.

6. Connect SK1 to the lamp-driver board.

7. Connect the earth cable from the column assembly.



8. Check the full camera movement in all directions to ensurethat there is no interference to the cables.

9. Re-fit the the light table.

10. Re-fit the plate support and platen.

11. Close the main cover.

12. Re-fit the transmission lightbar.

13. Perform the transmission-bar alignment as described inSection 6.4.2.

14. Remove the transmission lightbar.



17. Align the reflection-tray assembly centrally under thetransmission lightbar using the two screws at the rear of thereflection tray and two screws at the front of the tray. Ifnecessary, remove the platen support to measure thealignment.

18. Remove the transmission lightbar.



21. Check the scanner in all modes.



4.7 Stand CoversThere are no preparations to be performed.

Figure 4.7 Stand covers

Removal Procedure

1. Grasp the stand cover and pull upward to release the fourvelcro contact-pads.


1. Hold and align the replacement stand cover, then pressdownward to hold the velcro contact-pads.



4.8 Enclosure Fan FilterThere are no special preparations to be performed.

Figure 4.8 Enclosure fan filter

Removal Procedure

1. Undo two thumbscrews securing the lift-off hinged cover.

2. Remove cover from hinge points.

3. Unhook filter retainer clip.

4. Remove filter and clean if necessary.


1. Re-fit the cleaned filter or fit a replacement filter.

2. Re-hook the filter retainer clip.

3. Re-fit cover to hinge points.



4. Locate and finger-tighten the thumbscrews to secure filtercover.

4.9 RFI Box Modules

4.9.1 RFI Box Cover

Note: To disconnect the flexi and ribbon cables from the internalmodules, it will be necessary to remove the RFI-box cover.

There are no preparations to be performed.

Removal Procedure

Figure 4.9 RFI box - removing cover



1. Undo two captive screws using a 4 mm hexagonal wrench.

2. Grasp the RFI-box cover, lift and withdraw from the pedestal.


1. Present the replacement RFI-box cover and fit to the pedestal.

2. Secure the two captive screws.

4.9.2 System Board


1. If possible, save the system calibration data to the Macintoshor a floppy disk using Read Buffer as described inSection 7.3.5.

Note: This step can be omitted if a previously savedcalibration disk is available for the scanner.

2. Power off the machine at the supply and leave the mains leadconnected to earth the machine.

SK1 PL1 SK2 SK3 SK4

SK5

SW1

PL3PL2

RS232DIAGNOSTICS

SCSI ADDRESS

SCSI &TERMINATORCONNECTORS

PSU

Figure 4.10 System board



3. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1).

4. Put on the disposable antistatic wrist strap.

CAUTION

The static energy in your body candestroy sensitive components on theprinted circuit board.

CAUTION

Do NOT pull on flexicables toremove their connectors. To do sowill cause damage.

Removal Procedure

1. Affix the free end of the antistatic strap to a suitable earthingpoint.

2. Disconnect the SCSI interface cable.

3. Disconnect the SCSI terminator.

4. Remove sem screw, located above the SCSI terminator.

5. Disconnect the RS232 cable (if connected).

6. Remove the 3 mm Allen screw(s), to release the earthing stripof the 50-way flexicable.

7. Disconnect power connector (PL2) from the system board toPSU.

8. Disconnect the five connectors on the top of the RFI box.

9. Remove one sem screw securing system board below powerconnector PL2.



10. Remove three sem screws securing the bottom of the systemboard.

11. Remove three sem screws securing the top of the systemboard.

Note: As these screws are released, hold the bottom of thesystem board to stop it from falling and pull it forwardto ease it away from the RFI box.


1. Position the replacement system board in the RFI box.

2. Re-fit three sem screws to the top of the system board.

Note: Do not tighten these screws until all the screws havebeen fitted.

3. Re-fit three sem screws to the bottom of the system board.

4. Re-fit one sem screw below power connector PL2.

5. Tighten all seven sem screws to secure the system board.

6. Re-connect the five connectors on the top of the RFI box.

7. Re-fit the 4 mm Allen screw to secure the earthing strip of the50-way flexicable.

8. Re-fit power connector (PL2) from the system board to PSU.

9. Re-fit sem screw located above the SCSI terminator.

10. Re-connect the SCSI terminator.

11. Re-connect the SCSI interface cable.

12. Release the antistatic wrist-strap.

13. Re-fit the RFI box cover.

14. Switch on the system.

15. Use Write Buffer as described in Section 7.3.5 to restore thesaved system calibration data from the Macintosh or a floppydisk..



4.9.3 Dongle for Sprint Operation

A dongle can be fitted to the Kicker system board to enable theSprint enhancements. In the event of the dongle becomingdamaged it will be necessary to return the dongle in order toobtain a replacement.

Removal Procedure

DONGLE

PL10

Figure 4.11 Removing and fitting the dongle

1. Power off the machine at the supply and leave the mains leadconnected to earth the machine.





CAUTION

The static energy in your body candestroy sensitive components on thesystem board and the dongle.

4. Carefully remove the dongle from the plug on the systemboard. See Figure 4.11.


Ensure that the power to the scanner is still off and that you arestill wearing the disposable antistatic wrist strap.

1. Fit the dongle to PL10 on the system board, noting theorientation as shown in Figure 4.11.

2. Release the antistatic wrist-strap.

3. Re-fit the RFI box cover.

4. Switch on the system.

4.9.4 PSU and Cable Loom


CAUTION

Make certain that the mains supplyplug has been disconnected from theRFI box socket.

1. Isolate the mains power to the scanner.



2. Remove the mains supply cable from the RFI-box socket.

3. Remove the RFI-box cover (see Section 4.9.1).

Figure 4.12 WA 304 PSU and cable loom



Figure 4.13 Sirius 250 PSU and cable loom

Removal Procedure

1. Remove two sem screws securing the mains switch safetycover.



2. Remove plastic cover on the PSU by levering off (WA 304only).

3. On the WA 304, unscrew the three mains wires from the inputto the PSU. On the Sirius 250, pull off the Faston connectorsfrom the filter on the PSU assembly.

4. Disconnect PL2 from the system board.

5. Undo the two sem screws securing the load resistor at theright-hand side of the RFI box (WA 304 only).

6. Cut the appropriate tie-wraps to free the RFI-box fan inlineconnector cable.

7. Disconnect the RFI-box fan inline connector.

8. Disconnect the standby switch inline connector.

9. Remove the four crosspoint screws from the underside of theRFI box.

10. Remove the PSU with its cable loom.


1. Position the replacement PSU within the RFI box.

2. Re-fit the four crosspoint screws to secure the PSU.

3. Fit and tighten two sem screws to secure the load resistor atthe right-hand side of the RFI box (WA 304 only).

4. Connect the standby-switch inline connector.

5. Connect the RFI-box fan inline connector.

6. Connect PL2 to the system board.

7. Fit the tie-wraps to capture the RFI-box fan inline-connectorcable.

8. Re-connect the three mains wires to the PSU input.

9. Re-fit the plastic protective cover to the PSU (WA 304 only).

10. Re-fit the mains switch safety cover and secure with two semscrews.



11. Re-fit the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1).

12. Re-connect the mains supply cable.

4.9.5 RFI Box Cooling Fan

INLINECONNECTOR

Figure 4.14 RFI-box cooling fan



2. Remove the mains supply cable from the RFI-box socket.




Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect the in-line electrical connector.

2. Cut tie-wrap below the cooling fan.

3. Remove the four machine screws and captive nuts to releasethe cooling fan.

4. Remove the cooling fan.


1. Position the replacement cooling fan.

2. Re-fit the four machine screws and captive nuts and in turn,tighten them in diagonally opposite pairs.

3. Re-connect the in-line electrical connector.

4. Fit a tie-wrap to suit.

5. Re-fit the RFI-box cover (see Section 4.9.1).

6. Re-connect the mains supply cable.

4.9.6 Main Power Switch


WARNING

Make certain the mains supply to thescanner has been isolated.


2. Remove the mains-supply cable from the RFI box socket.




Figure 4.15 Mains power switch

Removal Procedure

1. Remove two screws securing the switch cover.

2. Remove the switch cover.

3. Pull off the electrical wires from their tabs.

4. Squeeze the top and bottom barbs of the switch to allow itseasement through the side of the RFI box.


1. Fit the replacement switch.



2. Push the electrical wires on to their tabs.

3. Re-fit the switch cover.

4. Re-fit the two screws to secure the switch cover.

5. Re-fit the RFI-box cover (see Section 4.9.1).

6. Re-connect the mains-supply cable.



4.10 Protective Covers and Gas Struts

4.10.1 Lid Gas-Struts


1. Open the lid.

2. Support the lid in the open position.

Note: Support is required to maintain the lid in the openposition once both gas struts are removed.

Figure 4.16 Lid gas-struts

Removal Procedure

Note: When the replacement of both gas struts is required,individually remove and replace each to maintainsupport to the lid.



Perform this removal procedure and Steps 1 to 4 of thereplacement procedure for the first gas strut and thenperform both procedures for the second gas strut.

1. +Use a small flatpoint screwdriver to remove the retainingcirclip from the upper pin.

2. Release and lower the gas strut until it rests on the maincover.

3. Remove nut from its lower mount and remove the gas strut.


1. Fit replacement gas strut to its lower mount.

2. Fit and tighten nut.

3. Raise gas strut and fit to the upper bracket pin.

4. Fit the retaining circlip.

5. Remove the lid support.

6. Close the lid.

4.10.2 Lid Assembly


1. Open the lid.

2. Support the lid in the open position.

Note: Support is required to maintain the lid in the openposition once both gas struts are removed.



Removal Procedure

1. Use a small flatpoint screwdriver to remove the retainingcirclip from the upper pin.

2. Release and lower the gas strut until it rests on the maincover.

Figure 4.17 Lid assembly

3. Unscrew two sem screws securing the upper bracket to theunderside of the lid and lower the bracket.

4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the other gas strut.

5. Remove lid assembly.


Note: Support is required to maintain the lid in the open positionwhile both gas struts are being fitted.

1. Position the replacement lid-cover assembly.

2. Align the upper bracket to the underside of the lid.

3. Fit and tighten two sem screws to secure the upper bracket.



4. Raise the gas strut and fit to the upper bracket pin.


6. Remove the lid-cover support.

7. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the other bracket and gas strut.

8. Close the lid.



4.11 Main CoverNote: To access the internal parts of the scanner, it is necessary

to open the main cover.

Figure 4.18 Opening the main cover

Open Procedure

1. Open the lid.


3. Use a coin to twist and release the two latches of the maincover.

Note: Make sure the lid is closed before opening the maincover.

4. Close the lid.

5. Lift the main cover to open.



Close Procedure


2. Open the lid.

3. Use a coin to twist and secure the two latches of the maincover.

4. Power on the scanner and workstation.

5. Check that the application software has initiated a reset of thescanner’s characteristics.

6. Fit the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1).

7. Close the lid.

4.11.1 Reflection White-Balance Strip

There are no special preparations to be performed.

REFLECTION WHITEBALANCE STRIP

Figure 4.19 Reflection white-balance strip



Note: This self-adhesive strip is fitted to the underside of themain cover and is used to reflect the light from theReflection lamps.

The main cover has four markers produced in the mould.Two of the markers indicate the top and bottom extremesand the other two equidistant markers are centrally sitedon the right.

Removal Procedure

1. Using a spatula, lift off the old white-balance strip.

2. Discard the removed strip.

3. Using isopropyl alcohol, remove any residual adhesivesubstances.


1. Place a thumbnail between the strip and its backing.

2. Lift off 25 mm of the backing and present the top edge to thetop marker.

3. Make certain the strip is correctly aligned.

4. Apply pressure to the top edge, and gradually peel thebacking as the strip is laid.

5. Make certain the strip is correctly positioned within its fourmarkers.

6. Apply firm pressure to the surface of the strip to ensure it iscorrectly fixed.



4.11.2 Main-Cover Gas-Struts


1. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11).

2. Support the main cover in the open position.

Removal Procedure

Figure 4.20 Main-cover gas-struts

1. Unscrew two crosspoint screws securing the upper bracket tothe underside of the main cover.

2. Lower the gas strut until it rests on the base structure.

3. Use small flatpoint screwdriver to remove the retainingcirclip.



4. Remove the gas-strut pin and retain with the upper bracket.

5. Remove nut from the base structure end and remove the gasstrut from its lower mounting plate.

6. Repeat Steps 1 to 5 for the other gas strut (if required to beremoved).


1. Fit replacement gas strut to its lower mounting plate.

2. Fit and tighten nut.

3. Fit the upper bracket and the gas-strut pin.


5. Raise the gas strut to align the upper bracket with theunderside of the main cover.

6. Fit two crosspoint screws to secure the gas strut to the maincover.

7. Repeat Steps 1 to 5 for the other gas strut (if removed).

8. Remove the main cover support.

9. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).

4.11.3 Main-Cover Assembly



2. Support the main cover in the open position.



Figure 4.21 Main cover removal

Removal Procedure

1. Unscrew two crosspoint screws securing the upper bracket tothe underside of the main cover.

2. Lower the gas strut until it rests on the base structure.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other gas strut.



6. Remove the two hex bolts, one from each each end of themain cover.

7. Lift off the main cover with help from a second person.


1. Fit replacement main cover with help from a second person.



2. Fit and tighten the two hex bolts to secure the main cover.


4. Support the main cover in its open position.

5. Raise the gas strut to align the upper bracket with theunderside of the main cover.

6. Fit two crosspoint screws to secure the gas strut to the maincover.

7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the other gas strut.





4.12 Moving the Main CarriageOn power up, the software boot program automatically resets themain carriage to stop at the datum position.

During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will benecessary to re-position the main carriage both before and afterthe mains supply has been isolated.

There are three methods of moving the main carriage.

4.12.1 Workstation Diagnostics Method

This method must be performed before the mains supply has beenisolated.

1. From the workstation display, see Figure 4.22, open theC-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics folder.

2. Launch the C-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics icon toobtain the workstation diagnostics display.

Figure 4.22 Workstation diagnostics display

3. Select the Scanner command from the Configuration menu(see Figure 4.23).



Figure 4.23 Carriage positions menu

4. Choose one of the following options:

a) Park to re-position the carriage to the right-hand datumend.

b) Camera Service to re-position the carriage at theleft-hand end.

c) Transit Fixing to re-position the carriage at a mid-pointlocation.

4.12.2 Terminal Diagnostics Method

This method must be performed before the mains supply has beenisolated.

1. Connect the RS232 serial cable to the diagnostics port, on theside of the RFI box.

2. Connect the VT100/laptop to the RS232 serial cable.

3. Power up the terminal to obtain the Main menu.

4. Select the mech ⇒ service menu.

5. Choose one of the following options:

a) camera_service - to re-position the carriage at theleft-hand end.

b) park - to re-position the carriage at the right-hand datumend.

c) transit_fixing - to re-position the carriage at a mid-pointlocation.



Figure 4.24 Mech - service menu

4.12.3 Mechanical Method

Figure 4.25 Moving the main carriage

This method shall be performed only when the mains power tothe scanner has been isolated.

1. Grasp the main leadscrew and rotate it toward the front tomove the carriage toward the left.



2. Grasp the rear right-hand corner of the main carriage andcarefully apply sufficient pressure to move the carriage to adesired position on the left of its default position.



4.13 Safety Interlocks

4.13.1 Main Cover Interlocks


1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (seeSection 4.12).


3. Remove seven self-tap screws to release the cable cover-plate.

Note: It is only necessary to access the interlock-cableconnector on the RH distribution board.

51 mm

51 mm

51 mm

Figure 4.26 Main cover interlocks

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect the appropriate interlock-switch cable, eitherfrom:

• PL5 at the RH distribution board, or



• PL3 at the LH distribution board.

2. Cut tie-wraps securing the cable loom.

3. Undo nut retaining the interlock switch.

4. Remove the interlock switch.


1. Fit the replacement interlock switch.

2. Adjust protrusion height (51 mm nominal above the machineface of the base casting) of switch (see Figure 4.26).

3. Connect the interlock switch cable, either to:

• PL3 at the LH distribution board or

• PL5 at the RH distribution board.

PL3 PL4

PL1

PL2

PL5 PL6 PL1

PL4

PL2

PL3

PL5

PL6



4. Fit new tie-wraps.

5. Replace, if removed, cable cover-plate and secure with sevenself-tap screws.


Note: On power up, the interlock relay can be heardclicking, if the protrusion height has been correctlyset, as the cover is raised.



4.13.2 Lid Interlocks

Note: Both of these interlocks are connected by a common cableloom which connects to PL6 at the RH distribution board.




3. Remove seven self-tap screws securing the cable cover-plate.

4.5 mm

Figure 4.27 Lid interlocks

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL6 to release the lid interlock-switch cable, fromthe RH distribution board.



PL1

PL4

PL2

PL3

PL5

PL6


2. Cut the tie-wraps securing the cable loom.

3. Undo nut retaining each interlock switch.

4. Remove both interlock switches.


1. Connect the lid interlock-switch cable, to PL6 at the RHdistribution board.

2. Lay cable loom in the base well and secure with tie-wraps asrequired.

3. Fit the replacement interlock switch.

4. Adjust the protrusion height (4.5 mm nominal above theplaten support module) of each switch (see Figure 4.27).

5. Fit the cable cover-plate and secure with seven self-tapscrews.


Note: On power up, the interlock relay can be heardclicking, if the protrusion height has been correctlyset, as the cover is raised.



4.14 PlatenThe following preparations must be made.

1. Position main carriage for Park (see Section 4.12).


Figure 4.28 Platen

Removal Procedure

1. Remove four crosspoint machine screws.

2. Lift the platen of its support mounts.


1. Fit replacement platen to the support mounts.

Note: Make sure the platen is correctly positioned.

2. Fit and tighten four crosspoint machine screws.

3. Perform an overview scan of the entire platen.



4. If black lines appear around any of the edges perform thefollowing calibration tests:

• Carriage,

• X-slide,

• Enlargement,

• Offsets.



4.15 Reflection Lamps Assembly

4.15.1 Reflection Lamps

Note: An unbalanced pair of lamps, due to age or differentbatches, may cause variations in the quality of light.

Always change both lamps to minimize any lightvariations.




CAUTION

Do NOT attempt to adjust thereflection column interfaces. To doso will affect optical alignment.

REFLECTIONTRAY BAFFLE

Figure 4.29 Reflection lamps assembly



Removal Procedure

1. Loosen the two outer thumbscrews.

2. Pull out the reflection-lamp tray to gain access to the innerlamp.

3. Loosen the two inner thumbscrews to release the tray baffle.

4. Remove the reflection-tray baffle.

5. Rotate the inner reflection lamp and remove from its holders.

6. Rotate the outer reflection lamp and remove from its holders.

LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS

Figure 4.30 Reflection lamp replacement


1. Fit and rotate the replacement inner lamp to secure it in itsholders.

Note: The aperture of each lamp must face toward the upperslot, in the tray baffle (see Figure 4.29), to allow theillumination of the underside of the platen.



2. Fit and rotate the replacement outer lamp to secure it in itsholders.

3. Re-fit the reflection-tray baffle.

Note: Make sure the cutout (see Figure 4.29) is facing thefront of the scanner.

4. Tighten the two captive thumbscrews.

5. Close the reflection-lamp tray.

6. Finger-tighten the two outer thumbscrews.


4.15.2 Reflection Lamp Holders


1. Remove both reflection lamps (see Section 4.15.1).

Removal Procedure

1. Free the lamp holder from its support bracket.

2. Using a very small screwdriver push it up next to the wire onthe inside to release each wire from the holder. They are heldin by spring pressure.


1. Push the two wires into the replacement holder, making surethey are being correctly gripped.

Note: Make sure the outer (red) insulation is well pushedinto the lamp holder.

2. Fit the replacement holder into its support bracket.

3. Re-fit both reflection lamps (see Section 4.15.1).



4.15.3 Reflection Lamp Detector Boards

Note: Each reflection lamp has its own detector board.


1. Remove both reflection lamps (see Section 4.15.1).

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect the relevant detector-board connector.

2. Remove countersunk screw to release the lamp-detectorboard.

3. Remove screw to release detector-board baffle.


1. Fit screw to secure baffle to replacement lamp-detector board.

2. Fit countersunk screw to secure replacement detector board.

3. Connect the detector-board connector.

4. Re-fit reflection lamps (see Section 4.15.1).

4.15.4 Mirror






DOWELS

Figure 4.31 Mirror

Removal Procedure

1. Remove the two hexagon wrench caphead screws, securingthe mirror support casting to the main carriage.

Note: Mirror bolts are accessible through the central slot ofthe reflection-lamp assembly.

2. Lift the mirror support casting off the two support posts.

Note: The support casting sits on a round post at the rearand a diamond-shaped post at the front.


1. Position the replacement mirror by engaging the two dowelsin the main-carriage casting.

2. Re-fit and secure the two hexagon wrench caphead screws, tosecure the mirror support casting to the main carriage.


4. Perform the lightbar alignment procedure (see Section 6.4.2).



5. Perform the differential focus alignment procedure (seeSection 6.4.3).

6. Perform system calibration procedures (see Section 6.5).

7. Perform electronic repro test procedures (see Section 7.6).



4.16 Light Table AssemblyNote: It is convenient to remove the light table to access the

hidden modules.


WARNING

Hazardous voltages exist behind thelamp driver module cover.

Make certain that the mains supplyplug has been disconnected from theRFI box socket.

PL2PL1 PL4PL3 SK1

Figure 4.32 Light table assembly





3. Remove screw to release rear cover-plate from lamp-drivermodule.

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL3 from the lamp-driver board.

2. Remove 2 sem screws from the rear.

3. Remove 2 sem screws from the front.

4. Lift the light table from the main carriage.


1. Position the light table on the main carriage.

2. Loosely re-fit 2 sem screws at the rear.

3. Loosely re-fit 2 sem screws at the front.

4. Tighten all sem screws when the light table is correctly fitted.

5. Re-connect PL3 to the lamp-display board.

6. Re-fit the lamp-driver module cover and secure with screw.


4.16.1 LT -Lamps

Note: An unbalanced pair of lamps, due to age or differentbatches, may cause variations in the quality of light.

Always change both lamps to minimize any lightvariations.






Figure 4.33 LT lamps removal

Removal Procedure

1. Rotate the rear lamp and remove from its holders.

2. Rotate the front lamp and remove from its holders.


1. Fit and rotate to secure the rear replacement lamp in itsholders.

Note: Make sure the aperture of each lamp is facing towardthe light table.

2. Fit and rotate to secure the front replacement lamp in itsholders.




4.16.2 LT-Lamp Holders

The following preparations must be made before removing thispart from the scanner.



3. Remove both lamps (see Section 4.16.1).

4. Remove screw to release rear cover plate from lamp-drivermodule.

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL3 from the lamp-driver board.

2. Cut the tie-wrap close to the lamp holder.

3. Free the lamp holder from its support bracket.

4. Using a very small screwdriver, push it up next to the wire onthe inside to release each wire from the holder. They are heldin by spring pressure.


1. Push the two wires into the replacement holder, making surethey are being correctly gripped.

Note: Make sure the outer, red, insulation is well pushed intothe lamp holder.

2. Fit the replacement holder into its support bracket.

3. Re-connect PL3 to the lamp driver board.

4. Re-fit screw to secure rear cover plate to lamp-driver module.




4.17 Lamp Driver ModuleThe following preparations must be made.

WARNING

Hazardous voltages exist behind thelamp driver module cover.

Make certain that the mains supplyplug has been disconnected from thewall socket.



3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16).

PL3

PL4

SK1

PL2PL1

Figure 4.34 Lamp driver module



CAUTION

Do NOT pull on flexicables toremove their connectors. To do sowill incur damage.

Removal Procedure

1. Move the X-slide carriage to the front of the scanner (seeSection 4.20.1).

Note: This step is performed to gain an easier access to thelamp-driver flexicable clamp and its securing screws.

2. Remove one screw to release the lid of the lamp-drivermodule.

PL2PL1 PL4PL3 SK1

3. Remove PL1 from the reflection-column connector.

4. Remove PL2 from the lightbar connector.

Note: PL3 was disconnected during the removal of thelight-table assembly.

5. Remove the two captive screws and disconnect SK1.

6. Pull out the wiring looms carefully.

7. Remove two clamp screws from the 37-way flexicableconnector, to release the PL4 clamp plate.

8. Remove earth screw from flexicable.

9. Disconnect PL4.

10. Pass the PL4 flexicable carefully through the base slot of thelamp-driver module.

11. Remove two sem screws securing the lamp-driver module.



12. Remove lamp-driver module from the main carriage.


1. Position the replacement lamp-driver module.

2. Re-fit two sem screws to secure lamp-driver module to themain carriage.

3. Thread the PL4 flexicable carefully through the base slot ofthe lamp-driver module.

4. Re-connect PL4.

5. Re-fit the PL4 clamp.

6. Re-fit two clamp screws to the 37-way flexicable connector.

7. Position the wiring looms carefully.

8. Re-connect SK1.

9. Re-fit two captive screws to secure SK1.

10. Re-connect PL2 to the lightbar connector.

11. Re-connect PL1 to the reflection-column connector.

12. Re-fit earth screw to secure flexicable.

13. Re-fit screw to secure the lid of the lamp-driver module.

Note: PL3 will be re-connected during the re-fitment of thelight-table assembly.

14. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16).




4.18 Base and Structure Modules

4.18.1 Flexicable - 50-Way






5. Move the X-slide carriage to the front of the scanner (seeSection 4.20.1.

CAUTION


Removal Procedure

1. Remove sem screw securing the 50-way flexicable earth tothe traverse distribution board.

2. Disconnect the 50-way flexicable plug from the traversedistribution board.

3. Lay flat the 50-way flexicable.

4. Remove the three sem screws to release the 50-way and62-way well plate.

5. Move the carriage assembly to the Park position.

6. Remove two sem screws to release the 50-way flexicablefrom the well-plate in the base and structure assembly.



TRAVERSEDISTRIBUTION BOARD

DISTRIBUTIONX-SLIDE

BOARD

Figure 4.35 Flexicables: 50-way and 62-way

7. Remove sem screw securing 50-way earth to the RFI box.

8. Remove two clamp screws from 50-way flexicable plug, atthe system board.

9. Disconnect the 50-way flexicable plug from the systemboard.

10. Withdraw the 50-way flexicable carefully.


1. Feed and position the replacement 50-way flexicable.

2. Re-connect the 50-way flexicable plug to the system board.

3. Re-fit two clamp screws to secure 50-way flexicable plug, atthe system board.

4. Loosely re-fit sem screw to secure 50-way earth to the RFIbox.



5. Loosely re-fit two sem screws to secure the 50-way flexicableto well-plate in the base and structure assembly.

6. Loosely re-fit the three sem screws to secure the 50-way and62-way well plate.

7. Re-connect the 50-way flexicable plug to the traversedistribution board.

8. Move carriage assembly to the Camera Service position.

9. Loosely re-fit sem screw to secure the 50-way flexicable earthto the traverse distribution board.

10. Check the alignment of all flexicables to avoid any distortionor any potential wear points.

11. Tighten all loose sem screws.




4.18.2 Flexicable - 62-Way









CAUTION


Removal Procedure

1. Remove the sem screw securing 50-way flexicable earth tothe main-carriage distribution board.

2. Disconnect 50-way plug from the main-carriage distributionboard.

3. Lay flat the 50-way flexicable.

4. Disconnect 62-way plug from the traverse distribution board.

5. Move the carriage assembly to the Park position.

6. Remove three sem screws to release the 62-way flexicablefrom the well-plate in the base and structure assembly.

7. Remove two clamp screws from 62-way connector, at the topof the RFI box.

8. Disconnect 62-way plug from the system-board socket.

9. Withdraw the 62-way flexicable.

CAUTION

Do NOT tighten sem screws until allflexicables have been re-installedand correctly aligned in theirsupports.



To do so can cause later damagewhile the flexicables are moving inresponse to the carriages.


1. Feed and position the replacement 62-way flexicable.

2. Re-connect 62-way plug to system-board socket, at the top ofthe RFI box.

3. Re-fit two clamp screws to secure the 62-way plug.

4. Loosely re-fit three sem screws to secure the 62-wayflexicable to well-plate in the base and structure assembly.

5. Re-connect 62-way plug to the traverse distribution board.

6. Re-connect the 50-way flexicable.

7. Loosely re-fit sem screw to secure the 50-way flexicable earthto the main-carriage distribution board.






4.18.3 Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly









Figure 4.36 Flexicable distribution boards assembly

CAUTION


Removal Procedure

1. Remove two clamp screws securing the PL4 flexicable to thelamp-driver board.

Note: The lamp-driver cover plate was removed during thelight table removal procedure.



2. Disconnect PL4 flexicable.

3. Remove earth sem screw securing 50-way flexicable.

4. Remove 50-way flexicable plug.

5. Lay back 50-way flexicable.

6. Remove 62-way flexicable plug.

7. Lay back 62-way flexicable.

8. Disconnect PL7 to release the focus-datum sensor.

9. Disconnect PL6 to release the X-slide datum sensor.

10. Disconnect PL5 to release the lightbar interlock.

11. Disconnect PL4 to release the X-slide stepper motor.

12. Remove three remaining sem screws to release the traversedistribution board.

ÄÄ


BOARD

X SLIDEDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

SYSTEMBOARD

DIGITIZERBOARD

50-WAY

62-WAY

PL7

PL6

PL5

PL4

LIGHTBARINTERLOCK

X-SLIDESTEPPERMOTOR

X-SLIDEDATUM

SENSOR

LAMPDRIVERBOARD

FOCUSDATUM

SENSOR

13. Disconnect SK2 flexicable.

14. Remove four 3 mm Allen screws to release the X-slidedistribution board and flexicable support tray.



15. Withdraw the flexicable distribution-boards assembly.

PL1

SK2

SUPPORT TRAY

CAUTION

Do NOT tighten sem screws, exceptfor securing trays, until allflexicables have been re-installedand correctly aligned in theirsupports.

To do so can cause later damagewhile the flexicables are moving inresponse to the carriages.


1. Feed and position the replacement flexicabledistribution-boards assembly.

2. Re-fit and tighten four 3 mm Allen screws to secure theX-slide distribution board and flexicable support tray.

3. Re-connect the digitizer flexicable at SK2.



4. Loosely re-fit three sem screws to secure the traversedistribution board to the support tray.

5. Re-connect X-slide datum sensor at PL4.

6. Re-connect lightbar interlock at PL5.

7. Re-connect X-slide stepper motor at PL6.

8. Re-connect focus-datum sensor at PL7.

9. Re-connect the 62-way flexicable plug on the traversedistribution board.

10. Re-connect the 50-way flexicable plug on main-carriagedistribution board.

11. Loosely re-fit sem screw to the 50-way flexicable earth.

12. Re-connect PL4 flexicable to the lamp-driver board.

13. Re-connect the lamp-driver flexicable earth and clamp screwssecuring the PL4 flexicable to the lamp-driver board.






4.18.4 Main Carriage Datum Sensor







PL1

PL4

PL2

PL3

PL5

PL6


Figure 4.37 Main carriage datum and reverse limit sensors

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL3 from the RH distribution board.

Note: The datum sensor is on the left of the end-stop sensor,when looking in the well from the front.

2. Use a crosspoint screwdriver to remove self-tapping screwfrom the left sensor.

3. Remove sensor cable from the cable tidies in the well.

4. Withdraw the sensor and its cable.


1. Position the replacement sensor and its cable.

2. Re-fit self-tapping screw to secure the left sensor.

3. Re-fit sensor cable in the cable tidies.

4. Connect PL3 to the RH distribution board.

5. Re-fit cable cover-plate and secure with seven self-tap screws.




4.18.5 Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor





Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL4 from the RH distribution board (seeFigure 4.37).

Note: This limit sensor is on the right of the datum sensor,when looking in the well from the front.

2. Use crosspoint screwdriver to remove the self-tapping screwfrom the right sensor.

3. Remove sensor cable from the cable tidies in the well of thebase assembly.




2. Re-fit self-tapping screw to secure the right sensor.

3. Fit the new sensor cable into the cable tidies in the well of thebase assembly.



PL1

PL4

PL2

PL3

PL5

PL6





4.18.6 Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor




PL3 PL4

PL1

PL2

PL5 PL6


Figure 4.38 Main carriage left-end limit sensor



Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL4 from the LH distribution board.

2. Use a crosspoint screwdriver to remove self-tapping screwfrom the sensor.

3. Cut tie-wraps to free the sensor cable.




2. Re-fit self-tapping screw to secure the sensor.

3. Fit tie-wraps to secure the sensor cable.

4. Connect PL4 to the LH distribution board.


4.18.7 Standby Switch





Removal Procedure

1. Pull off the two fast-on connectors from the switch.

2. Squeeze the two barb, one at each end, and push the body ofthe switch downward through its mounting plate.



Figure 4.39 Standby power switch


1. Fit the replacement switch.

2. Fit the two fast-on connectors.



4.18.8 Standby Switch Cable








Removal Procedure

5. Disconnect the standby switch plug.

Note: The standby switch cable is situated in front of the15-way ribbon cable, on top of the RFI box.

6. Pull off the two fast-on connectors from the standby switchterminals.

7. Remove cable from the cable tidies in the well.

8. Withdraw standby switch cable.


1. Fit the replacement standby switch cable in the cable tidies.

2. Connect the two fast-on connectors to the standby switchterminals.

3. Connect the standby switch plug to the system-board socketon top of the RFI box.

4. Fit tie-wraps to suit.






4.18.9 Display Board




Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL1 from the display board.

2. Squeeze, in turn, each pair of barbs and ease the board off itsfour Nylon standoffs.


1. Fit the replacement display board.

2. Re-connect PL1 to the display board.


4.18.10 Display Board Ribbon Cable




Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL1 at the display board.

2. Unclip the 10-way ribbon cable from the cable clips.




4. Withdraw 10-way ribbon cable.

PL3 PL4

PL1

PL2

PL5 PL6


Figure 4.40 Display board


1. Position the replacement 10-way ribbon cable.

2. Connect cable plug to PL2 on the LH distribution board.

3. Connect PL1 to the display board.

4. Fit 10-way ribbon cable in the cable clips.


4.18.11 LH Distribution Board






PL2

PL3 PL4

PL1 PL5 PL6

Figure 4.41 LH distribution board

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4, and PL6.

Note: PL5 is a spare connector.



1. Fit the replacement board to its four Nylon standoffs.

2. Re-connect PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4, and PL6.


4.18.12 LH Ribbon Cable







Removal Procedure

1. Unclip and disconnect PL6 from the LH distribution board.

2. Unclip the ribbon cable.

3. Move carriage to the Camera Service position.


5. Remove two clamp screws securing the 25-way cable plug.

Note: The LH ribbon cable is situated to the right of the15-way ribbon cable, on top of the RFI box.

6. Disconnect the 25-way ribbon cable plug from the systemboard.

7. Withdraw 25-way ribbon cable from the well.


1. Position the replacement LH ribbon cable.

2. Connect the 25-way ribbon cable plug to the system-boardsocket.

3. Move carriage to the Park position.

4. Connect PL6 to the LH distribution board.

5. Re-clip the ribbon cable.

6. Move carriage to the Camera Service position.






4.18.13 RH Distribution Board





Removal Procedure

1. Unclip and disconnect PL1.

Note: PL2 is a spare connector.

2. Disconnect PL3, PL4, PL5, and PL6.


PL1

PL4

PL2

PL3

PL5

PL6

Figure 4.42 RH distribution board


1. Fit the replacement board to its four Nylon standoffs.

2. Re-connect and clip PL1.



3. Re-connect PL3, PL4, PL5, and PL6.

4. Re-fit seven self-tap screws to secure the cable cover-plate.


4.18.14 RH Ribbon Cable






Removal Procedure

1. Unclip and disconnect PL1 from the RH distribution board.

2. Unclip 15-way ribbon cable.

3. Remove two clamp screws securing the 15-way cable plug.

Note: The RH ribbon cable is situated to the left of the25-way ribbon cable, on top of the RFI box.

4. Disconnect the 15-way ribbon cable plug from the top of thesystem board.

5. Withdraw 15-way ribbon cable from the well.


1. Position the replacement RH ribbon cable.

2. Connect the 15-way ribbon cable plug to the system-boardsocket.




4. Re-clip the ribbon cable.

5. Re-fit seven self-tap screws to secure the cable cover-plate.



4.18.15 Enclosure Fan




ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

PL3 PL4

PL1

PL2

PL5 PL6


Figure 4.43 Enclosure fan

Removal Procedure

1. Remove the enclosure fan filter (see Section 4.8).


3. Remove three nuts, with a 3 mm spanner, securing themounting plate.



4. Remove the mounting plate with the fan from the A/Vmounts.

5. Remove four screws, with a 5 mm hexagon wrench, toremove the fan from its mounting plate.


1. Fit the replacement fan to the mounting plate and secure withfour screws.

2. Fit the mounting plate with the fan to the A/V mounts.

3. Fit and tighten the three 5 mm nuts to secure the mountingplate.

4. Connect PL1 to its socket on the LH distribution board.

5. Re-fit the enclosure fan filter (see Section 4.8).




4.19 Main Leadscrew Assembly

4.19.1 Leadscrew Nut Clamp Plate

Note: This item is not a replaceable unit, however, it isnecessary to remove it to free the main carriage from itsleadscrew.





4. Re-position the main carriage to a suitable mid-point bymechanically turning the leadscrew (see Section 4.12.3).

Figure 4.44 Leadscrew nut clamp plate



Removal Procedure

1. Use a 10 mm spanner to release lock nut.

2. Undo M6 grub screw to release the clamp plate.

3. Lift out the leadscrew-nut clamp plate.


1. Re-fit the leadscrew-nut clamp plate.

Note: Make sure the slot of the clamp plate is seated behindthe bolt, that the fork is entrapping the leadscrew nut,and the nut flange is located in the step of the bracket.

2. Finger-tighten the M6 grub screw.

3. Push main carriage toward the servo motor, as near aspossible to the bearing block, without touching the the endstop.

END STOP

BEARINGBLOCK

4. Release and lock the M6 grub screw a second time.

5. Fit 3 mm key and further tighten the M6 grub screw by onefull turn.

6. Use a 10 mm spanner to tighten the lock nut.





4.19.2 Main Carriage Leadscrew


1. Remove leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).

Removal Procedure

REGISTERFACE

M4 PANHEADSCREWS

COUPLING SCREWS(2 OFF)

Figure 4.45 Main carriage leadscrew

1. Slacken the two screws on the end of the coupling nearest tothe leadscrew drive.

2. Remove three M4 panhead screws and three flat washersfrom the bearing block.

3. Remove two M6 caphead screws to release the right-handend-bearing bracket.

4. Grasp both ends of the leadscrew and carefully ease it out ofits coupling and bearing bracket.

5. Gently lay the released end of the leadscrew in the well.

6. Lift up the end-bearing bracket and carefully remove it fromthe leadscrew drive.

7. Gently lay the right-hand end of the leadscrew in the well.



8. Push main carriage toward the servo motor, as near aspossible to the bearing block, without touching the end stop.

9. Grasp the right-hand end of the leadscrew, lift and carefullywithdraw it toward the right-hand end.

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid any contact withthe base and structure or any othercomponents.


1. Grasp the right-hand end of the replacement leadscrew,present and carefully insert it toward the left-hand end.

2. Gently lay the leadscrew in the well.

3. Fit the leadscrew drive to the end-bearing bracket.

Note: Do not fix the end-bearing bracket at this time.

4. Push main carriage to a suitable mid-point.

5. Grasp both ends of the leadscrew and carefully present it tothe bearing bracket and to the leadscrew coupling.

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid any compressionof the leadscrew coupling.

6. Position the bearing block in the well of the base and push ithard up against the register face (see Figure 4.45), and tightenthe two M6 caphead securing screws.

7. Fit and secure three panhead screws and three flat washers tothe bearing block.



8. Tighten two caphead screws on the coupling nearest to theleadscrew drive.

Note: Make sure that the coupling is NOT compressed.

9. Re-fit the leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).



12. Open the lid.

13. Perform the system calibration tests (see Section 6.5).

14. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).

4.19.3 Main Leadscrew Motor



2. Move the main carriage to Park position (see Section 4.12).

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect leadscrew motor cable from top of RFI box.

2. Cut the three tie-wraps.

3. Withdraw the motor cable loom from the base well.

4. Slacken two caphead screws on the coupling nearest to theleadscrew motor.

5. Position a 3 mm hex-headed driver through one of the twospecial access holes in the coupling-bearing bracket oppositethe motor end and remove the first screw securing the motor.

6. Repeat Step 4 and remove the second screw securing themotor.



Figure 4.46 Main leadscrew motor and coupling

7. Grasp the body of the leadscrew motor and carefully ease itout of its coupling and bearing bracket.


1. Grasp the body of the leadscrew motor and carefully presentit to the bearing bracket and coupling.

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid any compressionof the leadscrew coupling.

2. Position a 3 mm hex-headed driver through one of the twospecial access holes in the coupling-bearing bracket oppositethe motor end and re-fit the first screw securing the motor.

3. Repeat Step 2 and re-fit the second screw securing the motor.

Note: Make sure the coupling is not compressed.



4. Lay out the motor cable loom in the base well.

5. Connect the leadscrew-motor cable to top of RFI box.

6. Fit three tie-wraps to secure the cable loom.



9. Open the lid.



4.19.4 Main Leadscrew Coupling


1. Remove the main leadscrew motor (see Section 4.19.3).

2. Remove the Main leadscrew (see Section 4.19.2).

Removal Procedure

3. Remove the leadscrew coupling.


1. Lay replacement leadscrew coupling in the coupling-bearingbracket.

Note: Make sure the 6 mm coupling faces the leadscrew andthe 8 mm coupling faces the motor.

2. Re-fit the main leadscrew (see Section 4.19.2).

Note: Make sure the coupling is pushed as far as possibleonto the leadscrew.



3. Re-fit main leadscrew motor (see Section 4.19.3).

4. Re-fit leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).



7. Open the lid.



4.19.5 C-Bearing Assembly



2. Power down the scanner.

3. Remove the main cover assembly (see Section 4.11.3).

4. Remove the three M5 caphead screws to release the rearcover plate.

5. Remove leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).

Figure 4.47 C-bearing assembly



Removal Procedure

CAUTION

Do not use metallic materials tosupport the main carriage.

1. Remove one C-bearing clamp screw.

2. Use a suitable hardwood block to support the main carriage.

Note: While both C-bearings should be replaced as abalanced pair, remove only one bearing at a time.Leave the other bearing to help support the maincarriage with the hardwood block, until the newbearing has been fitted.

3. Slide the bearing out of the bearing block, move to end ofguide and remove.


CAUTION

Use a new pair of bearings to avoiddifferences in tolerance and wear.

Special care must be taken to ensureeach bearing is correctly set up whilesecuring it.

1. Slide a replacement bearing over one end of guide into thebearing block, ensuring that the positioning recess is towardthe clamp-screw hole.



2. Correctly locate the C-bearing in the bearing block byinserting a 2.5 mm Allen key into the retaining-screw hole tolocate the positioning recess on the C-bearing.

3. Fit the screw to clamp C-bearing. Do not over-tighten.

4. Follow the removal procedure to remove the other C-bearing,and follow the replacement procedure to fit new bearing.

POSITIONINGRECESS

ALLENKEY

Figure 4.48 C-bearing alignment

5. Re-fit leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).

6. Re-fit the three M5 caphead screws to secure the rear coverplate.

7. Re-fit the main-cover assembly (see Section 4.11.3).

8. Open the lid.



4.19.6 Fit Front Transit Fixing

1. Retrieve the front transit fixing, the M8 buttonhead screw,and the two M6 caphead screw from the well of the baseassembly.



2. Position the transit fixing (see Figure 4.49) and loosely fit thetwo M6 caphead screws.

CAUTION

Do not tighten these screws.

3. Re-position the main carriage, as required, by mechanicallyturning the leadscrew (see Section 4.12.3) to align thethreaded hole with the transit fixing.

4. Place shims under the front wheel bearings.

5. Fit the M8 buttonhead screw through the transit fixing andinto the threaded hole on the side of the main carriage.

6. Using a 5 mm Allen key to tighten the M8 screw, and securethe front transit fixing to the main carriage.

CAUTION

Make sure the transit fixing is fullybutted to the main carriage.

7. Use a 5 mm key to tighten the two M6 caphead screws tosecure the transit fixing to the base assembly.

4.19.7 Remove Front Transit Fixing

1. Remove the two M6 caphead screws to loosen the transitfixing.

2. Slacken the M8 buttonhead screw.

3. Withdraw the front transit fixing.

CAUTION

Place all screws with the transitfixing in a safe place.



4.19.8 Main Carriage Wheel Bearings

Two variants of the carriage have been made. The earlier type hadtwo wheels, the later type has only one.

Two-Wheel Carriage


CAUTION

Use a matched pair of wheels toavoid differences in tolerance andwear.

1. Position main carriage for Camera service (seeSection 4.12).



4. Position main carriage for Transit fixing .

TRANSITFIXING

Figure 4.49 Main carriage wheels



CAUTION

Do NOT attempt to adjust thedifferential focus module. To do sowill change the delicate alignments.

Removal Procedure

1. Fit front transit fixing to support the main carriage (seeSection 4.19.6).

2. Undo and remove wheel nut with 10 mm spanner.

3. Remove flat washer.

4. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the other carriage wheel.


1. Fit flat washer over carriage wheel boss.

2. Fit and tighten wheel nut with 10 mm spanner.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other carriage wheel.

4. Remove front transit fixing from the main carriage (seeSection 4.19.7).



7. Perform the diff_focus alignment procedure (seeSection 6.4.3).





One-Wheel Carriage





4. Position main carriage for Transit fixing .

Figure 4.50 Main carriage wheel

Removal Procedure

1. Fit front transit fixing to support the main carriage (seeSection 4.19.6).

2. Undo and remove wheel nut with 13 mm spanner.

3. Remove flat washer.




1. Fit flat washer over carriage wheel boss.

2. Fit and tighten wheel nut with 13 mm spanner.

3. Remove front transit fixing from the main carriage (seeSection 4.19.7).



6. Perform the diff_focus alignment procedure (seeSection 6.4.3).



4.20 X-Slide Carriage AssemblyThis assembly carries the camera head, CCD mount, digitizermodule, lens mount, focus motor, enlargement motor and driveand almost everything else, including sensors.

The X-slide carriage uses a motorized leadscrew to movebi-directionally between the front and rear of the scanner,depending upon the position of the copy on the platen.

The lens mount uses a motorized pinion to move bi-directionally- left to right - along a fixed rack and is mounted on the X-slidecarriage.

The CCD mount uses a motorized pinion to move bi-directionally- left to right - along a rotating leadscrew and is mounted on theX-slide carriage.



4.20.1 Moving the X-Slide Carriage

On power up, the software boot program automatically resets theX-slide carriage to rest at the datum position which is at themidpoint of its traversing range.

Figure 4.51 Moving the X-slide carriage

During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will benecessary to re-position the X-slide carriage while the mainssupply has been isolated.

The acceptable method of moving the X-slide carriage, withoutcausing any problems, is as follows:

• Grasp the X-slide leadscrew and clockwise rotate it to movethe carriage toward the front.

4.20.2 Moving the Lens Mount

On power up, the software boot program automatically resets thelens mount to rest at its datum position which is at the left-handend of the enlargement leadscrew.



During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will benecessary to re-position the lens mount while the mains supplyhas been isolated.

The acceptable method of moving the lens mount is as follows:

• Grasp the enlargement leadscrew and rotate it toward thefront to move the lens mount toward the left.

Figure 4.52 Moving the lens mount

4.20.3 Moving the CCD Mount

On power up, the software boot program automatically resets theCCD mount to rest at its datum position which is at the left-handend of the focus rack.

During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will benecessary to re-position the CCD mount while the mains supplyhas been isolated.

The acceptable method of moving the CCD mount is as follows:

• Carefully push the CCD mount to a desirable position.



Figure 4.53 Moving the CCD mount

4.20.4 X-Slide Carriage

CAMFOLLOWERBRACKET

RAIL GUIDE

Figure 4.54 X-slide leadscrew nut







4. Move the X-slide carriage toward the centre (seeSection 4.20.1).

Removal Procedure

1. Remove the digitizer SK2 flexicable connector.

2. Disconnect PL7 from the X-slide distribution board to releasethe focus datum sensor cable.

Note: Do not cut the tie-wrap.

3. Remove the four caphead screws, springs and standoffs torelease the digitizer flexicable support tray and X-slidedistribution board.

4. Remove the three caphead screws to release the X-slideleadscrew nut.

5. Push the X-slide carriage toward the rear.

Note: Movement should be just sufficient for the carriage toclear the leadscrew nut.

6. Remove the two caphead screws to release the front X-slidebearing block.

7. Remove the two caphead screws to release the rear X-slidebearing block.

8. Grasp the X-slide carriage, lift carefully, move slightly to theleft to allow the cam follower bracket to clear its rail guide(see Figure 4.54), and then withdraw the carriage away fromthe right-hand bearings and leadscrew.

Note: The above step is performed from the front of thescanner.

9. Place the X-slide carriage on a suitable surface.

Note: The surface should be in a position where the carriagewill not suffer from any probable damage.



CAUTION

Special care must be taken to ensureeach bearing is correctly set up whilesecuring it.


1. Grasp the X-slide carriage and position it over the bearingsand leadscrew, ensuring the cam-follower bracket is under theguide rail.

2. Re-fit and tighten two caphead screws to secure the rearX-slide bearing block.

Note: See Figure 4.55 to correctly align each bearing block.

Figure 4.55 X-slide bearing alignment

3. Re-fit tighten two caphead screws to secure the front X-slidebearing block.

4. Pull the X-slide carriage toward the front.



Note: Movement should be just sufficient for the carriage toconnect with the leadscrew nut.

5. Re-fit and tighten the three caphead screws to secure theleadscrew nut.

6. Re-fit and tighten the three caphead screws, springs, andstandoffs to secure the digitizer flexicable support-tray.

Note: Make sure the flexicable is correctly aligned.

7. Re-fit PL7 to connect the focus datum-sensor cable.

8. Re-connect SK2 to the digitizer.



11. Open the lid.

12. Download the system-calibration data from the floppy diskwhich is supplied with the replacement X-slide carriage. Thedata comprises information on bad pixels and the CCD type.Use the Write Buffer procedure in Section 7.3.5 to downloadthe data.

13. Perform only the following system calibration tests:

• Carriage,

• X-slide,

• Enlargement,

• Offsets,

• Copyholder (only if required).

See Section 6.5.




4.20.5 X-slide Carriage Bearings Assembly


1. Remove the X-slide carriage (see Section 4.20.4).

Removal Procedure

1. Remove six hex-drive caphead screws to release the X-slidecarriage guide bar assembly.

2. Slide both bearings off the released guide bar assembly.

Figure 4.56 X-slide carriage bearing on guide bar assembly

CAUTION

Use a matched pair of bearings toavoid differences in tolerance andwear.




Note: The guide bar assembly has three shaped cutouts forlocating dowels on the main carriage casting.

1. Fit both replacement bearings to the guide bar assembly.

Note: Make sure the stepped shoulder of each bearing facesthe lens.

DOWEL

Figure 4.57 X-slide guide bar alignment

2. Position the X-slide carriage guide bar assembly into themain carriage casting.

3. Re-fit six hex-drive caphead screws to secure the X-slidecarriage guide-bar assembly.

Note: Make sure the shaped cutout of the guide-barassembly faces the dowels and that the rail edge is incontact with all three dowels. The stepped shoulder ofeach bearing faces the end of the X-slide carriage.

4. Re-fit the X-slide carriage (see Section 4.20.4).



7. Open the lid.





4.20.6 Digitizer Board Cover Plate

Note: This item is not a replaceable part, but it must be removedto access other parts which are replaceable.

The digitizer fan is fixed to this cover plate.





PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

SK2

Figure 4.58 Digitizer board cover plate

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL4 to release the digitizer fan cable.



2. Remove the two 5 mm nuts securing SK2.

3. Slacken the two side screws and remove the digitizer-boardcover-plate.


1. Re-fit the digitizer-board cover-plate.

2. Tighten the two screws to secure the digitizer cover-plate.

3. Re-fit the two 5 mm nuts to secure SK2.

4. Re-connect PL4.



4.20.7 Digitizer Fan

Figure 4.59 Digitizer fan removal

Note: This fan is fixed to the digitizer cover-plate.




1. Remove the digitizer-board cover-plate (see Section 4.20.6).

Removal Procedure

1. Remove two screws and nuts to release the digitizer fan fromthe cover plate.

2. Withdraw the digitizer fan.


1. Position replacement digitizer fan on the cover plate.

2. Re-fit and tighten the two screws and nuts to secure the fan.

3. Re-fit the digitizer cover plate (see Section 4.20.6).

4.20.8 Digitizer Board


1. Remove the digitizer-board cover-plate (see Section 4.20.6).


CAUTION

The static energy in your body candestroy sensitive components on theprinted circuit board.



Figure 4.60 Digitizer board

CAUTION

Do NOT pull on flexicables toremove their connectors otherwisedamage may occur.

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect SK2 and lay flat the digitizer flexicable.

2. Disconnect SK1 ribbon cable from its socket inside theright-hand end of the digitizer housing.

3. Grasp digitizer board and, with care, lift it to allow thestandoffs to clear their slots and gently pull to release it.

4. Remove and retain the four standoffs.




1. Re-fit the four standoffs to the replacement digitizer board.

2. Present and engage the standoffs on the replacement digitizerboard to the respective slots in the housing and lower theboard to capture the standoffs.

3. Re-connect SK1 ribbon cable.

4. Re-fit digitizer-board cover-plate (see Section 4.20.6).

5. Re-connect SK2 flexicable.

6. Remove the disposable antistatic wrist strap.



4.20.9 Focus Motor Rack





4. Centralize CCD mount on the focus motor rack (seeSection 4.20.3).

Removal Procedure

1. Remove the two recessed machine screws.

2. Remove the focus motor rack.



Figure 4.61 Focus motor rack alignment

Replacement/Alignment Procedure

1. Position the replacement focus motor rack.

Note: Make sure the teeth of the rack are pointing forward.

2. Loosely re-fit the two machine screws.

3. Move the CCD mount to position the pinion of the focusmotor near to the left-hand screw.

Note: Remember to allow clearance for the hexagon wrench.

4. Grasp the back of the rack and pull forward to meet thepinion.

5. Tighten the left-hand screw.

6. Move the CCD mount to position the pinion of the focusmotor near to the right-hand screw.

Note: Remember to allow clearance for the hexagon wrench.

7. Grasp the back of the rack and pull forward to meet thepinion.

8. Tighten the right-hand screw.





4.20.10 Focus Motor and Cable Loom





4. Move lens mount to the extreme right of enlargementleadscrew (see Section 4.20.2).

5. Move CCD mount to the extreme left of the focus rack (seeSection 4.20.3).

6. Remove the focus motor rack (see Section 4.20.9).

PL3

RACK

PINION

FOCUSMOTOR

Figure 4.62 Focus motor

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL3 to release the focus-motor cable from thelower left-hand socket on the digitizer board.

2. Remove two caphead screws from beneath the CCD mount.



3. Carefully disengage the focus-motor cable loom from underthe CCD mount.

4. Grasp the focus motor and ease it forward to clear the CCDmount.


1. Position cable loom of the replacement focus motor.

2. Present replacement focus motor to the CCD mount.

3. Re-fit two caphead screws to secure the focus motor to theCCD mount.

4. Re-connect PL3 to the lower left-hand socket on the digitizerboard.

5. Replace focus-motor rack (see Section 4.20.9).



4.20.11 Focus Datum Sensor and Cable Loom





4. Move lens mount to its extreme left-hand end of its leadscrew(see Section 4.20.2).

5. Move CCD mount to its extreme right-hand end of the rack(see Section 4.20.3).

6. Disconnect SK2 and lay flat the digitizer cable.



Figure 4.63 Focus datum sensor

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL7 to release the focus sensor cable from theX-slide distribution board.

2. Remove crosspoint self-tapping screw to release the focussensor.

3. Cut tie-wraps to release sensor cable.

4. Withdraw the focus datum sensor from its alignment slot.


1. Position the replacement focus-datum sensor and its cable.

2. Re-fit self-tapping screw to secure the focus-datum sensor.

3. Fit the replacement focus sensor into its alignment slot.

4. Fit new tie-wraps to secure the sensor cable.

5. Re-connect PL7 to X-slide distribution board.

6. Re-connect SK2 to the digitizer board.





4.20.12 Enlargement Datum Sensor and Cable Loom





4. Move lens mount to its extreme left-hand end of its leadscrew(see Section 4.20.2).


Figure 4.64 CCD baffle and enlargement sensor

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL1 to release the enlargement datum-sensorcable from the digitizer board.



2. Remove one, and loosen the other, caphead screw of theCCD-baffle located in front of the camera head.

Note: One screw is at the front and the other is diametricallyopposite at the rear.

3. Remove the CCD baffle.

4. Remove two crosspoint self-tapping screws to release theenlargement sensor from the CCD mount.

5. Carefully withdraw the cable loom from below the digitizermodule.


1. Position the replacement enlargement datum-sensor and itscable loom.

2. Re-fit and tighten two crosspoint self-tapping screws tosecure the enlargement sensor.

3. Clean the CCD-window (see Section 8.3.6).

4. Re-fit the CCD baffle.

5. Re-fit one, and tighten both caphead screws of the CCDbaffle.

6. Connect PL1 to the upper socket on left-hand side of thedigitizer board.



4.20.13 Enlargement Leadscrew







4. Move lens mount to the mid-point of its leadscrew length (seeSection 4.20.2).


Figure 4.65 Enlargement leadscrew and clamp

Removal Procedure

1. Slacken caphead screw on the enlargement-leadscrew clamp.

2. Remove three caphead screws to release the leadscrew nut.

3. Move lens mount to the extreme end of its leadscrew length(see Section 4.20.2).

4. Carefully withdraw the enlargement leadscrew from itsclamp.




1. Carefully, present the replacement leadscrew to theenlargement-leadscrew clamp.

2. Move lens mount to meet its leadscrew nut.

3. Re-fit three caphead screws to secure the leadscrew nut.

4. Align the outer edge of the clamp with the end of theleadscrew and set a 1 mm gap between the clamp and thecasting face.

5. Tighten caphead screw to secure the enlargement-leadscrewclamp.



4.20.14 Enlargement Leadscrew Clamp





4. Remove the enlargement leadscrew (see Section 4.20.3).

Removal Procedure

1. Remove enlargement-leadscrew clamp from the pinion of theenlargement motor.




1. Fit replacement enlargement-leadscrew clamp to theenlargement-motor pinion.

2. Re-fit enlargement leadscrew (see Section 4.20.3).



4.20.15 Enlargement Motor and Cable Loom

PL2

Figure 4.66 Enlargement motor and cable loom





4. Move the lens mount to its extreme right (see Section 4.20.2).

5. Move the CCD mount to its extreme left (see Section 4.20.3).



6. Disconnect PL2 to release the enlargement motor cable fromthe digitizer board.

7. Remove the enlargement-leadscrew clamp (seeSection 4.20.14).

Removal Procedure

1. Remove two caphead screws from the front of the CCDmount.

2. Grasp enlargement motor and ease it toward the left-hand endto clear the CCD mount.


1. Present replacement enlargement motor to its CCD mount.

2. Re-fit two caphead screws to secure the enlargement motor toits CCD mount.

3. Re-fit the enlargement-leadscrew clamp collar (seeSection 4.20.14).

4. Re-connect PL2 to the middle connector on the left-hand sideof the digitizer board.

5. Re-fit digitizer-board cover plate (see Section 4.20.6).



4.20.16 Cam Follower

Note: This item is located on the underside of the X-slidecarriage at the CCD mount end.







4. Remove the X-slide carriage (see Section 4.20.4).

Figure 4.67 Cam follower

Removal Procedure

1. Provide suitable soft mounts to support the upturned X-slidecarriage.

2. Place upturned X-slide carriage on soft mounts.

3. Remove the two M4 screws to release baseplate.

4. Remove keep nut to release cam follower from baseplate.


1. Fit replacement cam follower to the baseplate.

Note: Ensure that the cam follower backplate isperpendicular to direction of travel.



2. Re-fit and tighten keep nut to secure cam follower tobaseplate.

Note: Do not over-tighten the keep nut.

3. Re-fit the two M4 screws to secure baseplate.

4. Re-fit the X-slide carriage (see Section 4.20.4).





4.21 X-slide Leadscrew Assembly

4.21.1 X-slide Datum Sensor and Cable Loom





4. Position the X-slide carriage at the front (see Section 4.20.1).

PL6

Figure 4.68 X-slide datum sensor and cable loom

Removal Procedure

1. Remove two crosspoint screws to release the sensor.

2. Move the lens mount to access the cable connector.

3. Slacken three crosspoint screws to ease the captive cabletidies.

Note: Do not cut these cable tidies.



4. Cut tie-wraps as necessary.

5. Disconnect PL6 to release the X-slide datum sensor cablefrom the main-carriage distribution board.

Note: This board is located under X-slide distribution boardand under the CCD mount.

6. Remove the X-slide datum sensor and cable loom.


1. Position the replacement X-slide datum sensor and its cableloom.

2. Re-fit two crosspoint screws to secure the sensor.

3. Connect PL6 to the main carriage distribution board.

4. Ease the cable under the three cable tidies.

5. Tighten three crosspoint screws to capture cable tidies.

6. Fit tie-wraps as required.



4.21.2 X-slide Leadscrew





4. Move the X-slide carriage to the front (see Section 4.20.1).



CLAMP

LEADSCREW NUT

STEPPER MOTOR

LEADSCREW

LENS

Figure 4.69 X-slide leadscrew

Removal Procedure

1. Slacken caphead screw on the X-slide leadscrew clamp.

Note: Do not remove this screw.

2. Remove three caphead screws to release the X-slideleadscrew nut.

Note: This is the triangular nut situated on the X-slidecarriage as viewed from the front.

3. Push X-slide carriage toward the rear to free the leadscrewnut.

4. Carefully withdraw the X-slide leadscrew with nut.


1. Fit replacement leadscrew to the X-slide motor clamp.



2. Pull X-slide carriage toward the front to capture the leadscrewnut.

3. Re-fit three caphead screws to secure the X-slide leadscrewnut.

4. Tighten caphead screw on the X-slide leadscrew clamp.



4.21.3 X-slide Leadscrew Motor and Cable Loom

PL4

Figure 4.70 X-slide leadscrew motor and cable loom








5. Move CCD mount to the right (see Section 4.20.3).

Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect PL4 from the main-carriage distribution board.

2. Cut tie-wraps as required.

3. Ease cable loom from the captive cable clips.



5. Slacken the two caphead screws release the X-slide leadscrewmotor from the motor bracket.

6. Ease the motor free of its clamp.


1. Re-fit and tighten the two caphead screws to secure theX-slide leadscrew motor to the motor bracket.

2. Fit motor to the leadscrew clamp.

3. Tighten the caphead screw to secure the clamp.

4. Connect PL4 to the main carriage distribution board.





4.21.4 X-slide Leadscrew Clamp






Removal Procedure



2. Slacken the two caphead screws securing the baseplate of theX-slide leadscrew motor.

3. Ease the clamp free of both the motor and leadscrew.


1. Position the replacement X-slide leadscrew clamp.

2. Fit clamp to both the X-slide motor and its leadscrew.

3. Tighten the two caphead screws to secure the baseplate of theX-slide leadscrew motor.

4. Tighten the caphead screw to secure the clamp.




5 TerminalDiagnostics

This chapter provides a description of the terminal diagnosticprocedures for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner.

5.1 OverviewThe terminal diagnostics are a series of tests that are performedby an authorized field (customer) service engineer using a VT100compatible terminal.

Terminal diagnostics have the full range of tests which areperformed on the scanner via an RS232 cable connected to thescanner’s diagnostic port.

The scanner diagnostics have the following features:

• The diagnostic user interface uses the same principle ofhierarchical menus as other Fujifilm diagnostics software.

• Soak tests can be performed on all or sub-sets and failed testscan be repeated.

• An error-message logging facility allows groups of tests to berun unattended. Results can then be viewed later.

• The amount of information reported by each test can beincreased or decreased using a Verbose flag.

• Self-test routines are activated on power up (seeSection 5.2.1).

• When all of the diagnostic tests are run by the soakcommand, these tests are sequenced so that the first test toFAIL will indicate a faulty unit.



Note: Subsequent failures may be due to the first problemdetected by the soak test. Eliminate the first problemby replacing the faulty unit and then re-run the soaktest.

The terminal diagnostics program is divided into four mainmenus (see Figure 5.1).

Optics / See Section 5.9

Main Menu

Elec / See Section 5.5

Mech / See Section 5.10

Setup / See Chapter 6

Figure 5.1 Menu Map for the scanner

The electronic tests, under Elec/ , provide a series of tests for thesystem board, the digitizer board, and the lamp-driver board.

The optics tests, under Optics/ , provide a series of tests for thestability of the scanning illumination and for checking theuniformity of illumination at the CCD image sensor.

The mechanical tests, under Mech/ , provide a series of tests forall the electro-mechanical sub-assemblies.

The setup tests, under Setup/ , provide a series of utilities for thealignment and calibration of the scanner.

Most of these terminal diagnostic tests are also available on theworkstation diagnostics display.



5.2 Power-up Sequence

5.2.1 Power-on Tests

When the system is powered up, it will automatically run througha series of tests prior to its readiness to scan.

Most of the diagnostic tests can be re-run from the menus,however, some tests (e.g. the ram and eprom tests) are only testedduring the power-on sequence.

Not all of the available tests are run at power-up.

The results of these tests are made available for display by theworkstation application software.

The power-up sequence and movement between the three systemmodes; boot code, diagnostics, and the application is as follows:

POWER UP

VT100CONNECTED?

NOYES

APPLICATIONSYSTEM

appl [return]

OK/NONFATAL

ERROR

FATAL ERROR

BOOT UP

POST DIAGs

STANDBYSWITCH

OK

OK

DISPLAYS ANERROR CODEAND REBOOTS

TERMINALDIAGNOSTICS

RESTART

Figure 5.2 Power-up and software access diagram



In the event of a fatal error, the POSTs will not terminate, butwill halt the sequence and write an error message to the VT100emulation window and activate a flashing fault LED on thedisplay panel (see Table 5.1). After displaying the code, thesystem will attempt to re-boot as a test to clear the fault.

Table 5.1 Flashing fault-lamp modes

# Flashes

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Description of Failure

See Table B.2

RAM test failure.

Flash memory test failure.

ISP test failure.

IMR test failure.

Interrupt test failure.

SCSI test failure.

CS0 test failure.

When all three LEDs are on and communication with the CPU(e.g. via the SCSI or RS232 cable) is not possible, the systemboard cannot run POST.

Note that during the POSTs the lamps will be struck to helpevaporate any mercury on the lamp filaments.



5.3 Terminal Diagnostics User InterfaceThis facility allows a customer support technician to investigatefaults more comprehensively than by the workstation diagnosticsmethod and can test systems even when the SCSI operations havebeen affected.

5.3.1 The Terminal Diagnostics Display

VT100 Emulation Operation

An emulation window may be viewed on any server, whether it isa workstation or a terminal. The procedures required to displaythe window are described below.

Access on a Macintosh/PC

1. Start the terminal emulator (e.g. kermit /terminal ).

2. Set up for: 9600 baud, 8-data bits, 1-stop bit, no parity, andno flow control.

3. Power-up the scanner.

The diagnostic program on the scanner starts.

The VT100 Display

The VT100 terminal display is identical, regardless of theplatform on which the window is running.

The top line of the screen indicates the program title.

Below this is a box which shows the current menu and thecommand group available at this level.

The prompt and all user input appears in the bottom line of thescreen. The prompt changes to indicate the current sub-menu.



Figure 5.3 Terminal diagnostics opening screen

The diagnostics software is based on hierarchical menus.

Options available at any time are restricted to groups.

The members of each group are related logically within thehierarchy.

Entering Commands

There are two types of command:

• those which directly select tests or utilities,

• those which select another group (or sub-menu) ofcommands. When these are entered the screen is redrawn withthe new group displayed. These commands have the suffix / .

The commands which are currently available (except globalcommands which are available at any time) are displayed on thescreen.



5.3.2 Global Commands

Global commands do not appear in the menu structure and so arenot displayed at the top of the screen.

Global commands can be entered regardless of the current menuposition.

The global commands along with the menu items available forthe current menu level can be listed by typing help [Return ] or[?] .

Global commands are listed in the table below. To select acommand, type its name, followed by [Return] or [Enter] .

The global commands and their functions are shown Table 5.2.

All diagnostics commands are case independent. For example,HELP, help or HeLp, all select the same command.

Diagnostics commands can be abbreviated. For example, to selectthe Help command you can enter h, he, hel or help.

If several commands begin with the same letters, then sufficientletters must be typed to make the selection unique.

For example if there are two commands, help and hello and he isentered, the system responds with a command entry error.

To select the Hello command you must enter at least hell.

Some commands can be modified by adding subsidiarycommands. For example, if soak soe is entered, the soakcommand is modified so that it Stops On an Error.

Certain commands require responses to questions.

Other commands require extra data to be entered, this data isusually but not always in the form of numbers.



Table 5.2 Global commands

Global Command

break

monitor /

rlog

flog

repeat

showlog

loadscript

star

runscript

showscript

listscripts

delete

zeroscripts

record

verbose

appl

help

?

soak <item name>

stats

enable <item name>

disable <item name>

find <item name>

path

temp_stamp

time_stamp

evt/

../

quit/

Function

A forced break point for debugging.

Enters the monitor menu.

Sets the RAM log.

Sets the FLASH log.

Executes the command string count times.

Displays the contents of a file.

Loads a named script file from FLASH to RAM.

Enables/disables the rotating star activityindicator.

Executes currently loaded named script file.

Shows the current script file.

Lists those scripts stored in FLASH.

Deleted named script from FLASH

Erases all script files from FLASH.

Records the command lines into a script file.

Selects the level of messages for display.

Quits diagnostics and enters the application.

Lists all menu items currently available, and displays details about tests.

Lists all menu items currently available, and displays details about tests.

Soak a test or submenu of tests.

Shows the current status of the system.

Enables individual tests or submenus for soaktesting.

Disables individual tests or submenus thatwere enabled for soak testing.

Locates an item within the menu structure.

Displays the current menu path.

Puts temperature data from system anddigitizer board sensors into error messages.

Puts time data into error messages.

Enters the evt menu.

Returns cursor to parent menu.

Returns the cursor to parent menu.



Command Line Editing

As an aid to the user, the recorder diagnostics keep a history ofthe last ten commands entered. Recall and editing of any of thesecommands is possible.

• To move through the history of the commands use the or cursor keys.

• To edit a line use the [delete] key to remove characters, thentype in the new characters.

• To remove all characters from a line press .

• To execute a command that has been recalled press [Return] .

Soak Test Operation

The soak command will run all tests that are soak enabled in allsub-menus below the current level.

Tests and sub-menus that are soakable are indicated by an S suffixto the command name.

If the S is emboldened, the test is enabled. If the S notemboldened, the test is not enabled.

To soak all soakable tests and sub-menus, use the soakcommand.

By selecting soak soe the diagnostics will run each soakable testonce and will stop when an error occurs.

To soak more than once, use soak x where x is the requirednumber of repetitions.

To soak an individual test or sub-menu, enter soak x name ,where x is the name of the test or sub-menu and name is thenumber of repeats.

To select the stop-on-error code use the suffix soe . For example,soak 10 soe initiates a soak on all enabled tests 10 times and thetests will stop on any error.

To stop a soak test press [Ctrl] and c.



If a soak test fails and the stop-on-error (SOE) flag has been set,then a message is displayed on the monitor:

** An error stopped the soak test! [test name]

where [test name] is the name of the test which failed.

To select the loop-on-error code use the suffix loe . For example;soak 10 loe initiates a soak on all enabled tests 10 times and thetests will loop indefinitely on any error.

The enable command enables soak tests.

Individual tests can be enabled. For example; enable test3enables command Test3 for soak testing. If enable all is enteredthen every command in all sub-menus will be enabled.

The disable command disables soak tests.

Individual tests can be disabled. For example; disable test3disables command Test3 for soak testing. If disable all is enteredthen every command in all sub-menus will be disabled.

Test results can be logged to RAM, or FLASH, for subsequentexamination.

Commands available are:

• rlog on - tests logged to RAM enabled,

• rlog off - tests logged to RAM disabled,

• rlog clear - clears the rlog buffer.

Note: The flog commands are similar for FLASH.

Time information can be optionally added to the error log usingthe command time_stamp .

Temperature information may be also added to the error log usingthe command temp_stamp .

Verbose Command

The verbose command controls the messages which appearduring soak tests.



On its own, this command reports the status of the Verbosefunction (on or off).

Use verbose on and verbose off to switch the function on andoff respectively.

• When Verbose is on, all messages are displayed and messagesbeginning with **, --, ++ and ^ are logged to RAM (if RAMlogging is enabled).

Note: Only error messages (indicated with **) are logged toFLASH.

• When Verbose is off, only error messages are displayed andlogged to RAM or FLASH.

Note: For troubleshooting, always select the Verbose ONoption.

5.3.3 Standard Monitor Commands

Table 5.3, Table 5.5, and Table 5.4 lists the monitor commandsfor the scanner.

Monitor Mode Operation

Within the diagnostics menu there is a global command, monitor ,which selects the diagnostics monitor for the scanner.

It allows low-level access to system hardware with facilities suchas memory-access routines.

The diagnostics monitor operates in a similar way to thediagnostic menu system.

Commands are entered by typing the command name followed by[Return] exactly the same way as for the diagnostics menu.

The same rules of menu searching and abbreviation handling thatapply to the menu system are used.



A history stack of commands and command line editing are alsosupported.

Type help for general information.

Type help command_name for specific help.

Table 5.3 Standard monitor commands

Command

dmem

verify

smem

sverify

cmem

compare

search

servo /

stepper /

tauto

.. /

Function

Read from a memory location.

Read from a memory location and check that thememory location contains the desired pattern.

Set memory to a specified value.

Write to a memory location and verify that the writeoccurred.

Copies one area to another area of memory.

Compare two blocks of memory.

Search an area of memory with the desiredpattern.

Displays a list of servo motor commands.

Displays a list of stepper motor commands.

Toggles (enables/disables) automatic startup ofapplication.

Returns cursor to the previous menu.



Servo Motor Commands

This contains a number of commands to drive the servo motor.

Table 5.4 Servo motor test commands

Status

Soakable

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

Test Name

datum

hi

lo

error

stats

simulation

home

stop

off

goto

desired

pos

init

delay

wait

.. /

Test No.

104

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Description

Initializes the servo motor and performs the datumprocedure to park the main carriage.

Defines the high-speed control-port settings.

Defines the low-speed control-port settings.

Defines the positional-error tolerance.

Reports the statistics of the three sensors; the maincarriage datum sensor, the forward limit sensor andthe reverse limit (park) sensor.

Enables/disables servo motor simulation mode.

Defines the current position of the main carriagewith respect to its datum position.

Stops any current movement of the main carriage.Three options are offered: Smoothly, Abruptly, orTurnoff.

Removes power supply to the servo motor.

Changes the status of acceleration and velocity ofthe servo motor, and positions the main carriage.

Reports position of the main carriage. Can be usedto set a desired position. Range of desired positionsis between 0 and 540000.

Reports the current position of the main carriage.

Initializes the servo motor.

Pauses any keyboard/script processing for aspecified number of seconds.

Waits for the servo motor to stop any rotation beforegiving control back to the keyboard.

Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit).

Note: These tests will fail if the interlocks are activated.

To move the Server motor using the Monitor mode:

1. Open a terminal window.

2. Launch the Terminal diagnostics by powering on the scanner.



3. Type mon [Return] .

4. Press the Spacebar, taking note of the warning given.

5. Type servo [Return] .

6. Type init [Return] to initialise for the servo motor.

7. Type datum [Return] to send the servo motor to datum.

8. To drive the motor to a specified position, typegoto ∧ pos=xxxxxx , where ∧ = a space and xxxxxx is a valuebetween 0 and 545000.

CAUTION

Do not exceed the values given, ordamage may occur to the scanner. Ifthe motor drives up to the end-stopsand continues to drive an unusualnoise will be heard from the motor.Switch off the scanner and re-boot.

If any command fails it may be necessary to re-initialise and resetthe datum.

You can use the pos command to give a positon read-out andsensors to check the sensor state, but the display is not in realtime.



Stepper Motor Commands

This contains a number of commands to drive the threestepper-motors.

Table 5.5 Stepper motor test commands

Status

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

Test Name

datum *

sensors *

simulation *

off

delay #

wait *

halt *

stop *

init *

pos

default

goto

step

stat * -reset

stat * -zero

stat * nostat

.. /

Test No.

63/64/65

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Description

Performs a datum procedure on the specified steppermotor.

Reports current state and statistics of a selected sensor(* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all).

Enables/disables the simulation mode for a selectedmotor (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all).

Turns OFF the power supply to a specified steppermotor.

Pauses any keyboard/script processing for a specifiednumber (#) of seconds.

Waits until the specified stepper motor has stoppedbefore giving control back to the keyboard. (* = 1, 2, or3). (none = all).

Stops a specified stepper motor quickly, and then turnsOFF its power supply (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all).

Stops a specified stepper motor in a controlled manner (*= 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). To re-initialize the motor, run itsdatum test.

Initializes the specified motor to allow the entry ofacceleration/decelerate profiles.

Displays current position of a specified motor.

Initializes a specified stepper motor with the defaultacceleration/deceleration profile.

Moves the selected carriage to a specified position (e.g.X-slide carriage, focus mount, or CCD mount).

Moves the selected carriage by a specified number ofsteps (+ or -).

Records the state and statistics of a specified steppermotor. -reset will re-set the status. -zero will set the stat’s counters to zero. -nostat disables the output path for the statisticalinformation.

Returns cursor to the previous memory (same as quit).



Note: There are three datum sensors, three stepper motors, anda simulation state for each motor which can be eitherenabled or disabled.

* = a number to represent the following options:

when * = 1 the enlargement motor or its datum sensor isselected.

when * = 2 the focus motor or its datum sensor isselected.

when * = 3 the X-slide motor or its datum sensor isselected.

when a number is not specified then all three motors areoperated.

Note: These tests will fail if the interlocks are activated.

To move a stepper motor using the Monitor mode:

1. Open a terminal window.

2. Launch the Terminal diagnostics by powering on the scanner.

3. Type mon [Return] .

4. Press the Spacebar, taking note of the warning given.

5. Type stepper [Return] .

6. To initialise the Enlargement motor, type:init ∧ 1∧ 0.33∧ 33∧ noaccel [Return] , where ∧ = a space.

To initialise the Focus motor, type: init ∧ 2∧ 0.33∧ 33∧ noaccel [Return] .

To initialise the X-slide motor, type: init ∧ 3∧ 0.44∧ 44∧ noaccel [Return] .

7. To send the Enlargement motor to datum, type:datum ∧ 1 [Return] .

To send the Focus motor to datum, type:datum ∧ 2 [Return] .

To send the X-slide motor to datum, type:datum ∧ 3 [Return] .



8. To drive the motor to a specified position, the Enlargementmotor 13500 steps from datum for example, typegoto ∧ 1∧ 13500∧ ;wait [Return] . The Enlargement motor willbegin to move 13500 steps from datum. Control will not bereturned to the keyboard until the motor gets there. As analternative, nowait can be entered and control will return tothe keyboard immediately.

Maximum values are as follows:

• Enlargement motor: 0 to 13600,

• Focus motor: 0 to 15400,

• X-slide motor: 10000 from datum.

CAUTION

Do not exceed the values given, ordamage may occur to the scanner. Ifthe motor drives up to the end-stopsand continue to drive an unusualnoise will be heard from the motor.Switch off the scanner and re-boot.

If any command fails it may be necessary to re-initialise and resetthe datum.

You can use the pos command to give a positon read-out andsensors to check the sensor state, but the display is not in realtime.

5.3.4 Display Utilities

Certain global commands (see Table 5.2) allow logs to bedisplayed on a terminal.



Table 5.6 Display logs menu

Status

User Exec

User Exec

Test Name

showlog

showscript

Description

Shows showlog records.

Shows current script file.



5.4 Terminal Diagnostic TestsThese tests are organized into a number of menus that reflect thearchitecture of the scanner.

At the top level, the tests are organized into the following menus:

• electronic: These test the circuit boards of the system.

• optics: These test the optical paths of the scanner (see Section 5.9).

• mech These test the mechanical assemblies of the system (see Section 5.10).

• setup These utilities allow the scanner to be mechanically aligned and calibrated (see Chapter 6).

The electronic tests further divided into sections.

• system board tests: See Section 5.5which are further sub-divided into CPU tests, System testsand MCB tests,

• digitizer board tests: See Section 5.6,

• lamp driver board tests: See Section 5.7,

• utilities: See Section 5.8.



Elec cpu_test /

sys_brd /

utils /

scsi_tests /

dsp_tests /

sync_tests /

lamp_brd /

mcb_brd /

dig_brd / basic /

function /

See Table 5.17

See Table 5.16

See Table 5.15

See Table 5.14

See Table 5.12

See Table 5.10

See Table 5.11

See Table 5.9

See Table 5.7

Figure 5.4 Elec/menu tree



5.5 System Board Tests

5.5.1 Introduction

The system board tests divide the C-550 Lanovia Scanner systeminto a group of functional blocks.

The functional blocks are as follows:

• Control processor unit (CPU),

• SCSI control unit,

• Digital signal processor (DSP) unit,

• Synchronization unit,

• Motion controllers.

5.5.2 CPU Tests

These fundamental tests ensure the command processor unit(CPU) is running and they also ensure that the remainingdiagnostic tests can be run.

The cpu_test menu provides the following functions:

• Simple UART and power-up indication test,

• DRAM memory register based test,

• FLASH memory register based checksum test,

• Interrupt tests,

• Tests the ISP port,

• Control status register test,

• Interrupt mask register test,

The simple UART, and FLASH memory register based checksumtests are only run at power-up.



cpu_test Menu Path

Elec/cpu_test

Table 5.7 CPU_test menu

Status

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

User Exec

Test Name

cs_0

isp

digitizer_if

icr

cvr

L1_reg

L2_reg

imr

int

mem_dram

addr_dram

temp_status

temp_sensor

.. /

Test No.

25

26

28

47

48

80

81

27

52

60

61

49

50

-

Description

Checks the control register space.

Checks the in-situ-programming (ISP) port.

Checks the digitizer’s interface port.

Checks the DSP‘s interface port.

Checks the DSP‘s interface port.

Checks data bus operation for lamp register 1

Checks data bus operation for lamp register 2

Checks the CPU’s interrupt mask register.

Checks for correct responses to the external interrupts

Checks the DRAM memory (see note below).

Checks the DRAM addressing (see note below).

Checks and, if required, sets the hysteresis limits of thetemperature sensor.

Checks the operation of the temperature chip and itssense bit on the system board.

Returns cursor to the parent menu (same as quit).

Note: These checks only test a part of the DRAM.



5.5.3 Sys_brd Tests

The sys_brd menu has four sub-menus which checks thefollowing to ensure they are correctly functioning:

• the SCSI interface,

• the DSP,

• the synchronizer,

• the motor control interface.

Table 5.8 Sys_brd tests

Test Name

scsi_tests /

dsp_tests /

sync_tests /

Description

See Table 5.9

See Table 5.10

See Table 5.11

SCSI_Tests

These diagnostic tests ensure that the SCSI controller is workingcorrectly.

Note: The SCSI output is not tested in this group.

The control logic has the diagnostic features added to allow:

• Ability to reset the SCSI controller.

• Data bus and address bus tests on the SCSI controller.

• The SCSI controllers flags can be tested by emptying andfilling the SCSI FIFO and checking the status of the flags.

SCSI diagnostics are only available through the terminaldiagnostics port.



scsi_tests Menu Path

Elec/sys_brd/scsi_tests

Table 5.9 SCSI_tests

Status

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

User Exec

Test Name

abus

dbus

reset

flags

.. /

Test No.

51

5

6

7

-

Description

Tests the address bus on the SCSI controller

Tests the data bus on the SCSI controller

Resets the SCSI controller

Tests operation of the SCSI controller buffer flags.


DSP_Tests

The digital signal processor (DSP), along with the SCSIinterface, comprise the image path section of the systemboard.

The DSP handles all autobalance, image processing, andformatting of the image data before sending it to theworkstation via the SCSI interface.

The DSP can perform its own diagnostics when itreceives the appropriate instructions from the CPU.

The DSP assists in the synchronizer diagnostics and teststhe DMA transfers between the DSP and the SCSI chip.



dsp_tests Menu Path

Elec/sys_brd/dsp_tests

Table 5.10 dsp_tests

Status

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

User Exec

Test Name

reset

16sram

dram16

24sram

x_input

y_input

x_output

y_output

byteswap

oscillator (*)

line_sync (*)

blue_integrate (*)

red_integrate (*)

green_integrate (*)

valid_video (*)

start_of_line (*)

.. /

Test No.

8

9

10

11

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

22

21

23

24

-

Description

Tests the system board’s ability to reset anddownload code into the dsp.

Tests the DSP’s 16-bit SRAM.

Tests the DSP’s 16-bit DRAM.

Tests the DSP’s 24-bit SRAM.

Tests the DMA transfers into the DSP x-memorystacks.

Tests the DMA transfers into the DSP y-memorystacks.

Tests the DMA transfers from the DSP’sx-memory stacks to the SCSI chip.

Tests the DMA transfers from the DSP’sy-memory stacks to the SCSI chip.

Tests the DMA transfers from DSP to the SCSIchip using the byteswap facility.

Checks the DSP’s crystal frequency.

Measures the line counter mark-to-space ratioon a signal from the synchronizer

Tests the synchronizer’s integration timer for theblue CCD and measures the mark-to-spaceratio.

Tests the synchronizer’s integration timer for thered CCD and measures the mark-to-space ratio

Tests the synchronizer’s integration timer for thegreen CCD and measures the mark-to-spaceratio

Measures the mark-to-space ratio of thevalid_video synchronization signal.

Measures the mark-to-space ratio of thestart-of-line synchronization signal.

Returns cursor to the previous menu (same asquit) .

Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the digitizerboard is either faulty or not connected.

(*) This symbol indicates synchronizer tests.



Sync_Tests

This control unit provides synchronization of the data acquisitionwith the main carriage traversing mechanism.

The diagnostics features are:

• Stuck bits to be tested on the read/write bits of the registers,

• Generation of interrupts in poll mode,

• Measuring of following signals via the DSP,

• While the tests are listed here, they actually reside in DSPdiagnostics:

• Line synchronizer,

• Start of scan line,

• Integration times,

• Valid video.

sync_tests Menu Path

Elec/sys_brd/scsi_tests



Table 5.11 Sync_tests

Status

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

User Exec

Test Name

line

red_green

blue_control

addr_sync

poll_int

.. /

Test No.

1

2

3

46

4

-

Description

Checks the data bus to the line-count register.

Checks the data bus to the red_green integration register.

Checks the data bus to the blue integration, prescaler,and valid_video register.

Checks the valid_video timing and synchronization.

Tests the ability of the pixel counters to generate aninterrupt request by polling the interrupt bit.


Note: The sync_tests on the system board do not test thecomplete operation. See Table 5.10 for the othersynchronizer tests.



5.5.4 Mcb_brd Tests

The mcb_brd tests check the functioning of the motor controlinterface circuits to ensure they are functioning correctly.

The motor controllers are the interface between the drive circuitsand the cpu.

Motion control is a separate circuit located on the system board.

Testing is at 2 levels:

• the electronic interface between the processor and the mcb,and

• the functional testing of each motor assembly.

Note: The functional tests are available in the mech/ ⇒tests section (see Section 5.10).

There are additional facilities for exercising the motors, but theseare not required for diagnosing faults with the system. Thesefacilities are available from the standard monitor commands (seeTable 5.3).

mcb_brd Tests Menu Path

Elec/mcb_brd

Table 5.12 mcb_brd tests

Status

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Test Name

s_enable_reg

mode_reg

reset_servo

data_reg

control_reg

Test No.

76

77

82

78

79

Description

Tests the data bus of the stepper enable register.

Tests the data bus of the stepper mode register.

Checks that the servo controller can be reset.

Tests the data bus of the servo’s data port.

Tests the data bus of the servo controller’s control register.



5.6 Digitizer Board Tests

5.6.1 Introduction

The digitizing system diagnostics is considered as two elements:

• the digital control electronics,

• the analogue electronics.

The digital control aspects are tested as part of the basic tests.These include interface and data path tests of the circuit.

The analogue electronics are tested by the functional tests. Theseuse special diagnostic modes of operation by injecting analoguesignals into the digitizer input and testing whether or not theyhave been correctly processed.

5.6.2 Digitizing System

The digitizer board is part of the scan head and it provides thefront end analogue electronics for the CCD sensor.

The digitizer provides clock signals and power to the CCDheadboard and receives back the analogue signals from the red,green and blue stripes. These are converted to digital form andpassed to the system board.

The interface to the system board (including power) is via asingle 30-way ribbon cable.

A voltage sensor indicates if any of the incoming power supplyrails have failed.

A temperature sensor gives a pass/fail indication of boardover-temperature of the digitizer/scan head.



5.6.3 Dig_brd Tests

The dig_brd menu has two sub-menus which check that thepower and functions of the digitizer board are functioningcorrectly.

Table 5.13 Dig_brd tests

Test Name

basic /

function /

Description

See Table 5.14

See Table 5.15

Basic Tests Menu Path

Elec/dig_brd/basic

Table 5.14 Basic tests

Status

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

User Exec

Test Name

reset_digi

power

pll

temp_status

mode

calibrate

pipeline

.. /

Test No.

-

29

30

31

110

32

33

-

Description

Resets the digitizer circuits.

Checks power supply to digitizer board.

Checks synchronization of the PLL with the systemclock.

Checks the temperature limits and status bit to ensurethey are within tolerances.

Checks the serial link to the digitizer and also checks fora correct operation of the digitizer modes.

Sets the offset between the two ADCs.

Tests the data path from the digitizer.

Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit) .



Function Tests Menu Path

Elec/dig_brd/function

Table 5.15 Function tests

Status

Soakable

User Exec

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

Test Name

reset_digi

temp_sensor

adc1_stuck

adc2_stuck

gain_offset

ratio

red_gain_offset

green_gain_offset

blue_gain_offset

linearity

noise

freerun

diagdac

offdac

.. /

Test No.

-

35

40

41

42

36

43

44

45

37

39

34

72

71

-

Description

Resets the digitizer circuits.

Checks digitizer’s temperature sensor chip.

Checks the adc1 to system bus operation.

Checks the adc2 to system bus operation.

Checks the dac gain and its offset response from theADC circuit.

Checks the gain ratio between the two ADCs.

Checks the gain and offset for the red channel and alsofor any x-talk on the green and blue channels.

Checks the gain and offset for the green channel andalso for any x-talk on the red and blue channels.

Checks the gain and offset for the blue channel andalso for any x-talk on the red and green channels.

Checks the ADC for its linearity response from thedigitizer.

Checks the noise level of the ADC.

Factory utility for setting up the digitizer.






5.7 Lamp Driver Board Tests

5.7.1 Introduction

The lamp driver board contains the necessary circuitry to drivethe 5 lamps in the system (one transmission, two reflection, andtwo light table lamps).

The transmission and reflection lamps can be dimmed, and theyalso have optical detection circuitry to maintain a constantillumination, despite the effects of aging and variabletemperature.

These tests check the interfaces to the lamp driver board. Theyalso check that the lamps light, and behave normally.

The lamp driver board is diagnostically checked for thefollowing:

• Connected to power supply,

• Power supply reaches a minimum limit,

• Board is operating within its temperature range,

• Interface to system board is working,

• Transmission and reflection lamps will correctly light atdifferent dimmer levels,

• All five lamps cannot be switched on at once.



Lamp_brd Tests Menu Path

Elec/lamp_brd

Table 5.16 lamp_brd utilities and tests

Status

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Test Name

lamp_power

board_temp

check_dac

dac_adc_loop

tx_on

tx_off

rx_on

rx_off

lt_on

lt_off

write_dac

read_adc

tx_check

rx_check

all_lamps

stress_tests /

Test No.

88

89

90

91

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

92

93

94

-

Description

Checks power supply to lamp driver board.

Checks board temperature is within limits.

Test to write a user defined value to the DAC.

Checks operation of serial DAC loopback.

Switches ON the transmission lamp. 12-bit hexvalues entered in DAC. Incorrect entry then defaultsare taken.

Switches OFF the transmission lamp.

Switches ON the reflection lamps. 12-bit hex valuesentered in DAC. Incorrect entry then defaults aretaken.

Switches OFF the reflection lamps.

Switches ON the light table lamps.

Switches OFF the light table lamps.

Writes a value to the DAC.

Reads ADC for the selected channel.

Checks operation of the transmission lamp.

Checks operation of the reflection lamps.

Switches ON all lamps and checks that bothreflection lamps switch OFF.

Runs tx_check and rx_check alternately with lighttable lamps on. Intended for use only in the stresschamber.

Note: Some of the above tests will fail if theopto-mechanical interlocks are activated.



5.8 Utilities

5.8.1 Introduction

This section will allow the user to examine the state of the systemsensors.

Utilities Menu Path

Elec/utils

Table 5.17 Utils menu

Test Name

mtr_sens

lmp_sens

sys_sens

Description

Displays the status of the motors and sensors (see Figure 5.5).

Displays the status of the lamps (see Figure 5.6).

Displays the status of the system (see Figure 5.7).

Note: Type control c to exit the display.

Figure 5.5 Terminal view of the mtr_sens display



Figure 5.6 Terminal view of the lmp_sens display

Figure 5.7 Terminal view of the sys_sens display



5.9 Optics TestsNote: Optical tests should be only performed after the electronic

tests have been performed.

5.9.1 Introduction

These tests check the optical components of the system to makesure they are functioning correctly. Unlike the electronic tests nosingle part of the optical system can be tested in isolation, so ifthe service engineer finds a failure, a visual inspection willidentify the cause.

Note: To avoid unusual problems make sure the opticalcomponents are free of dust and fingerprints.

Optics Menu Path

optics

Table 5.18 Optics tests

Status

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Test Name

diff_check

tx_stability

rx_stability

tx_profile

rx_profile

ccd_noise

Test No.

116

96

97

112

113

115

Description

Factory test for checking field curvature of lens atall resolutions. Diff_focus test target required.

Similar to rx_stability, but for the transmission lampand its detector board.

Tests the reflection lamps and their detectorboards. Makes sure the illumination of the CCDimage sensor is sustained at a fixed level for a fiveminute period. For factory use only.

Checks the uniformity of the transmissionillumination of the CCD image sensor at twodifferent resolutions. Also checks for dirt in thewhite balance area of the platen.

Similar to tx_profile, but for uniformity of thereflection illumination.

Checks the status of CCD noise to make sure it islower than the specified threshold.



5.10 Mechanical TestsNote: Mechanical tests should be performed only after the

electronic tests have passed.

5.10.1 Introduction

These tests check the mechanical assemblies for a correctoperation. Each assembly consists of mechanical components(leadscrews, bearings etc.) and electrical/electronic components(motors, sensors etc.). In the event of a failure it is up to theservice engineer to identify the failing component by a visualinspection.

The lightbar, lid, and main cover must be fitted and closed beforethese tests are performed. Activated safety interlocks will preventthe operation of all motors, and the tests will abort.

Tests on any of the interlocked mechanisms can fail if the safetyinterlocks are activated. The following states must exist for thesesensors to be operable:

• Main cover fitted at all times while the scanner is poweredup.

• When the lightbar is fitted, the lid must be closed.

• When the lightbar has been removed, the lid may be eitheropen or closed.



Mech Menu Path

Mech

Table 5.19 Mechanical tests

Status

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

Soakable

User Exec

Soakable

User Exec

Test Name

focus_chk

enlrg_chk

x slide_chk

carriage_chk

leadscrew_chk

endstop_chk

life_test

ess_test_menu /

service /

Test No.

83

84

85

86

87

105

102

-

-

Description

Checks the focus motor control circuits toensure the CCD mount can be correctly driven.

Checks the enlargement motor control circuitsto ensure the lens mount can be correctlydriven.

Checks the X-slide motor control circuits toensure the X-slide carriage can be correctlydriven.

Checks the encoder and servo motor controlcircuits to ensure the main carriage can becorrectly driven.

Checks the servo motor torque and itsleadscrew drag to ensure the main carriage canbe precisely positioned.

Checks the operation of the forward andreverse limit sensors to ensure the maincarriage stops correctly.

Not for Field use.

Not for Field use.

To access the service sub-menu



5.10.2 Service Menu

This menu has three utilities for positioning the main carriagebefore performing a unit replacement procedure.

Service Menu Path

Mech/Service

Table 5.20 Service tests

Status

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

Test Name

camera_service

park

transit_fixing

Test No.

107

108

109

Description

Moves the main carriage to thetable lamps change position.

Moves the main carriage to itspark position.

Moves all motors to their transitfixing positions


6 Alignments andCalibrations

This chapter provides a detailed description of the setup testmenus, special alignments and field service calibrations.

6.1 OverviewThe C-550 Lanovia Scanner alignment and calibration procedurescan be only performed once the systems have passed all terminaldiagnostics tests (see Chapter 5).

The alignment procedures have been provided to assist theservice engineer in making certain mechanical adjustments to thescanning system.

The calibration procedures record in non-volatile memory someof the characteristics of the CCD image sensor for later use by thesystem software.

Camera Alignment

The alignment of the CCD mount to its lens mount is performedat the factory on a special rig.

Carriage Alignment

This section explains the preparations and procedures forperforming the two tasks.

Alignments and Calibrations


They are the:

• light_bar procedure.

• diff_focus procedure.

System Calibration

This section explains the preparations and procedures forperforming the following tasks:

• main carriage datum,

• X-slide datum,

• enlargement and focus calibration,

• start of scan offsets,

• bad pixel elimination,

• copy holder registration edges calibration.

C-dot SP Calibrations

This section describes the calibration procedures required whenthe scanner is to be used to scan images to be processed using theC-dot SP application:

• Sharpness platen calibration for images up to a maximum sizeof A4. This calibration must be run at 36 and 45 lines/mmresolution.

• Swathe platen calibration for images up to a maximum size ofA3, when running C-scan with Sprint.

Note: If C-scan with Sprint is to be run, both of thesecalibrations must be performed.



6.2 Test FilmsThere are four types of test film, each having been designed tosuit a particular procedure.

• Lightbar Alignment Target (75524070),

• Engineer’s Calibration Chart (75522450), (see Figure 6.1).This includes:

the Differential Focus Target,

the System Calibration Target, including the Magnificationbars and the Zig-zag Strip,

the Bad Pixel Elimination Target,

Clear area for Transmission White-balance,

Position guides,

Electronic Repro Target.

BAD PIXELELIMINATION

TARGETMAGNIFICATION

BARS

CLEAR AREA FORTRANSMISSIONWHITE BALANCE

ZIG-ZAG STRIP POSITIONGUIDES

ELECTRONICREPRO TARGET

SYSTEM CALIBRATION TARGETDIFFERENTIAL FOCUS TARGETS

Figure 6.1 Engineer’s Calibration Chart



• C-dot Scanner Calibration Target for sharpness calibration,Part No. 7A002580.

• Swathe Scanning Calibration Target, Part No. 7A013510.

Each film is viewed in transmission mode.

CAUTION

The emulsion side of the test filmscan be easily scratched. A seriouslyscratched film will cause thecalibration program to fail. Do notbend the films.



6.3 Setup IntroductionFollowing the replacement of modules, Set-up procedures mayhave to be run.

6.3.1 Setup Menu Path

Main/Setup

The setup menu has three sets of tests.

Table 6.1 Setup Menu Tests

Test Name

scan-head

carriage

calibrate

Description

For factory use only

See Table 6.2

See Table 6.3

Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the scanner hasdeveloped any faults, or if the targets are dirty or poorlypositioned.



6.4 Carriage Alignment

6.4.1 Carriage Menu Introduction

This section is concerned with two alignment procedures. Theyare the:

• light_bar alignment.

• diff_focus alignment.

These alignment procedures are used to ensure the lightbar isaligned with the CCD camera, and that any differential focuserrors are minimized.

Carriage Tests Menu Path

Main/Setup/carriage

Table 6.2 Carriage tests

Status

User Exec

User Exec

Test Name

light_bar

diff_focus

Test No.

103

73

Description

Checks the alignment of thelightbar with the ccd path.

Checks for any misalignmentbetween the main carriage andthe CCD path.

6.4.2 Light_bar Alignment

This program is designed to analyse any variations to the path ofthe scan head, to ensure the lightbar is correctly aligned.

This test must be run before the diff_focus test.

The lightbar should be re-aligned when the following occur:

• a new or different lightbar is being fitted,



• the existing lightbar has been knocked and causedmisalignments (e.g. dark edges appear at the edges of thescan).

Lightbar Alignment Target

Note: In addition to the normal purchasing method, this targetcan be obtained free by downloading a TIFF image fromthe internet and printing the file to film. The image isattached to a document on the Fujifilm private internalWeb Server: Service Information Team / ServiceInformation Online / Tech Info Databsase / C-550 Lanovia/ C-550 lightbar alignment target. The destination ispassword protected.

This target is a thin strip of film with a ‘bow tie’ (e.g. twoinwardly pointing triangles) symbol at each end.

Figure 6.2 Lightbar alignment target, 75524070

Each ‘bow tie’ () is aligned to the aperture of the lamp and isaffixed with a suitable piece of adhesive tape to the circumferenceof the transmission lamp.



Figure 6.3 Alignment target fitted to the lightbar

Preparation

To perform these precise adjustments, it is important that thepreparation tasks are correctly completed before the alignmentprocedure is undertaken.

1. Open the lid.

2. Remove the lightbar assembly.

3. Place the lightbar alignment target on the transmission-lamp(see Figure 6.3).

4. Slacken the four cap-head screws to loosen the capture of theinterface plate to the reflection-column casting as shown inFigure 6.4.



CAP-HEADSCREWS

Figure 6.4 Location of interface plate adjustment screws

5. Re-fit the lightbar assembly.

6. Close the lid.

7. Ensure that the transmission lamp has turned off (wait ifnecessary), then run the terminal diagnostics (seeSection 5.4).

Alignment Procedure

1. Access setup/carriage menu.

2. Select the light_bar command.

Note: The program records an alignment value for bothsides of the lightbar.

3. Adjust the position of the interface plate (Figure 6.4).



4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until front and rear of the lightbar iswithin 10 points (with a maximum difference of 20) of itsmaximum reading.

Note: The typical maximum reading is 350 points.

5. Tighten the two cap-head screws on the open side of thelightbar.


7. Tighten the other two cap-head screws.


9. Repeat Step 2 to confirm alignment conformance.

10. Remove the lightbar alignment target from the transmissionlamp.

The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should besaved to a secure location. This procedure is described inSection 6.7.

6.4.3 Diff_Focus Alignment

Differential focus adjustment involves the precise setting of themain carriage to correct any alignment errors between the scanhead and the main carriage.

The procedure used depends on the type of carriage fitted:

• For a two wheel carriage, adjustment is made with thedifferential focus bar. This is located on the front of the maincarriage. It links the two wheel assemblies (see Figure 6.6).

• For a one-wheel carriage, adjustment is made with theadjusting screw mounted on the carriage-wheel mounting (seeFigure 6.7).

For both types the Engineer’s Calibration Chart, which includesthe Differential Focus Targets, must be mounted on the platen.See Figure 6.5.



DIFFERENTIALFOCUS TARGETS

Figure 6.5 Engineer’s Calibration Chart on platen

The following preparations must be made before adjusting thispart of the scanner.

1. Open the lid.

2. Place the Engineer’s Calibration Chart on the platen (seeFigure 6.5).

3. Close the lid.

Adjustment Procedure for Two-wheel Carriage

1. Access the diff_focus test program. e.g. setup/carriage

2. Run the diff_focus test.

3. Read and note the test result (maximum error permittedis 2.5).

4. Access the mech/service menu.

5. Run the camera_service program to position the maincarriage at the left-hand end (reverse) its traverse range.



6. Operate the standby switch to isolate power to the scanner.



WARNING

Do not override the safety interlocks.


CAUTION

The differential focus bar must notbe adjusted while the nut clamp plateis still tight on the main leadscrew.

10. Release the main leadscrew-nut clamp-plate (seeSection 4.19.1).

11. Release locking grub-screw in each wheel pivot nut.

12. Adjust the differential bar, by the number of turns reported inStep 3 (Figure 6.6).

Note: One full turn of the differential focus bar is equal to1 mrad. A clockwise direction makes the reading morenegative and a counterclockwise direction makes thereading more positive.



MOREPOSITIVE

MORENEGATIVE

LOCKINGGRUB-SCREW

Figure 6.6 Differential focus bar

13. Lock the locking grub screws in each wheel pivot nut.

14. Lock the main leadscrew nut clamp-plate (seeSection 4.19.1).

Note: The clamp screw should be tightened one full turnbeyond the point when the thread was first engaged.

15. Re-fit the light-table assembly (see Section 4.16).



18. Close the lid.

19. Operate the standby switch to power up the scanner.

20. Note any logged reports about the module status.

21. Run mech/carriage test to ensure that no problems have beenintroduced.

22. Repeat Steps 1. to 20. until the diff_focus errors have beenminimized.

23. Remove the engineer’s calibration chart from the platen.



Adjustment Procedure for One-wheel Carriage

1. Access the diff_focus test program. e.g. setup/carriage

2. Run the diff_focus test.

3. Read and note the test result (maximum error permittedis 2.5).

4. Access the mech/service menu.

5. Run the camera_service program to position the maincarriage at the left-hand end (reverse) its traverse range.

6. Operate the standby switch to isolate power to the scanner.



WARNING

Do not override the safety interlocks.


CAUTION

The adjusting screw must not beadjusted while the nut clamp plate isstill tight on the main leadscrew.

10. Release the main leadscrew-nut clamp-plate (seeSection 4.19.1).

11. Release lock nut on the adjusting screw.

12. Turn the adjusting screw by the number of turns reported inStep 3 (see Figure 6.7).



Note: One full turn of the adjusting screw is equal to1 mrad. A clockwise direction makes the reading morenegative and a counterclockwise direction makes thereading more positive.

MOREPOSITIVE

MORENEGATIVE

ADJUSTINGSCREW

Figure 6.7 Adjusting screw

13. Tighten the lock nut on the adjusting screw.



14. Lock the main leadscrew nut clamp-plate (seeSection 4.19.1).

Note: The clamp screw should be tightened one full turnbeyond the point when the thread was first engaged.

15. Re-fit the light-table assembly (see Section 4.16).



18. Close the lid.

19. Operate the standby switch to power up the scanner.

20. Note any logged reports about the module status.

21. Run mech/carriage test to ensure that no problems have beenintroduced.

22. Repeat Steps 1. to 20. until the diff_focus errors have beenminimized.

23. Remove the engineer’s calibration chart from the platen.




6.5 System Calibration

6.5.1 Calibrate Menu Introduction

System diagnostics and alignment procedures must be completebefore any calibration process is performed.

The platen area must be clean, the lightbar fitted, the systemcalibration test target positioned correctly, and the lid closed.

Note: If a test result fails, re-check the target for cleanliness,scratches and its placement on the platen. Also check thatthe platen, transmission white-balance area and mirrorare clean.

This software consists of procedures to calibrate the followingitems:

• Carriage and X-slide datum.

• Enlargement focus positions, and chromatic aberration.

Note: These position calibrations are dependent oncompletion of the carriage and X-slide datumcalibrations.

• Start of scan offsets.

Note: These offset calibrations are dependent on completionof the focus and enlargment calibrations.

• Bad (CCD) pixel mapping.

• Copy-holder registration-edges calibration.

Note: The calibration of the registration edges is dependentupon completion of the enlargement and focuscalibration.

Each procedure writes its findings to the system calibration log.

Invoking all will automatically run the complete calibrationprocesses sequentially except for the copyholder registration(which requires the engineer’s calibration chart to be removedfrom the platen) and bad-pixel mapping.



Calibrate Tests Menu Path

Main/Setup/calibrate

Table 6.3 Calibrate tests

Status

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

User Exec

No

User Exec

User Exec

Remote

Remote

Remote

No

No

No

User Exec

Test Name

carriage

xslide

enlargement

offsets

all

bad_pix

max_bad

add_bad

remove_bad

copyholder

copy_enable

copy_disable

cal_ccd

pos_coeffs

neg_coeffs

wafer size

Test No.

67

69

68

70

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Description

Main carriage datum position calibrated

X-slide carriage datum position calibrated.

Datum positions for the lens mount and ccdmount are calibrated

Start-of-scan offsets calibrated.

All of the above tests are composited into anautomatic calibration program.

Bad pixels identified and mapped forelimination

For Factory use only

Manually add a specified pixel to the bad pixelmap. For factory use only.

Manually remove a specified pixel from thebad pixel map. For factory use only.

Sets the position of the registration bars. Canalso be performed from the Calibrate top-levelApplication Diagnostics menu, seeSection 6.5.9.

Enables a search for copyholders each timethe scanner lid is closed. Can also beperformed from the Calibrate top-levelApplication Diagnostics menu, seeSection 6.5.10.

As copy_enable but disables the search.




Specifies the CCDs wafer size. Seeinformation below.

Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the safety interlocks areactivated.

CCD data is stored in FLASH. The wafer size depends on thetype of CCD in use and must be setup accordingly:

• 4 inch wafer CCDs:wafer_size must be set to 4,



• 6 inch wafer CCDs:wafer_size must be set to 6.System software Version 1.2 or higher is required to support6 inch CCDs.

If a field replacement of the system board, system board PROMsor the X-slide carriage is performed, or new firmware is installed,the CCD settings are affected as follows:

• If new firmware is downloaded and this is the only change,then there is no need to set up the CCD parameters as theywill remain unchanged.

• If new PROMs are fitted or the system board or X-slidecarriage are replaced, then the data must be updated asdescribed in the appropriate replacement procedures.

6.5.2 System Calibration Target Areas

These target areas are included in the engineer’s calibration chartas shown in Figure 6.1.

The chart is placed on the platen at the right-hand edge of theglass abutting to the transmission white-balance area as shown inFigure 6.8.

6.5.3 Main Carriage Datum

This procedure determines the position of the main-carriagedatum sensors.

Procedure

1. Type carriage at the cursor position.

2. Press [Return] .



3. Wait for the result of the calibration procedure.

SYSTEM CALIBRATION TARGET

MAGNIFICATIONBARS

ZIG-ZAG STRIP

Figure 6.8 Placement of Engineer’s Calibration Chart

The calibration is now complete. The calibration data, which is inthe Flash memory, should be saved to a secure location. Thisprocedure is described in Section 6.7.

6.5.4 X-slide Carriage Datum

This procedure determines the position of the X-slide datumsensor.

Procedure

1. Type xslide at the cursor position.

2. Press [Return] .





6.5.5 Enlargement & Focus Calibration

This procedure builds a table of chromatic aberration,enlargement-motor position, and default focus-motor position foreach supported optical resolution.

Note: This calibration procedure will take about 30 minutes tocomplete.

Procedure

1. Type enlargement at the cursor position.

2. Press [Return] .



6.5.6 Start of Scan Offsets

This procedure builds a table of (x,y) positioning errors for eachsupported optical resolution at a number of X-slide carriagepositions.

Procedure

1. Type offsets at the cursor position.



2. Press [Return] .



6.5.7 Bad (CCD) Pixel Elimination

Some pixels perform worse than others. This procedure detectsthose bad pixels which must be eliminated to diminish their effecton the quality of the scan.

Note: It is not recommended that this procedure is used whenreplacing the X-slide carriage. Factory-determinedbad-pixel location data will be supplied on a floppy diskwhich comes with the carriage.

Procedure

1. Type ccd at the cursor position.

2. Press [Return] .



6.5.8 All

This procedure, with the exception of the copyholder registrationedge calibration procedure, will sequentially process each of theother calibration procedures.

Note: Do not use this procedure unless the engineer’scalibration chart is available.



Procedure

1. Type all at the cursor position.

2. Press [Return] .



6.5.9 Registration Bar Calibration

This calibration procedure is only required for installations wherecopymounts or copyholders are to be used.

SHORT REGISTRATION BAR

C-SCAN LONG REGISTRATION BAR

FOR USE WITH COPYHOLDERS

EARLY C-SCANLONG REGISTRATION BAR

DO NOT USE FOR THISCALIBRATION

Figure 6.9 Registration bars

1. Position the registration bars on the platen, locating the lugson the base of the bars in the holes provided. Ensure that thearea underneath the window in the short registration bar isclean. See the following drawing.



WINDOW

Figure 6.10 Fitting registration bars to platen

2. To take up the free play in locating holes, push the barsoutwards from the platen centre, in the direction of the arrowsas shown above.

3. Close the top lid.

4. Locate the Diagnostics application in the C-scan / C-scanPlus folder and double-click it to start the launch.



5. Open the Diagnostics folder.

6. Open the Mac folder and select Diagnostics . TheDiagnostics application opens.

7. From the Calibrate menu, choose Run .

8. The Scanner Calibrations windows appears. Click theCalibrate option to expand the display.



9. Select the copyholder option. Note that you cannot use theSelect button to select this option, you must click the menuentry, copyholder .

10. Click OK to complete the selection.

11. The Scanner Calibration window appears. If the scanner isnot already selected, select the Scanner on ID.... box for thescanner to be calibrated.

12. Click the Clapper Board icon to start the calibration.



During the calibration the message next to the selectedscanner displays Running . When completed successfully themessage displays Passed .

If the calibration fails:

a) Clean the area of the platen under the window in the shortregister bar. Also check that the window area isunobstructed.

b) Check that the register bars are correctly installed.

c) Repeat the calibration by clicking the Clapper Board icon.

d) If the calibration fails again, contact your vendor.

13. When the procedure is successfully completed, click the Handicon to close the window.

14. Quit the Diagnostics application. The scanner will rebootautomatically.




6.5.10 Copyholder Search Enable/Disable

When using copyholders it is necessary to perform a search forcopyholders mounted on the platen. This search is performedeach time the scanner lid is closed. If copyholders are not usedthere is no reason for this scan and the search function can bedisabled.

The function can be switched from the Terminal Diagnostics orfrom the top-level menu of the Application Diagnostics.

To enable or disable copyholders using the ApplicationDiagnostics, follow the procedure described in the previoussection, but when the test selection is made choose copy_enableor copy_disable , as required.

Note that the scanner will not respond to the change in statusuntil it has been rebooted.



6.6 C-dot SP Calibrations

If the customer intends using C-dot SP to process C-dot imagescaptured on a C-550 Lanovia scanner it will be necessary toperform two sharpness calibration procedures, using the C-dotScanner Calibration Target. The purpose of these calibrations isto ensure that the sharpness of images captured is uniform acrossthe X-direction width of the scanner. The calibrations are run atresolutions of 36 lines/mm and 45 lines/mm. See Sections 6.6.1and 6.6.2.

You also need to perform the swathe-scanning calibrationprocedure. This procedure ensures accurate stitching of imageswhen the image width exceeds 220 mm. See Section 6.6.3.

6.6.1 C-dot Platen Calibration for Sharpness at36 Lines/mm

Note: This calibration is required once only unless certainreplacements have been performed. It will be necessary torepeat the calibration if the camera is replaced. It willalso be necessary if the system board is replaced and thecalibration data has not been saved.

Before you start:

• Locate the test target. This is supplied in the upgrade pack.

• The scanner firmware must be Version 3.0 or later.

• The workstation diagnostics must be Version 3.2 or later.

• Ensure that the transmission lamp is warmed up for about5 minutes before the calibration is started.

To perform the calibration:

1. Locate the short registration bar on the platen.

2. Place the C-dot Scanner Calibration Target on the platen sothat it butts against the short registration bar. Ensure that thegrey panel covers the whole of the platen height.



C-DOTSCANNER

CALIBRATIONTARGET

BOTTOM

TOP

WH

ITE

BA

LAN

CE

AR

EA

SHORTREGISTRATIONBAR

Figure 6.11 C-dot scanner calibration target on platen

3. Place the A3 cover glass over the target. (If you attempt toperform this procedure without the short registration bar inplace, you must ensure that the cover glass and target do notcover the white balance area.)

4. Open the C-scan application folder on the Macintosh attachedto the scanner.




6. Open the Diagnostics application. The tool bar appears asshown below.

7. From the top-level Calibrate menu, choose Run .

The Scanner Calibrations window appears.

8. Click Copydot to select the copydot menu.



9. Click Scanner36 to select the option.

10. Click OK to display the Scanner Calibration window.



11. Ensure that the appropriate Scanner ID has been selected.Click the appropriate box if required.


13. Click the Stop icon to close the Scanner Calibration window.




6.6.2 C-dot Platen Calibration for Sharpness at45 Lines/mm

This procedure is identical to that described in the previoussection, except that you need to choose scanner45 from thecopydot menu in the Scanner calibrations window.

6.6.3 Swathe Scanning Calibration

Note: This calibration is required once only unless certainreplacements have been performed. It will be necessary torepeat the calibration if the camera is replaced or theX-slide datum calibration has been performed. It will alsobe necessary if the system board is replaced and thecalibration data has not been saved.

Before you start:

• Locate the test target. This is supplied in the upgrade pack.

• The scanner firmware must be Version 3.0 or later.

• The workstation diagnostics must be Version 3.2 or later.

• Ensure that the transmission lamp is warmed up for about5 minutes before the calibration is started.

To perform the calibration:

1. Locate the short registration bar on the platen.



2. Place the Swathe Scanning Calibration Target on the platen:

• ensure that the black lines are against the top and leftedges of the platen, just touching the black platensurround,

• ensure that the test target does not cover the transmissionwhite-balance area,

• also ensure that the text is right reading as viewed fromabove.

SWATHESCANNING

CALIBRATIONTARGET

SHORTREGISTRATIONBAR

BLACK LINES

Figure 6.12 Swathe scanning calibration target on platen

3. Place the A3 cover glass over the target. (If you attempt toperform this procedure without the short registration bar inplace, you must ensure that the cover glass and target do notcover the white balance area.)

4. Open the C-scan application folder on the Macintosh attachedto the scanner.





7. From the top-level Calibrate menu, choose Run .



The Scanner Calibrations window appears.

8. Click Copydot to select the copydot menu.

9. Click platen to select the option.



10. Click OK to display the Scanner Calibration window.

11. Ensure that the appropriate Scanner ID has been selected.Click the appropriate box if required.




During the calibration the message next to the selectedscanner displays Running . When completed successfully, themessage displays Passed .

If the calibration fails:

a) Check the position on the platen:

Are all the arrows just touching the edge of the platen andnot under or overlapping the platen edge?

Are both cross-hairs exactly 175 mm from the top edge ofthe platen? If the target is skewed the calibration will fail.

CROSS-HAIRS

175 mm

Figure 6.13 Swathe scanning calibration target on platen showingcross-hairs

b) Clean the area of the platen under the window in the shortregistration bar.

c) Check that this area is unobstructed by either the film orthe cover glass.

d) Check that the A3 cover glass is scrupulously clean,especially the area of glass covering the pattered area ofthe target.

e) Repeat the calibration by clicking the Clapper Board icon.



f) If the calibration fails again, contact your vendor.

13. Click the Stop icon to close the Scanner Calibration window.




6.7 Saving Calibration Data to a Secure LocationData from calibrations is held on the system board. Should thesystem board fail this data will be lost and the recovery time willbe delayed while all calibrations are repeated. To minimize theeffect of such a failure it is recommended that the calibration fileis copied to a secure location such as a Macintosh or a remotedisk.

1. Choose Read Buffer from the Buffers menu.

2. In the ‘Save As’ window, enter the name of the destinationfile, (cal file for example) and specify an appropriatedestination.



3. Click Save.

The Read Buffer window opens with Calibration selected bydefault in the Buffer ID menu.

4. Select the scanner, if not already selected.

5. Click the Clapper Board icon to start reading the buffer data.

The calibration file in the destination folder is updated.



6. Click the Stop icon to close the Read Buffers window.

7. Select Quit from the File menu to exit the diagnostics.

8. For added security it is recommended that if the calibrationfile was copied to the scanner Macintosh the file should alsobe copied to a floppy disk and stored in a safe place awayfrom the scanner.


7 WorkstationDiagnostics

This chapter provides descriptions and procedures for using theworkstation diagnostics.

7.1 IntroductionThe workstation diagnostics are used by both the customer andthe field service engineer.

Diagnostic operations are controlled by software loaded on aworkstation connected by a single-ended SCSI cable to the C-550Lanovia Scanner.

The workstation has integrated diagnostic software for many ofthe maintenance functions of the scanner.



7.2 Launching the Diagnostics Application

1. Open the C-scan application folder.





Up to seven scanner log boxes appear as shown below.

The diagnostic tests allow up to seven C-550 Lanoviascanners to be tested simultaneously. Each scanner log boxwill display the test results for each scanner whose SCSI IDappears in the window’s title bar. For example, Scanner 0 logbox will display the test results for the scanner whose SCSIID is 0.



7.3 Workstation Diagnostics Menus

You can select the following sub-menus from the top-level menu.

7.3.1 File Menu

Save As

Select this option to save and name a copy of the active scannerlog box. Use a non-default filename.

Print

Select this to print a selected log file.



Print Preview

Select this to display a selected log file in print-out format.

Print Setup

Selects a printer and printer connection.

Verbose

Select to obtain detailed error messages in the scanner log box.

Temperature Readings

Adds the scanner temperature reading to any error messagereceived from one of the diagnostics tests.

Clear Logs

Clears all text from all of the error logs. It also adds a time stampto each of the newly created files.

Quit

Select this to exit the C-550 Lanovia Workstation Diagnostics.



7.3.2 View menu

The View menu allows you to show or hide the toolbar and thestatus bar.

When selected, the Toolbar appears at the top of the screen. It hasicon buttons for most of the common diagnostics commands. Formore information on the Toolbar, see Section 7.4.

When selected, the Status bar appears at the bottom of the screen.It describes the purpose of a selected option and also how muchtime has elapsed during a test.

7.3.3 Window Menu

The Window menu offers the following commands, which enableyou to arrange multiple views of multiple documents in theapplication window.



Arrange Icons

This option has no effect in the Macintosh environment.

Scanner 0 - 6

The C-550 Lanovia Diagnostics displays a list of the scanner logwindows at the bottom of the Window menu.

A check mark appears in front of the document name of theactive window.

Choose a log from the list to make its window active.

7.3.4 Configuration Menu

The Configuration menu allows you to interrogate a scanner thatis connected to the SCSI bus.



Rescan

Select this option to make the system check all seven SCSIaddresses for the presence of a C-550 Lanovia scanner. [F9] onthe keyboard also selects this function.

Scanner 0 - 6

Each of the Scanner options access the following sub-menus:

Details

Obtains information about the scanner at this SCSI ID.



Carriage Positions

Locates the main carriage and scan head in certain pre-definedpositions.

• Park

This moves the main carriage to its right-hand (datum)position. (This is its normal position when not scanning.)This position is required when changing the reflection lamp.

• Camera service

This moves the main carriage to its left-hand position. Thisposition is required when changing the light-table lamp.

• Transit fixing

This moves the main carriage to its central position to allowfor the removal or replacement of certain transit fixings.



7.3.5 Buffers Menu

The scanner has a number of buffer areas that can be downloadedfrom, or uploaded to, the workstation.

The scanner application system code will require updating as newreleases are generated and issued to customers.

These updates are normally performed by the customer. Therelevant information for these activities is available in the User’sGuide.

However, there are other buffer areas of the system that may beneeded by the service engineer. These can be:

• uploaded from the system board to the workstation, or

• downloaded from the workstation to the system board.

Uploading/downloading operations are performed usingcommands available from the Buffers menu.

Load Code

Use this command to open the Download Code dialog box whichis used to download a new release of the scanner applicationsystem, or boot system, to the assigned place in the scanner’smemory. The software download procedure is described inSection 7.7.

Write Buffer

Use to open the Write Buffer dialog box. Refer to Section 7.3.6for details about the content of each type of SCSI buffer.



CAUTION

To maintain system integrity, someSCSI buffers cannot be overwrittenwith the Write Buffer command.

This option allows data such as the Calibration File to be writtento the scanner after the system board is replaced.

To write calibration data to a scanner:

1. Choose Write Buffer from the Buffers menu.

2. A directory dialog box appears which allows the selection ofthe file which is to be written to a scanner.



3. Click Open . The Write Buffer dialog box opens.

4. In the Write Buffer dialog box, check a box in the SelectedScanners display to select the destination scanner.

5. Choose the appropriate buffer identity (Calibration in thisexample) from the Buffer ID menu.

6. Click the Go button.

When the file has been written to the scanner a Completemessage will appear to the right of the selected checkbox inthe Selected Scanners display.

7. Exit by clicking the Stop tool button.



Read Buffer

Use to open the Read Buffer dialog box. Refer to Section 7.3.6for details about the content of each type of SCSI buffer.

This option allows data such as Calibration File data to be savedso that it can quickly be re-installed, when the system board isreplaced, for example. Unless Calibration data is saved before thesystem board is removed the data will be lost.

It is recommended that this data be saved to disk duringinstallation, as a security measure.

To save Calibration file data:

1. Choose Read Buffer from the Buffers menu.



Note: The destination of the Calibration file is selectedautomatically.

2. In the Save as box, enter a file name for the Calibration fileyou are to save. It is suggested that you use the namingconvention: # cal file .

3. Click Save. The Read Buffer dialog box opens.



4. Choose the Buffer data type from the Buffer ID menu,(Calibration in this case).

5. In the Selected Scanners display, check the box next to thethe scanner from which you are saving the the data.

6. Click the Go button.

When the file has been saved a Complete message willappear to the right of the selected checkbox in the SelectedScanners display.

7. Exit by clicking the Stop tool button.



It is recommended that this file is copied to floppy disk and thatthe disk stored in a safe place. The Calibration file will be foundin the C-scan 3.1 ⇒ Diagnostics ⇒ C-550 Lanovia ⇒ Macfolder. It can be read using BBEdit.

7.3.6 SCSI Buffers

The identities of the SCSI buffers are shown in Table 7.1.

Scanner Application System

Contains the scanning application and diagnostics system code.

The scanner application system buffer can be only updatedchoosing Load Code from the Buffers menu.

DRAM Area

Accesses the DRAM area on the system board.

Boot System

Runs the initial Power On Self-Tests (POSTs).

On a successful completion, the scanner application system isvalidated and if OK, is run.

The boot system exists, to allow SCSI downloads to take placeeven if there is no valid scanner application system in the flashmemory.



The scanner boot system buffer can be only updated using theLoad Code command from the Buffers menu.

Table 7.1 SCSI Buffer identities

Access

Read

-

Read/Write

Read

-

-

-

-

Read/Write

-

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

-

-

-

Read/Write

-

-

-

-

Read/Write

ID #

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Type

Binary

-

Binary

Binary

-

-

-

-

Text

-

Text

Text

Text

-

-

-

Text

-

-

-

-

Text

Location

Flash

-

DRAM

Flash

-

-

-

-

Flash

-

Flash

Flash

DRAM

-

-

-

Flash

-

-

-

-

Flash

Description

Scanner application system.

Not Used.

DRAM area.

Boot system.

Not Used.

Not Used.

Not Used.

Not Used.

Calibration data.

Reserved.

Scanner application system log.

Diagnostics FLASH log.

Diagnostics RAM log.

Not Used.

Not Used.

Not Used.

Scripts buffer.

Reserved.

Reserved.

Reserved.

Reserved.

Statistical data.

Calibration Data

Contains all data generated from running the calibrationprocedures described in Chapter 6.

The data can be read using a simple text editor, such as simpletext (Macintosh), or Notepad (PC).



Note: This must be saved on installation to store on theMacintosh and a floppy disk, as it will be required if thesystem board is changed.

CAUTION

Corrupting the calibration data willseriously affect the scanner’s abilityto work to its specification.

Scanner Application System Log

Information on all detected errors, or system crashes, can befound in this buffer.

This information can be uploaded to the workstation for off-lineanalysis.

The data can be read using a simple text editor.

Diagnostics FLASH Log

During terminal diagnostics, the output can be directed to aFLASH log using the flog command.



Diagnostics RAM Log

During terminal diagnostics, the output can be directed to a RAMlog using the rlog command.





Scripts Buffer

This buffer contains all system scripts. Scripts are used tocombine individual tests into a composite test to more fullyexercise the scanner.

As an alternative to generating scripts directly on the scannerscripts can be uploaded to the workstation, edited, anddownloaded back to the scanner for execution.


CAUTION

When creating scripts, avoid usingthe name STARTUP. The startupscript, if present, is run as part of thescanner application systempower-up sequence.

Statistical Data

Contains statistical information about the system.

This data can be uploaded to the workstation for future analysis.



7.3.7 Tests Menu

The Tests menu allows you to select either the diagnostic tests,the electronic repro tests, or soak tests.

Diagnostic Tests (Ctrl+T)

Use to run the available tests on the specified scanner.

• Run:

This opens the Diagnostic Tests dialogue box which allowsyou to select the scanner(s), connected to the SCSI bus, onwhich to run the diagnostic tests. The use of the Run functionis described in Section 7.5.

• Select:

This option allows specific tests to be selected from the elec ,mech and optics menus.

Choose the Diagnostic Tests to run on the scanner.

• Fast Keys:

This opens the Fast Keys dialogue box.



The Fast Keys dialogue box allows you to run a user definedsuite of tests by simply pressing the appropriate function key.

You select the diagnostic tests you want performed in theDiagnostic Tests dialogue box in Select mode, click Save toopen the Fast Keys dialogue box, click an F key tab whichcan be either [F5] , [F6] , [F7] or [F8] , enter a description in theblank field to identify the tests, and click OK.

To view a suite of tests allocated to a Function key, click theF key tab and click Tests . The Diagnostic Tests dialogue boxappears showing the enabled and the disabled tests.

Default [F5] settings select a suitable range of customer testswhich are needed to prove the functionality of the scanner.



Electronic Repro (Ctrl+R)

Use to run the available tests on the specified scanner(s).

• Run :

This opens the Repro Tests dialogue box which allows you torun the Electronic Repro tests. For more information onrunning Repro Tests, see Section 7.6.

• Display :

This displays the Display Image dialogue box which allowsyou to locate and display the electronic repro test imagewhich you have scanned on the C-550 Lanovia scanner.



Use to get a simple view of the image on disk, by clicking themouse button.

• Disk Image :

This is a toggle option. Select this option if you want to viewthe results from the previous Electronic Repro Test.

• Limits :

Shows the installed limits for the electronic repro test. Inreleased software this will always show Customer Settingsas being selected and cannot be changed.

Soak Tests (Ctrl+S)

Selecting Soak ⇒ Run displays the Soak Tests dialogue box.This allows you to select the scanner(s), connected to the SCSIbus, on which to run tests which include both Diagnostic andElectronic Repro tests.



The Calib. Slide box must be unchecked when performingElectronic Repro tests using the Repro Test transparency butchecked when using the Engineer’s Calibration Chart, otherwisethe wrong area of the platen will be scanned.

7.3.8 Calibrate Menu

The Calibrate option allows the location of register bars on theplaten to be set up and the copyholder search function to beenabled or disabled. These functions are described inSections 6.5.9 and 6.5.10 respectively. C-dot calibrations are also



accessed from this menu. These procedures are described inSection 6.6.



7.4 Tool Bar Buttons

Click on this to open the Print dialogue box. The Print dialoguebox is also opened by selecting Print from the File menu.

Click to toggle Verbose on or off.

Click to toggle temperature readings in the Scanner Log on oroff.

Click on this to open the Diagnostic Tests dialogue box.

Click on this to open the Repro Tests dialogue box.

Click on this icon to open the Soak Tests dialogue box.

Clicking on this icon opens a file selection menu which allows aCode file to be selected for downloading to the scanner. Thisprocedure is described in Section 7.7. Incorrect use could makethe scanner inoperable and require a service visit.

Click on this icon to display the copyright notice and versionnumber of your C-550 Lanovia diagnostics.

Click on this icon if you want information to be displayed about afunction. The cursor changes to an arrow and a question mark.When you move the cursor to a function and click, a Helpwindow opens containing information about the function.Double-click on this icon to display information about thisfunction.



7.5 Diagnostic TestsSelect Diagnostic Tests - Run in the Tests menu.

The Diagnostic Tests dialogue box appears.

Check the box next to the scanner on which you want to run thetests.

Double click anywhere on the background of the DiagnosticsTests window to put a marker in the Log box.



Press [F5] to select a range of customer tests which will prove thefunctionality of the scanner. The Tests slider gives an indicationof the number of tests selected.

Specify the number of times you want the tests to be repeated bytyping a value in the Loop 0 of field. You can enter a value up to999.

If you do not want the tests to stop when an error occurs, uncheckStop on Error .

To start the tests, click:

To stop the tests at any time, click:

A slider moves to the right as the tests progress, status messagesappear in the Selected Scanners panel next to the selected



scanner, and the name of the current test being performed appearsbelow the slider.

It takes approximately thirty minutes to perform all of thediagnostic tests.

If any errors occur, messages appear in the scanner log box.

To remove the error messages in a scanner log box, double-clickwithin the scanner log box to display the following confirmationbox.

Click Yes to remove all error messages in the scanner log box.



7.6 Electronic Repro TestsThe Electronic Repro set of tests are used to validate scanningperformance.

Before proceeding with the Electronic Repro tests, ensure that thecondition of the scanner has been set up correctly:

• Perform the electronic, mechanical and optical tests,described in Chapter 5, and obtain a pass result.

• Then, perform the relevant alignment procedures, describedin Chapter 6.

The tests check a number of parameters to ensure that the:

• rotation mechanism and defined resolutions are accurate,

• degree of chromatic aberration, flare and jitter are acceptable,

• and the image signal levels, coming from the camera head,are consistent and accurate.

If a Electronic Repro test fails, then performance of the TerminalDiagnostic tests will be necessary to establish the correctionstrategy. (See Chapter 5.)

7.6.1 Electronic Repro Test Subjects

The Electronic Repro tests require a test subject to be mounted onthe platen. The subject is provided in two forms:

• The Electronic Repro Transparency is designed specificallyfor the Electronic Repro test (see Figure 7.1). It is to be leftwith the customer after installation so that they can performElectronic Repro tests as described in the User’s Guide.

• The Engineer’s Calibration Chart is a multi-function testsubject which includes the Electronic Repro test subject (SeeFigure 7.2).



Electronic Repro TargetPart No. 7542–0150–02

Figure 7.1 Electronic Repro Transparency

ELECTRONIC REPROTEST SUBJECT

Figure 7.2 Engineer’s Calibration Chart



CAUTION

The test subject must be clean andundamaged. Dirty or damaged(scratched emulsion) subjects maycause the tests to fail.

7.6.2 Positioning the Electronic Repro Test Subject

1. Open the lid.

2. Make sure the lightbar is fitted.

3. Make sure the platen area is clean.

4. Fit the short registration edge to the platen.

5. Place the test subject on the platen:

• The text must be right reading as viewed from above.

• The arrow heads must point towards the top edge of theplaten.

• The film must be positioned against the registration edge.

• The arrow heads on the film must be aligned with the topedge of the platen glass.

Fujifilm Electronic Imaging LtdPart No. 7542–0150–02

EDGE OF GLASS PLATEN



CAUTION

The Electronic Repro Testtransparency must be positionedcorrectly. If not it will cause the teststo fail.



ÄÄÄÄ

REPRO TEST TRANSPARENCY

REGISTRATIONEDGETOP EDGE

OF PLATENGLASS TEXT: RIGHT

READING ASVIEWED FROM

ABOVEARROWSPOINTING

TOWARDS TOPOF PLATEN

TOP EDGEOF PLATEN

GLASS

ENGINEER’S CALIBRATION CHART

If the test transparency is not positioned and orientatedcorrectly the test will fail.

6. Close the top lid.



7.6.3 Electronic Repro Procedure

1. Run the workstation diagnostics (See Chapter 7).

2. From the Tests menu, ensure that Verbose is selected.

3. From the Tests menu, select Electronic Repro ⇒ Run .

4. If the large Engineering Calibration Chart is used, check theCalib. Slide box. If the Electronic Repro Transparency isbeing used, ensure that the Calib. Slide box is unchecked.

5. Select the appropriate scanner number from those madeavailable in dialog box.

6. Click on the Go icon.



7. Wait while the progress bar reaches its endpoint.

Note: This is at the end of the image scan.

8. Wait while the tests are being performed on the electronicrepro image.

9. Read the test result. If the result is Passed , the test has beencompleted successfully.

If the result is Failed , look in the Scanner Log for the reasonthen do the following:

a) Examine the image (repro[scsi id].tif) by selectingElectronic Repro ⇒ Display then opening the imagefrom the directory which appears. The image is located inthe C-scan ⇒ Diagnostics ⇒ C-550 Lanovia ⇒ Macfolder. Ensure that TIFF files are displayed by selectingTIFF Files from the List Files of Type menu.

The image should show six, thick, grey lines withdiagonal lines between (see below). If no image appears,check that you positioned the image correctly on theplaten as described in Section 7.6.2.

Figure 7.3 Electronic repro image

b) Repeat Steps 1 to 3.

c) If the tests fail again, ensure that the Calib. Slidecheckbox has the correct selection and change as required,see Step 4. If this was correct, double-click the icon

to display the Scan Details window and ensure that theSlow and Fast Offsets have not been altered. They shouldbe set as follows:



Electronic Repro Transparency Engineer’s Calibration Chart

Slow Offset 50 240

Fast Offset 35 35

If the selection or the parameters were incorrectly set,repeat Steps 1 to 3.

d) Run the Diagnostics tests, see Section 7.5.

e) Remove the electronic repro slide.

f) Perform the required alignment procedures (refer toSection 6.4.2 for lightbar, or Section 6.4.3 for differentialfocus).

g) Repeat Steps 1 to 8 of this section.




7.7 Downloading Firmware to the ScannerThis procedure is required when new firmware has been supplied.It is not required as a part of the installation procedure asfirmware is loaded before delivery of the scanner.

1. Launch user diagnostics as described in Section 7.2.

2. Click on Download tool button.

The file selection window opens.

3. From the file directory, find the C-scan3.1 folder (or laterlevel) then select Diagnostics ⇒ C-550 Lanovia ⇒ V1.2 (orlater level)⇒ Appl .



4. Unless already selected, select Binary Files from the ListFiles of Type menu.

5. Highlight mrscan.bin and click Open .

The Download Code window appears.



6. Select the scanner you want to download the firmware to.

7. Set File type to Flash if required. Note that Flash is selectedby default.



8. Click the Go tool button.

A slider moves to the right while the firmware data isdownloading.

9. When the firmware has downloaded, the scannerautomatically reboots. Note that this can take up to threeminutes.



When the scanner has re-booted, Complete appears.



10. Unless you have to download a new bootstrap program, exitby clicking the Stop tool button.

11. If a new bootstrap program is required to be downloaded, usethe top menu to move back up to the v1_nn directory,highlight boot and click Open .



12. Select S record files from the List Files of Type menu.

13. Highlight mrscan.hex and click Open .



The Download Code window appears.

14. Select the scanner required and select the Boot radio button.Note that the Flash button is selected by default.



15. Click the Go icon. The sequence of events is the same as fordownloading the scanner firmware.

Note that if the Boot button is not selected, a SCSI CheckCondition error message appears. If this message appears,click OK. Failed appears next to the selected scanner box.Ensure the Boot button is selected and repeat the aboveprocedure for downloading the bootstrap program.


8 Maintenance

This chapter provides a general description of the maintenanceprocedures for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner.

8.1 IntroductionThe scanner has been designed with a minimum level ofnecessary maintenance. For example, the leadscrews do not needany form of lubrication.

However, all equipment undergoes a change in performance overtime and the produced images can be below an acceptablestandard because the optical components have collected dust/dirton their surfaces.

It is important to follow all applicable safety and healthinstructions, and to remove rings from fingers when cleaningaround the underside of the platen.

8.1.1 Maintenance and Service

Normally, regular maintenance will be carried out by thecustomer (refer to C-550 Lanovia Scanner User’s Guide).Maintenance is quick and easy to carry out.

Service visits shall occur only when a modular unit is required tobe replaced by another unit. Servicing and maintenance visitsrequire the use of tools listed in Section 4.1.

Certain diagnostic tests are accessible from the host workstation(see Chapter 7). Terminal diagnostic tests (see Chapter 5) areonly available via the RS232 diagnostic port on the side of theRFI box.

Maintenance


Field adjustments and alignments should be performed as part ofthe replacement procedure of certain components. Appendix Aprovides the important electrical reference data and Appendix Bprovides some guidance on fault diagnosis.

When required, the appropriate calibration procedures (seeChapter 6) should be performed after receiving no fault messagesfrom the diagnostic procedures.

Any software or firmware upgrades or fixes shall be installed bythe customer, using workstation software.

The final quality assurance test is the electronic repro test (seeSection 7.6).

8.2 Safety Interlock Checks

Remove the RFI box cover and identify the two large interlockrelays on the system board. These relays have an aperture in thetop cover. This aperture shows red when the relay is energized.

With the main and standby switches On, the safety interlocks aremeant to operate when the following conditions exist:

• With the lightbar fitted, the left-hand relay must be energizedwhen the lid is closed and de-energized when the lid is open.

• With the lightbar removed, the left-hand relay must beenergized when the lid is open.

Note: If the relay is not energized, reset the protrusion heightof the lid interlocks (see Section 4.13.2).

• With the lightbar removed, and the main cover open, bothrelays must be de-energized. With the main cover closed, theright-hand relay must be energized.

Note: If the relay is not energized, reset the protrusion heightof the main cover interlocks (see Section 4.13.1).

Maintenance


8.3 Cleaning ProceduresThe optical components need cleaning no more than once peryear. The environment for the scanner is defined as a Class Menvironment by BS5295 Part 1 1989.

8.3.1 Handling and Cleaning of Optical Components

Customer service engineers must understand the health and safetyconditions for the techniques and materials to be used in thecleaning of optical components.

The procedures, and use of approved materials and substances,for handling and cleaning optical components must minimize therisk of damage.

Recommended List of Tools

The following tools items will be required for cleaning the opticalcomponents that are located in the scanner.

• Protrusion height ruler,

• Latex disposable gloves,

• Squeeze bulb - without brush,

• Repro wipes,

• Cotton buds without plastic stems,

• Sable brush,

• Glass polishing cloth,

• System calibration target,

• Electronic repro slide,

• Selvyt cloth.

Maintenance


Approved Materials

Approved materials and handling tools must be available for thecleaning operations before starting work.

The following cleaning agents are recommended:

• KAMI DC2001 - for removing tape adhesive from the topsideof the platen.

• NILCO glass cleaner - for removing dirt from the platen.

• Iso-propyl alcohol (IPA) - for use on the CCD-window, butshould not be extensively used.

• Liquid paraffin (transparency mounting oil) - for cleaningscratched surfaces, but should not be extensively used.

CAUTION

Any cleaning, or handlingoperation, of a delicate opticalcomponent like a coated platen,mirror, lens, or CCD-window carriesa risk of causing damage to thecomponent.

Policy

Cleaning and handling procedures are both capable of inflictingdamage on a delicate optical surface. Handling procedures mustnot be designed to only prevent direct damage, they must alsoprevent contamination which will need to be cleaned off later,risking further damage. Touching critical surfaces must beavoided.

Packaging of optical components must ensure the minimumhandling necessary when removing or unwrapping thecomponent. This is just as important to the service engineer whomay need to return the camera head sub-assembly to the factory.

Maintenance


The overriding advice is Don’t clean unless you have to. It isonly necessary to clean a surface if there is reason to think thatthe contamination is absorbing or scattering light.

Clean according to the advised procedures, having regard to thematerials of the component and the nature of the contamination.

This risk can be minimized by using:

• handling procedures which avoid contamination by dust,fingermarks etc.,

• cleaning glass and coated surfaces only when this isnecessary, not as a routine operation,

• defined cleaning procedures for all delicate components,using materials and techniques which minimize the risk ofdamage.

Visual Inspection

The following are guideline procedures for general use:

• Look at the optical component surface against a matt blackbackground.

• Obliquely illuminate the optical component from either thefront or rear.

Visual inspection may optionally use a low power (x3) magnifierlens. Contamination will be seen as dust particles, smears orstreaks, or as a uniform grime coating. Often, this test can bedone in-situ, by inserting a matt black card on the opposite sideof the component and illuminating the optical face with a torch.

There is no definitive specification of when a lens needs to becleaned. When there are no image defects (see Appendix B) inthe output results, don’t clean an optical component just becauseit looks dirty.

Maintenance


Cleaning Processes

The procedure to be adopted in cleaning an optical componentdepends on:

• the nature of the contamination,

• the material of the component - glass, plastic, metal etc.,

• whether the component is loose or mounted.

Dry dust adhering to an optical surface can be difficult to remove.A puff of air from a squeeze bulb will dislodge and re-distributeloose dust. Dusting with a dry brush or wiping with a lint-freecloth will only re-distribute the dust, and may add more if thebrush is already contaminated from previous dusting operations.

Dust is best removed by wiping the optical component with arecommended solvent followed by gently drying it with a cleanrepro wipe.

A coated platen, mounted in a metal housing, is difficult to cleanby any of the above methods. Dry cleaning with a soft cloth onlyre-distributes the dust and the platen coating may becomescratched in the process.

One method of cleaning dust, is to take a clean lens tissue, or arepro wipe and form it into a loose swab. Then, dampen the swabwith the approved cleaner (do not use acetone anywhere in thesystem), and gently wipe it over the surface. Finally, take a drylens tissue and repeat the process, but in a different direction.Repeat this process until no smudges or particles can be seenwhen being visually inspected.

8.3.2 Cleaning Preparations and Completions





Maintenance


4. Prepare solutions and tools for use (see Section 4.1).

5. Remove rings from fingers and put on a new pair of latexgloves.

6. Perform the necessary cleaning procedures.

7. On completion re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16).


9. Perform the scanner health (confidence) check (see Section8.4).

MIRROR

CCD-WINDOW

LENS

PLATEN

BAFFLE

Figure 8.1 Optical components

8.3.3 Platen Cleaning Procedures

CAUTION

Do not use IPA to Clean the platensurfaces. Use only the recommendedsolvents.

Maintenance


Topside Procedure

1. Use a clean repro wipe, dampened with Kami DC2001, toremove local areas of tape adhesive.

2. Use a clean repro wipe, dampened with Nilco cleaner, toclean the topside of the platen.

3. Use a Selvyt cloth to polish the platen surface.

Underside Procedure

Note: Both sides of the glass have a special anti-reflectivecoating which is vital to the performance of the scanningoperation. Ordinary glass does not produce the requiredscan results.

CAUTION

Normally, the following procedureshould not be required. If it isnecessary, then do not attempt toremove the platen. Any disturbancewill affect the calibration profile.

Note: The light table should have been removed during thecleaning preparation procedure (see Section 8.3.2).

1. Visually inspect the under-surface of the platen for deposits ofdust or dirt.

Note: If the under-surface is reasonably clean do notperform any cleaning procedure.

2. Mechanically, move the main carriage to the right-hand end(Park) position (see Section 4.12.3).

3. Use a repro wipe, dampened with Nilco, to clean the left-halfof the under-surface.

Maintenance


4. Use a repro wipe to dry the under-surface of the left-handside.

5. Mechanically, move the main carriage to the left-hand end(Camera service ) position.

6. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the right-half of the under-surface.

8.3.4 Mirror Cleaning Procedure

1. Visually inspect the surface of the mirror for deposits of dustor dirt.

Note: If the surface is reasonably clean do not perform anycleaning procedure.

2. Use the squeeze bulb to blow away any loose dust or dirt andrepeat Step 1.

3. Use a lens tissue, dampened with IPA, to gently clean thesurface of the mirror.

Note: Do not wipe the surface aggressively as this actioncould cause more damage.

8.3.5 Lens Cleaning Procedure

1. Visually inspect the surface of the lens for deposits of dust ordirt.


2. Use a lens tissue, soaked in IPA, to gently clean the surface ofthe lens.

Note: Do not use cotton buds which have sharp pointedplastic stems.

Maintenance


8.3.6 CCD-Window Cleaning Procedure

Note: This procedure cannot be performed while the CCD imagesensor baffle is fitted. However, in the event of anyaccidental contact with the CCD-window, while theenlargement sensor is being replaced, use this cleaningprocedure.

1. Visually inspect the surface of the CCD-window for depositsof dust or fingerprints.


2. Use a lens tissue, dampened with IPA, to clean the surface ofthe CCD-window.

Maintenance


8.4 Scanner Health (Confidence) CheckThis confidence check is performed to satisfy the customer thatthe scanner is performing according to the set parameters.

The following procedures must be carried out:

Note: If any of the following procedures fail, perform thenecessary fault diagnosis (see Appendix B) and replacethe appropriate units (see Chapter 4) before trying again.

1. Perform the cleaning procedures (see Section 8.3).

2. Check the enclosure fan filter (see Section 4.8)

3. Perform a full range of diagnostic tests (see Section 5.3).

4. Perform the full range of calibration tests (see Section 6.5).


Maintenance


A

A-1Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800002

ElectricalReference Data

This appendix shows the locations of the electrical modules andtheir LEDs, fuses, connectors, test points, relays, links, andswitches for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner.

A.1 Module Locations

The electrical modules shown (see Figure A.1) are as follows:

• Power Supply Unit (PSU) (see Figure A.1 and Figure A.3),

• System Board (inside RFI Box) (see Figure A.1 andFigure A.3),

• CCD Headboard (see Figure A.1 and Figure A.3),

• Digitizer Board (see Figure A.1 and Figure A.3),

• Lamp Driver Board (see Figure A.1 and Figure A.5),

• Lamp Detector Boards (3 off) (see Figure A.3 andFigure A.5),

• RH Distribution Board. (see Figure A.4),

• LH Distribution Board (see Figure A.4),

• Display Board (see Figure A.4),

• Flexicable Distribution Boards (see Figure A.2 andFigure A.4),

• 50-way Flexicable Loom (see Figure A.2),

• 62-way Flexicable Loom (see Figure A.2).

Electrical Reference Data

A-2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner

DIGITIZERBOARD


BOARD

DETECTORBOARDS

RHDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

SYSTEMBOARD

PSU

MAINSWITCH

RFI BOXREFER TO Figure A.2FOR FLEXICABLES

STANDBYSWITCH

VIEWEDFROM FRONT

LHDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

DISPLAYBOARD

LAMP

Figure A.1 Electrical module locations



A.1.1 Flexicable Looms

VIEWEDFROM REAR

DIGITIZERCONNECTOR

X-SLIDEDISTRIBUTION

BOARD


BOARD

LAMP DRIVERCONNECTOR 50-WAY

FLEXICABLE

62-WAYFLEXICABLE

RFI BOX

MAIN CARRIAGEMOTION

X-SLIDE MOTION

DIGITIZERRFI COVER

Figure A.2 Arrangement of flexicables



DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

(RH)

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

(LH)

DISPLAYBOARD


BOARD

X-SLIDEDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

DIGITIZERBOARD

CCDHEADBOARD

LAMPDRIVERBOARD

LAMPDETECTOR

BOARDS(x3)

ÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

MAINCARRIAGE

MOTOR

DIGITIZERFAN

FOCUSSTEPPERMOTOR

ENLARGEMENTSTEPPERMOTOR

ENLARGEMENTDATUM

SENSOR

PL1 PL6

PL1

SK1

SK2

PL3 PL2

PL4

PL1 SK2 SK3 SK4

SK5

SW1

PL3PL2

RS232DIAGNOSTICS

SCSIADDRESS

SCSI &TERMINATORCONNECTORS

RFI BOX

SYSTEMBOARD

PSU

DC POWER

RFIBOXFAN

REMOTEPOWERSWITCH

MAINS

SWITCH

ÉÉÉÉ

RIBBON CABLE

FLEXICABLE

WIRE CABLE SK1

SK1

PL2

SK1

INLINE CONNECTOR

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

Figure A.3 Main system interconnections



CARRIAGEFORWARD

LIMIT SWITCH

PL4 PL3PL1

PL5

PL2

PL6

PL6PL2

PL4

PL1

PL5

MAIN COVERINTERLOCK

LH

DISPLAYBOARD

LIDINTERLOCK

LH

LIDINTERLOCK

RH

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

LH

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

RHÄÄÄÄÄÄENCLOSURE

FAN

MAIN COVERINTERLOCK

RH

SYSTEM BOARD(PL1)

CARRIAGEREVERSE

LIMIT SWITCH

CARRIAGEDATUM

SENSOR

MAINCARRIAGE

MOTOR

SYSTEM BOARD(SK1)

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

PL3


BOARD

X-SLIDEDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

X-SLIDEDATUM

SENSOR

X-SLIDEMOTOR

TRANSMISSIONLIGHTBAR

INTERLOCK

FOCUSDATUM

SENSOR

PL4

PL6 PL5

PL7

PL1

Figure A.4 Distribution board interconnections



REFLECTIONCOPY LAMPS x2

LAMPDETECTOR

BOARD

LAMPDETECTOR

BOARD

TRANSMISSION COPY LAMP

LAMPDETECTOR

BOARD

LIGHT TABLELAMPS x2

LIGHTBARLOOPBACK

PL1

PL2

PL3SK1

PL4

LAMP DRIVER BOARD

PL1

PL1

PL1

FLEXICABLE TO TRAVERSEDISTRIBUTION BOARD

Figure A.5 Lamp driver board interconnections



A.2 Power Supply Unit (PSU)

TO RFIBOX FAN

TO SYSTEMBOARD

(PL2)(Table A.2)

MINIMUMLOAD (3R3)RESISTOR

TO STANDBYSWITCH

CONNECTORON RFI BOX

PSU FAN

TO PSU

TO PSU REMOTECONNECTOR

(Table A.2)

PSU REMOTECONNECTOR

(Table A.2)

(Table A.2)

Figure A.6 PSU Layout

Table A.1 PSU AC-connections

From

Mains Live

Mains Neutral

Mains Earth

Mains Switch

Mains Switch

Earth Stud

Wire Colour

Brown

Blue

Green/Yellow

Brown

Blue

Green/Yellow

To

Mains Switch

Mains Switch

Earth Stud

PSU Live

PSU Neutral

PSU Earth



Table A.2 PSU DC-connections

From PSU

+5 V

0 V (D)

+5 V

0 V (D)

0 V

0 V

+24 V

+24 V

0 V (A)

+18 V

0 V (A)

-12 V

PSU

+24 V

0 V

PSU Remote

Connector

4

5

NC

SystemPL2Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

RFI BoxFan Conn

1

2

StandbySwitch

Connector

1

2

3

Note: 0 V (D) represents digital ground, 0 V (A) representsanalogue ground, and 0 V represents power ground.

A 3R3 resistor is mounted to the metalwork of the RFI boxand is connected from +5 V to 0 V(D) as a minimum loadfor the PSU.



A.3 System Board

LK1

LK2

LK3

FS1

FS2

FS3

RL1

RL2

SK1

PL1

SK2

SK3

SK4

SK5PL3

PL2

SW2

U81

U82

U94

U95

D6

D5

SK6

D4

PL6

SK8

SK7

PL8

PL7

PL5

PL4

SW1

Figure A.7 System board layout: pre-Kicker



LK3

FS1

FS2

FS3

RL1

RL2

SK1

PL1

SK2

SK3

SK4

SK5PL3

PL2

SW2

D6

D5

SK6

D4

PL6

SK8

SK7

PL8

PL7

PL5

PL9

SW1

U77

U78

U90

U91

DONGLE

SK1

PL1

PL10

DONGLE

Figure A.8 Kicker System board layout



A.3.1 System Board Connectors

Table A.3 System board connectors

Port

PL1

SK1

SK2

SK3

SK4

SK5

SK6

SK7

SK8

PL2

PL3

PL4

PL5

PL6

PL7

PL8

PL9

PL10

Connections and Notes

25-way ribbon cable to LH distribution board.

15-way ribbon cable to RH distribution board.

25-way cable loom to servo motor and encoder of themain carriage drive.

50-way flexicable loom to Traverse distribution board.

62-way flexicable loom to Traverse distribution board.

RS232 terminal diagnostics port (see Note).

Factory use.

Factory use.

Factory use.

DC-connector from PSU (see Note).

Single ended SCSI / terminator double port (see Note).

Not on Kicker board. Factory and R & D use only.

Factory use.

Factory use.

Factory use.

Factory use.

Kicker board only. Factory and R & D use only.

Kicker board only. Direct connection to Dongle board, SK1.

Note: SK5 is an 8-way mini-DIN connector with the samepinout as the serial interface for the Macintosh.

Note: For PL2, see Table A.2 for pinout connections.

Note: PL3, uses the standard pinout connections for a SCSI2connector.



PL1 to LH Distribution Board

Table A.4 System board to LH distribution board connections

LHDistPL6Pin #

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

Function

LED fault cathode

LED ready cathode

LED power cathode

NC

Enclosure fan (+24 V)

0 V (D)

0 V (D)

0 V (D)

0 V (D)

0 V (D)

0 V (D)

NC

Main cover interlocks loop

LED fault anode

LED ready anode

LED power anode

Enclosure fan (0 V)

NC

NC

Spare sensor

+5 V

+5 V

Carriage forward limit sensor

NC

Main cover interlock (+24 V)

NC

SystemPL1Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25



SK1 to RH Distribution Board

Table A.5 System board to RH distribution board connections

RHDistPL1Pin #

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Function

Lid interlocks (+24 V)

NC

Spare

+5 V

Carriage reverse limit sensor

Carriage datum

NC

Main cover interlock loop

Lid return

0 V (D)

0 V (D)

0 V (D)

0 V (D)

0 V (D)

Main cover interlocks return

NC

SystemSK1Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15



SK2 to Main Carriage Servo Motor

Table A.6 System board to main carriage servo motor connections

SystemSK2Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

Function

Main carriage encoder A (+)

NC

Main carriage encoder B (+)

NC

Main carriage encoder index (+)

NC

Main carriage encoder +5 V

NC

NC

NC

Brush servo phase 1

Brush servo phase 2

Brush servo phase 2

Main carriage encoder A (-)

NC

Main carriage encoder B (-)

NC

Main carriage encoder index (-)

NC

Main carriage encoder 0 V

Screen (encoder)

Screen (motor)

Brush servo phase 1

Brush servo phase 1

Brush servo phase 2



SK3 to Lamp Driver Board

Table A.7 System board to traverse distribution board to lampdriver board connections

CarrDistPL3Pin #

17

50

33

16

49

32

15

48

31

14

47

30

13

46

29

12

45

28

11

44

27

10

43

26

9

42

25

LampDvrPL4Pin #

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

19

37

18

36

17

35

16

34

15

33

14

32

13

31

Function

X-slide motor phase3




+5 V

Focus datum sensor

+5 V

0 V ( D)

Lightbar interlock (-)

Lightbar interlock (+)

0 V ( D)

X-slide datum sensor

0 V ( D)

Lamp SCLK cathode

Lamp SCLK anode

Lamp SDI cathode

Lamp SDI anode

Lamp SDACEN cathode

Lamp SDACEN anode

Lamp SDO cathode

Lamp SDO anode

Lamp LDAC cathode

Lamp LDAC anode

Lightbar trip return

Lightbar trip

Spare

Lamp power OK cathode

SystemSK3Pin #

34

1

18

35

2

19

36

3

20

37

4

21

38

5

22

39

6

23

40

7

24

41

8

25

42

9

26



System board to traverse distribution board to lamp driver boardconnections (continued)

CarrDistPL3Pin #

8

41

24

7

40

23

6

39

22

5

38

21

4

37

20

3

36

19

2

35

18

1

34

51

52

LampDvrPL4Pin #

12

30

11

29

10

28

9

27

8

26

7

25

6

24

5

23

4

22

21

3

2

20

1

38

39

Function

Lamp power OK anode

NC

NC

Transmission lamp ON cathode

Transmission lamp ON anode

NC

NC

Temperature OK cathode

Temperature OK anode

Reflection lamps ON cathode

Reflection lamps ON anode

ADC DOUT cathode

ADC DOUT anode

Light table lamps ON cathode

Light table lamps ON anode

+24 V (return)

+24 V (return)

+24 V (return)

+24 V

+24 V (return)

+24 V

+24 V

+24 V

Screen

Screen

SystemSK3Pin #

43

10

27

44

11

28

45

12

29

46

13

30

47

14

31

48

15

32

49

16

33

50

17

51

52



SK4 to Digitizer Board

Table A.8 System board to traverse distribution board to digitizerboard connections

DigitizerSK2Pin #

22

1

43

23

2

44

24

3

45

25

4

46

26

5

47

27

6

48

28

7

49

29

8

50

30

9

51

31

10

52

Function

Pixel demand clock (-)

Pixel demand clock (+)

Digitizer returned clock (-)

Digitizer returned clock (+)

0 V (D)

Start of line sync from system board

+5 V (D)

Start of line to system board

0 V (D)

Exposure control RED

Exposure control GREEN

Exposure control BLUE

+5 V (D)

Digitizer data bit0 (lsb)

0 V (D)

Digitizer data bit1

+5 V (D)

Digitizer data bit2

0 V (D)

Digitizer data bit3

+5 V (D)

Digitizer data bit4

0 V (D)

Digitizer data bit5

+5 V (D)

Digitizer data bit6

0 V (D)

Digitizer data bit7 (msb)

+5 V (D)

Reset signal from system board

CarrDistPL2Pin #

21

42

62

20

41

61

19

40

60

18

39

59

17

38

58

16

37

57

15

36

56

14

35

55

13

34

54

12

33

53

SystemSK4Pin #

21

42

62

20

41

61

19

40

60

18

39

59

17

38

58

16

37

57

15

36

56

14

35

55

13

34

54

12

33

53



System board to traverse distribution board to digitizer boardconnections (continued)

DigitizerSK2Pin #

32

11

53

33

12

54

34

13

55

35

14

56

36

15

57

37

16

58

38

17

59

39

18

60

40

19

61

41

20

62

42

21

63

64

Function

0 V (D)

Serial DAC enable

Program enable

Digitizer serial clock

0 V (D)

Serial data in

For programming

Serial data out

0 V (D)

Mode bit0

Mode bit1

Mode bit2

0 V (D)

PLL locked

Input volts OK

Temperature OK

Enlargement datum sensor

0 V (D)

+18 V

+11.5 V

-12 V

-12 V

0 V (A)

0 V (A)

Enlargement motor phase1


Focus motor phase4



Focus motor phase2

Focus motor phase3

Focus motor phase1

Screen

Screen

CarrDistPL2Pin #

11

32

52

10

31

51

9

30

50

8

29

49

7

28

48

6

27

47

5

26

46

4

25

45

3

24

44

2

23

43

1

22

63

64

SystemSK4Pin #

11

32

52

10

31

51

9

30

50

8

29

49

7

28

48

6

27

47

5

26

46

4

25

45

3

24

44

2

23

43

1

22

63

64



A.3.2 Fuses

Table A.9 Fuses on system board

Rating

1 A (fast)

1 A (fast)

1 A (fast)

Function

Interlock supply

Enclosure fan supply

SCSI terminator power

Fuse #

FS1

FS2

FS3

A.3.3 Switches

Table A.10 Switches on system board

Switch #

SW1

SW2

Function

Sets SCSI address for system board

Must be set at position 7 (factory use)

A.3.4 LEDs

Table A.11 LEDs on system board

LED #

D4

D5

D6

Function

Power (+5 V present)

Fault

Ready

Colour

Green

Red

Green

Note: These LEDs mirror the three LEDs on thedisplay board, although the colours aredifferent.



A.3.5 Relays

Table A.12 Relays on system board

Relay #

RL1

RL2

Function

Main carriage motor interlock

Lamp driver supply

Enclosure fan supply

Stepper motors interlock

A.3.6 Links

Table A.13 Links on system board

Link #

LK1

LK2

LK3

Setting

OFF

OFF

OFF

Notes

Not on Kicker board

Not on Kicker board

Note: All links are for factory use.



A.4 CCD Headboard

TO DIGITIZER

CCD

SK1

Figure A.9 CCD headboard layout



A.4.1 CCD Headboard Connector

SK1 to Digitizer Board

Table A.14 CCD headboard to digitizer board connections



DigitizerSK1Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

Function

0 V (A)

Buffer Amp output RED

0 V (A)

Buffer Amp output GREEN

0 V (A)

Buffer Amp output BLUE

0 V (A)

+15 V Supply (ref to AGND)

0 V (D)

+7.2 V Supply (ref to DGND)

Exposure control - RED

+12 V Supply (ref to DGND)

0 V (D)

Exposure control - GREEN

0 V (D)

Exposure control - BLUE

0 V (D)

Transfer Gate2

0 V (D)

Transfer Gate1

0 V (D)

Reset Clock

0 V (D)

Phase2B Clock

0 V (D)

Phase1B Clock

0 V (D)

Phase2A Clock

0 V (D)

Phase1A Clock

CCDHeadSK1Pin #

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



A.5 Digitizer Board

SK2TP7

TP1

TP2

TP3

TP4

TP5

TP6

TP10

TP11

PL4

TP8

TP9(GND)

SK1

PL1

PL2 PL3

Figure A.10 Digitizer board layout



A.5.1 Digitizer Board Connectors

Table A.15 Digitizer board connectors

Port

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

SK1

Connects to

Enlargement datum sensor

Enlargement motor

Focus motor

Power to digitizer fan

CCD headboard

Note: For SK1, see Table A.14 for pinout connections.

PL1 to Enlargement Datum Sensor

Table A.16 Enlargement datum sensor connections

DigitizerPL1Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

Function

0 V (D)

NC

Datum sensor

NC

+5 V



PL2 to Enlargement Motor

Table A.17 Enlargement motor connections

DigitizerPL2Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

Function

NC

NC

Motor phase4

Motor phase3

Motor phase2

Motor phase1

PL3 to Focus Motor

Table A.18 Focus motor connections

DigitizerPL3Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

Function

NC

NC

Motor phase4

Motor phase3

Motor phase2

Motor phase1



PL4 to Digitizer Fan

Table A.19 Digitizer fan connections

DigitizerPL4Pin #

1

2

Function

0 V Fan -

+5 V Fan +

A.5.2 Test Points

Table A.20 Digitizer board test points

TestPoint

TP1

TP2

TP3

TP4

TP5

TP6

TP7

TP8

TP9

TP10

TP11

Acceptable Signal Range (with reference to TP9)

0 V to +4.1 V

0 V to -8 V

0 V to +8 V

0 V to +6.5 V

+/- 100 mV

0 V to +8 V

TTL -ve pulse

0 V to -5 V

0 V to +8 V

0 V to +6.5 V

Function

Offset DAC

Video RGB

Video RED

X1 ADC

Analogue GND

Video GREEN

Line Sync

Diagnostic DAC

Digital GND

Video BLUE

X4 ADC



A.6 Lamp Driver Board

PL2

PL1

PL4

PL3

SK1

TP2

TP1

TP3TP4

TP5TP6

D5

D15

Figure A.11 Lamp driver board layout



A.6.1 Lamp Driver Board Connectors

Table A.21 Lamp driver board connectors

Port

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

SK1

Connects to

Reflection lamps

Transmission lamp

Light table lamps

Traverse distribution board

Lamp detector boards


PL1 to Reflection Lamps

Table A.22 Reflection lamps connections

LampDvrPL1Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Function

Lamp1 cathode2

Lamp1 cathode2

Lamp1 cathode1

Lamp1 cathode1

NC

Lamp2 cathode2

Lamp2 cathode2

Lamp2 cathode1

Lamp2 cathode1

Note: To check lamp connections, first disconnect PL1 and usinga multimeter, measure the cathode resistances across theconnector pins. e.g. Pin 1 to Pin 2 which should beapprox. 3.5 Ω.

With PL1 connected and the scanner powered on, the lampcathodes should glow in a darkened room.



Alternatively, the glass at each end of the lamp should feelwarm. DO NOT TOUCH THE METAL END CAPS.

PL2 to Transmission Lamp

Table A.23 Transmission lamp connections

LampDvrPL2Pin #

1

2

3

4

Function

Lamp cathode2

Lamp cathode2

Lamp cathode1

Lamp cathode1

Note: To check lamp connections, first disconnect PL2 and usinga multimeter, measure the cathode resistances across theconnector pins. e.g. pin1 to pin2 which should beapprox. 3.5 Ω.

With PL2 connected and the scanner powered on for 15minutes, heat should be felt at each end of the lightbar.



PL3 to Light Table Lamps

Table A.24 Light table lamps connections

LampDvrPL3Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Function

Lamp1 cathode2

Lamp1 cathode2

Lamp1 cathode1

Lamp1 cathode1

NC

Lamp2 cathode2

Lamp2 cathode2

Lamp2 cathode1

Lamp2 cathode1

Note: To check lamp connections, first disconnect PL3 and usinga multimeter, measure the cathode resistances across theconnector pins. e.g. Pin 1 to Pin 2 which should beapprox. 3.5 Ω.

With PL3 connected and the scanner powered on, the lampcathodes should glow in a darkened room.

Alternatively, the glass at each end of the lamp should feelwarm. DO NOT TOUCH THE METAL END CAPS.



SK1 to Lamp Detector Boards

Table A.25 Lamp detector board connections

LampDvrSK1Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

Function

Transmission lamp detector anode

+5 V (test)

Transmission lamp detector cable screen

Reflection lamp1 detector anode

+5 V (test)

Reflection lamp1 detector cable screen

Reflection lamp2 detector anode

+5 V (test)

Reflection lamp2 detector cable screen

NC

NC

NC

Lightbar loop (+18 V to loopback)

Transmission detector cathode

0 V

NC

Reflection lamp1 detector cathode

0 V

NC

Reflection lamp2 detector cathode

0 V

NC

NC

NC

Lightbar loopback



A.6.2 Test Points

Table A.26 Test points on lamp driver board

TestPoint

TP1

TP2

TP3

TP4

TP5

TP6

Acceptable Signal Range

+2.9 V to+3.9 V (ref to TP1)

+17 V to+19 V (ref to TP6)

+4.75 V to+5.25 V (ref to TP6)

+13.3 V to+14.7 V (ref to TP6)

Function

0 V (HT)

+320 V (HT)

+18 V

+5 V

+14 V

0 V

Note: The voltage measured between TP2 and TP1 is the HTvoltage divided by 100.

A.6.3 LEDs

Table A.27 LEDs on lamp driver board

LED #

D5

D15

Function

+24 V power present and soft inrush circuit working

+320 V power present



A.6.4 Links

Table A.28 LEDs on lamp driver board

Link

LK1

Function

DO NOT FIT

Note: If fitted, the +320 V power supply is disabled.

A.6.5 Lamp Detector Boards

PL1

1

2D1

Figure A.12 Lamp detector board layout

Lamp Detector Connections

Table A.29 Lamp detector connections

DetectPL1Pin #

1

2

Function

Detector cathode

Detector anode



A.7 RH Distribution Board

PL1

PL4

PL2

PL3PL5

PL6

Figure A.13 RH distribution board layout

A.7.1 RH Distribution Board Connectors

Table A.30 RH distribution board connectors

Port

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

PL5

PL6

Connects to

System board

Spare

Main carriage datum sensor

Main carriage reverse limit sensor

RH interlock - main cover

Lid interlocks

Type

16-way

5-way

5-way

5-way

6-way

6-way




PL3 to Main Carriage Datum Sensor

Table A.31 Main carriage datum sensor connections

RHDistPL3Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

Function

0 V (D)

LED anode

Datum sensor

LED cathode

+5 V

PL4 to Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor

Table A.32 Main carriage reverse limit sensor connections

RHDistPL4Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

Function

0 V (D)

LED anode

Datum sensor

LED cathode

+5 V



PL5 to Main Cover - RH Interlock

Table A.33 Main cover RH interlock connections

RHDistPL5Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

Function

Interlock (ret)

Interlock loop

NC

NC

NC

NC

PL6 to Lid Interlocks

Table A.34 Lid interlock connections

RHDistPL6Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

Function

Return

+24 V

NC

NC

NC

NC



A.8 LH Distribution Board

PL3 PL4

PL1

PL2

PL5

PL6

Figure A.14 LH distribution board layout

A.8.1 LH Distribution Board Connectors

Table A.35 LH distribution board connectors

Port

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

PL5

PL6

Connects to

Enclosure fan

Display board

LH interlock - main cover

Main carriage forward limit sensor

Spare

System board

Type

6-way

10-way

6-way

5-way

5-way

25-way




PL1 to Enclosure Fan

Table A.36 Enclosure fan connections

LHDistPL1Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

Function

Fan - 0 V

NC

NC

NC

NC

Fan +24 V

PL2 to Display Board

Table A.37 Display board connections

LHDistPL2Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Function

LED power cathode

LED power anode

LED ready cathode

LED ready anode

LED fault cathode

LED fault anode

NC

NC

NC

NC

DisplayPL1Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



PL3 to Main Cover - LH Interlock

Table A.38 Main cover LH interlock connections

LHDistPL3Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

Function

Loop

+24 V

NC

NC

NC

NC

PL4 to Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor

Table A.39 Main carriage forward limit sensor connections

LHDistPL4Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

Function

0 V (D)

LED anode

Forward limit

LED cathode

+5 V



A.9 Flexicable Distribution Boards

FLEXICABLETO DIGITIZER

BOARD

FLEXICABLE TOLAMP DRIVER

BOARD

PL2

PL4

PL6

PL5

PL3

74LS14


BOARD

X-SLIDEDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

PL7

Figure A.15 Flexicable distribution boards layout



A.9.1 Flexicable Distribution Boards Connectors

Table A.40 Connectors on Traverse and X-slide distribution boards

Port

PL2

PL3

PL4

PL5

PL6

PL7

Connects to

System board

System board

X-slide motor

Lightbar interlock

X-slide datum sensor

Focus datum sensor

Type

62-way

50-way

6-way

5-way

5-way

5-way


For PL3, see Table A.7 for pinout connections.

PL4 to X-slide Motor

Table A.41 X-Slide motor connections

CarrDistPL4Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

6

Function

NC

NC

Motor phase4

Motor phase2

Motor phase3

Motor phase1



PL5 to Lightbar Interlock

Table A.42 Lightbar interlock connections

CarrDistPL5Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

Function

Lightbar interlock -

NC

Lightbar interlock +

NC

NC

PL6 to X-slide Datum Sensor

Table A.43 X-slide datum sensor connections

CarrDistPL6Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

Function

0 V (D)

NC

Datum sensor

NC

+5 V



PL7 to Focus Datum Sensor

Table A.44 Focus datum sensor connections

X-slidePL7Pin #

1

2

3

4

5

Function

0 V (D)

LED anode

Datum sensor

LED cathode

+5 V

A.10 Display Board Layout

PL1

D1 D2 D3

Figure A.16 LED display board layout


B

B-1Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800002

Fault Diagnosis

This appendix provides a definition of some image defects andsome fault diagnosis tables in support to the customer serviceengineer. At the end of this appendix, a numerical list is providedfor all available tests and checks.

B.1 Image Defects

B.1.1 Introduction

This section intends only to define certain types of image defects.Before checking for defects run the Repropaktransparency/reflection copy and compare with the factory testfilms.

Image defects are usually an indication of a fault which is toosubtle for the diagnostics to detect as either a pass or fail state.An image defect can slow up the progress of an electronic reprotest (see Section 7.6).

Image defects can be classified into the following groups:

• Lack of sharpness,

• Streaks,

• Distortions,

• Tonal problems,

• Subtle colour errors,

• Patterning,

• Cropping errors,

• Graininess/Lack of smoothness.

Fault Diagnostics

B-2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner

B.1.2 Lack of Sharpness

Lack of sharpness is seen as a soft (out of focus) image withindistinct edges that should be sharp.

If the lack of sharpness is only apparent over a part of the imagearea, the most likely explanation is that the original is not layingflat on the platen.

If the lack of sharpness is all over the image, then the scannermay have failed to correctly autofocus on the subject.

The scanner makes three attempts to focus, along lines at thequarter, half, and three-quarter points of the area to be scanned. Ifthere is no detail here, then autofocus may fail.

Note: Preview scans do not perform an autofocus, and may lookunsharp if the copy is not mounted directly on the platen.This is not a problem.

When focussing has failed, try turning the image by 90, or tryover-scanning slightly onto an original which has some strongdetail.

Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 1 of Table B.4.

Figure B.1 gives but one example of an image defect sufferingfrom a lack of sharpness.

Figure B.1 Lack of sharpness example

B.1.3 Streaks

There are two types of streaks. In both cases, the streaks willappear from top-to-bottom on the output scan, assuming that noimage rotation has been specified and the image has beenmounted heads right.

Fault Diagnostics


Light Streaks

Streaks seen in light and medium tones which are lighter than thesurrounding area and are more than a single pixel wide may becaused by dirt or other marks on the:

• CCD scan head window (glass plate covering the CCD imagesensors),

• platen in the transmission white-balance area,

• Reflection white-balance strip,

• mirror.

Note: When scanning negatives, this sort of streak appearsdark rather than light.

Figure B.2 Example of a light streak

Deep Streaks in Shadows

Streaks seen in deep shadow tones which are darker than thesurrounding area and are a single pixel wide.

These are always present to a certain extent in CCD scanners butbad pixels should be removed by bad pixel elimination.


B.1.4 Distortion

Distortions include skews and compression, or stretching, of theimage.

Fault Diagnostics


Distortions are more easily seen while scanning a square grid.

Skew

Skew is apparent when the vertical and horizontal lines arestraight, but not perpendicular (at right angles) to each other. Thiscan only be caused by serious damage to the camera headsub-assembly or the X-slide assembly (spec 0.1 max).

Compression or Stretching

Compression, or stretching, is when squares become rectanglesby more than the specified size tolerances (0.3%).

This type of image defect indicates any of the followingproblems:

• a serious error in the main leadscrew drive,

• a wrongly-setup scanner, or

• the image was not focused properly (though it should thenlook unsharp).


Figure B.3 gives but one example of an image defect sufferingfrom a distortion problem.

Figure B.3 Example of distortion

Fault Diagnostics


B.1.5 Tonal Problems

Flare is when light areas break into adjacent dark areas. The mostlikely cause is dust on the mirror or lens.

Loss of shadow detail may occur if the lamps are failing. In somecases, shadow detail may be reduced when very dark originals arescanned without masking the unused areas of the platen.


Figure B.4 gives but one example of an image defect sufferingfrom a tonal problem.

Figure B.4 Tonal problem example

B.1.6 Subtle Colour Errors

Subtle colour errors are often related to ageing components.

Small colour casts may occur, (e.g. a white area does not lookquite white).

Some possible causes of subtle colour errors are as follows:

• discoloured reflection white balance target,

• ageing lamps,

• clear film covering the transmission white-balance area, or

• copy has been mounted using glass.


Fault Diagnostics


B.1.7 Patterning

Patterning is generally seen as either a series of repetitive lines inflat tint areas or as wavy edges, which normally should besmooth.

Patterning is often faint, and with closely spaced lines. The linesmay appear at any angle. On screened outputs, the angle is oftendifferent on the different screen angles.

In addition when descreening, moiré patterning, often seen asdiagonal bands, can be caused by using an incorrect filter. Thechosen filter is not compatible with the screen ruling on theoriginal.

When viewing output films, the moiré may be seen on one ormore separations and at different angles. The remedy is to use thecorrect filter.


Figure B.5 gives but one example of an image defect sufferingfrom a patterning problem.

Figure B.5 Example of patterning

B.1.8 Cropping Errors

A cropping error is the failure of the scanner to accurately scanthe selected area of the original.

These are usually seen when an HR scan is not cropped asplanned on the pre-view setup.

Cropping errors can be caused by a system board being replacedwithout re-running the setup alignment and calibration programs.

Fault Diagnostics


Re-running the alignment and calibration programs is always thefirst remedial action. If this process should fail and there are nodiagnostics error messages, then something is either mis-alignedor physically distorted.


Figure B.6 gives but one example of a cropping error.

Figure B.6 Example of a cropping error

B.1.9 Graininess

There are two types of graininess. One is caused by analoguenoise and the other by a lack of smoothness in the surface finishof the scan.

Analogue Noise

This electronic noise is produced by either the CCD headboard orthe digitizer board.

Analogue noise is seen as random black dots which are generallymore visible as single pixels in the shadow, or mid-tone, areas.

Lack of Smoothness

Graininess, or poor surface finish of the original, is detected andenhanced by the image (DSP) processor, particularly in the USMprocess.

Fault Diagnostics


A higher threshold or smoothness setting on the USM shouldimprove this at the expense of loss of sharpness. In extremecases, oil mounting may help.


Figure B.7 gives but one example of graininess.

Figure B.7 Example of graininess

Fault Diagnostics


B.2 Troubleshooting Guide

B.2.1 Introduction

In most instances, the workstation diagnostics (see Chapter 7)will help to indicate a failing part of the scanner.

When the diagnostics program is run, it follows a specific order.The first test to fail will provide a good indication of the problemarea.

Subsequent failures may be consequential, so they are not goodindicators of the true problem area.

If the workstation diagnostics is not able to recognize the scanner,then the SCSI system may be at fault. In this case, terminaldiagnostics (see Chapter 5) must be run with the RS232 cableconnected to the scanner’s diagnostic port.

B.2.2 Symptom Indications

A fault is defined as an abnormality in the performance of thescanner. Four groups of faults have been categorized as follows:

• Loss of power symptoms,

• POST failures,

• Application error messages,

• Image defects.

Fault Diagnostics


B.2.3 Loss of Power Faults

Table B.1 Loss of power faults

DIAGNOSIS

a. Mains not switched on.

b. Mains fuse failure.

c. Check mains cable for faults or disconnection.

d. Main switch failure.

REMEDIES

Switch ON the mains supply.

Replace fuse.

Repair as required.

Replace main switch and its GREEN indicator (Section 4.9.6).

SYMPTOMS

1. No illumination on main switch.

2. No LEDs lit on display panel.

a. Check illumination on main switch.

b. Check state of standby switch.

c. Check standby switch connections.

d. Check internal cables for pinching/disconnection.

e. Check PSU voltages (particularly the +5 V supply) at PL2 on system board.

f. Display board is faulty.

See item 1 above.

Switch ON or check its connections.

if cable to RFI box, replace standby switch cable (Section 4.18.8).

if RFI box cable to PSU, replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).

if display board cable (Section 4.18.10).

if LH dist board (Section 4.18.11).

if 25-way ribbon (Section 4.18.12).

if system board (Section 4.9.2).

Note: Check LEDs on system board. If theyare OK, it must be one of the above cablesat fault.

Replace PSU if necessary (Section 4.9.4).

Replace display board if necessary (Section 4.18.9).

Note: The workstation will still ’talk’ with the scanner in this case.

Fault Diagnostics


B.2.4 POST Failures

Table B.2 POST failures

DIAGNOSIS

Fatal POST failure:

a. RAM test failure.

b. FLASH memory failure.

c. ISP test failure.

d. IMR test failure.

e. Interrupt test failure.

f. SCSI test failure.

g. CS0 test failure.

REMEDIES

Replace system board (Section 4.9.2) forany of these failures.

SYMPTOMS

1. Fault lamp flashes and workstation fails to ‘see’ the scanner.

One flash

Two flashes

Three flashes

Four flashes

Five flashes

Six flashes

Seven flashes

2. Fault lamp ON. a. Non-fatal POST failure.

b Interlock activated.

c. Servo motor failure.

d. X-slide motor failure.

e. Enlargement motor failure.

f. Focus motor failure.

g. Overtemperature.

h. Overvoltage

j. Transmission lamp failed (when lightbar is fitted).

k. Reflection lamp failed.

Perform the following procedure:

i. Run all terminal diagnostic tests (Section 5.4).

ii. Find the first failed module.

iii. Replace relevant FRU (Chapter 4).

iv. Re-run all terminal diagnostic tests (Section 5.4).

v. Find next failed module.

vi. Replace relevant FRU (Chapter 4).

vii. Repeat this reiterative process until the terminal diagnostic tests all pass.

Fault Diagnostics


B.2.5 Application Error Messages

Table B.3 Application error messages

DIAGNOSIS

a. Workstation powered upbefore scanner.

b. Check for SCSI ID conflict.

c. Check SCSI cable presence / connection.

d. SCSI cable fault.

e. Check terminator presence / connection.

f. Workstation SCSI driverfault.

g. System controller failure.

REMEDIES

Power down both workstation & scanner.

Use Macintosh utility in use CSI ID’s. Thenchange the scanner’s ID setting.

Power up scanner.

Power up workstation.

Select File / Acquire Preferences dialogbox. Then select the Verify button.

Check workstation.

Run terminal diagnostics (Section 5.5.3).Replace modules as required.

SYMPTOMS

1. Cannot find any attached scanners.../ scanner not responding.../ scanner failed to respond in time.

2. Missing the transmission arm(lightbar).

a. Check presence of lightbar.

b. Check operation of lightbar interlock.

c. Check interlock switch.

d. Check interlock switch connection.

e. Check interlock cable to(PL5) connection at main carriage distribution board.

f. Check connections 50-way flexicable to SK3 at system board.

g. Check system board relay (RL2).

h. Check PSU output.

If OK check interlock cabling and allconnections.

Note: If lid was correctly closed, theinterlock may have failed to activate.

Replace lightbar interlock switch(Section 4.5).

Replace interlock cable (Not Spared).

Replace main carriage flexicable assembly(Section 4.18.3).

Replace 50-way flexicable (Section 4.18.1)

Replace system board (Section 4.9.2).

Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).

Fault Diagnostics


Application error messages (continued)

DIAGNOSIS

a. Lamp failure.

b. Lamp detector failed.

c. Check lamp cabling / holder.

d. Lamp driver module failed.

e. Check connections 50-way flexicable to SK3 at system board.

f. Check system board.

g. Check PSU output.

REMEDIES

Replace reflection lamp (Section 4.15.1).

Run diagnostics (Section 5.4).

Replace reflection tray assembly ifnecessary (Not spared).

Replace lamp driver module(Section 4.17).

Replace 50-way flexicable(Section 4.18.1).



SYMPTOMS

3. Reflection lamp #failed.

4. Transmission lamp failed.

a. Lamp failure.

b. Lamp detector failed.

c. Check wiring in lightbar.

d. Check wiring in Reflection lamp tray.

e. Lamp driver module failed.

f. Check connections 50-way flexicable to SK3 at system board.

g. Check system board.

h. Check PSU output.

Replace transmission lamp (Section 4.4.2).


Replace cable harness in lightbar ifnecessary (Not spared).

Replace reflection tray assembly ifnecessary (Not spared).





Fault Diagnostics



DIAGNOSIS

a. Lamp failure.

b. Check lamp cabling / holder.

c. Lamp driver module failed.

e. Check connections 50-way flexicable to SK3 at system board.

f. Check interlock relay (RL2) on system board.


h. Check PSU output

REMEDIES

Replace light-table lamp (Section 4.16.1).


Replace cable harness if necessary(Not spared).



If OK check system board.



SYMPTOMS

5. Light table lamp # failed.

Note: There is nodiagnostic reportfrom the scanner.Confirm failure byvisual inspection.

6. Scanner lid open (when lid was closed).

a. Lid interlock failure.

b. Lid magnet(s) missing.

c. Distorted lid assembly.

Check interlocks (Section 8.2) If required,replace both interlocks (Section 4.13.2).

Fit new magnets (Not spared).

Replace lid assembly (Section 4.10.2).

8. Scanner POST failed.

a. Run diagnostics (Section 5.4).

Perform necessary action.

7. Scanner main cover open (when lid was closed).

a. Cover interlock failure.

b. Cover magnet(s) missing.

c. Distorted lid assembly.

Check interlocks (Section 8.2) If required,replace both interlocks (Section 4.13.1).

Fit new magnets (Not spared).

Replace lid assembly (Section 4.10.2).

Fault Diagnostics



SYMPTOMS

9. Main carriage drive failed.

DIAGNOSIS

a. Servo motor failure.

b. Check electrical supply.

c. Check lid interlocks.

d. Check main cover interlocks.

e.. Check leadscrew clamp-nut adjustment.

f. Main leadscrew failure.

g. Check main leadscrew coupling.

h. Check forward limit sensor.

j. Check reverse limit sensor.

k. Check datum sensor.

l. Check interlock relay (RL1).

m. Check system board.

n. Check PSU.

p System board driver failure.

q. Mech / service program failure.

REMEDIES


Test cabling from motor to SK2 on systemboard. If necessary, replace servo motorand its encoder (Section 4.19.3)

CAUTION - motor encoder is not static protected. (see Section 2.7).

Go to item 6.

Go to item 7.

Re-adjust if necessary (Section 4.19.1).

Replace main leadscrew (Section 4.19.2).

Re-align or replace main coupling(Section 4.19.4).

Replace limit sensor (Section 4.18.6).

Replace limit sensor (Section 4.18.5).

Replace datum sensor (Section 4.18.4).

If OK, check system board (Section 4.9.2).



Re-set system board driver (Section 4.9.2).

Download / upload buffer (Section 7.3.5).

Fault Diagnostics



SYMPTOMS

10. X-slide carriage drive failed.

DIAGNOSIS

a. X-slide stepper motor failure.




e. Check X-slide leadscrew clamp nut.

f. Check X-slide leadscrew coupling

g. Check datum sensor.

h. Check connections of62-way flexicable to SK4 at system board.

j. Check interlock relay (RL1).

k. Check system board.

l. Check PSU.

REMEDIES


Test cabling from motor to PL6 on maincarriage distribution board. If necessary,replace stepper motor (Section 4.21.3) anddistribution board (Section 4.18.3).

Go to Symptom 6.

Go to Symptom 7.

Tighten X-slide leadscrew clamp nut.

Re-align or replace X-slide clamp collar(Section 4.21.4).






Fault Diagnostics



REMEDIES


Test cabling from motor to PL2 on digitizerboard. If necessary, replace stepper motor(Section 4.20.15) and digitizer board(Section 4.20.8).

Go to Symptom 6.

Go to Symptom 7.

Tighten clamp-nut screws.

Re-align or replace enlargement clampcollar (Section 4.20.14).


Replace X-slide / main carriage distributionflexicable (Section 4.18.3).

Replace 62-way distribution flexicable(Section 4.18.2).




SYMPTOMS

11. Enlargement drive failed.

DIAGNOSIS

a. Enlargement stepper motor failure.




e. Check enlargement leadscrew clamp nut.

f. Check enlargement leadscrew coupling.

g. Check datum sensor.

h. Check connections through SK2 at digitizer flexicable to PL2on main carriage distribution board.

j. Check connections through 62-way flexicable to SK4 at system board.

k. Check interlock relay (RL1).

l. Check system board.

m. Check PSU.

Fault Diagnostics



REMEDIES


Test cabling from motor to PL3 on digitizerboard. If necessary, replace stepper motor(Section 4.20.10) and digitizer board(Section 4.20.8).

Go to Symptom 6.

Go to Symptom 7.

Re-align focus rack (Section 4.20.9).



Replace 62-way distribution flexicable(Section 4.18.2).




SYMPTOMS

12. Focus drive failed.

DIAGNOSIS

a. Focus stepper motor failure.




e. Check focus rack.

g. Datum sensor failure.

h. Check connections through SK2 at digitizer flexicable to PL2on main carriage distribution board.

j. Check connections through 62-way flexicable to SK4 at system board.

k. Check interlock relay (RL1).

l. Check system board.

m. Check PSU.

Fault Diagnostics



SYMPTOMS

13. System board temperature is not within range.

See Note below

DIAGNOSIS

a. Check RFI box vents for blockage.

b. Check PSU fan.

c. Check enclosure fan filter.

d. Check operation of enclosure fan.

e. Check system board.

f. Check PSU.

REMEDIES

Clear all vents.


Clean - or replace - filter (Section 4.8).

Replace enclosure fan (Section 4.18.15).

Run diagnostics (Section 5.4).Replace system board (Section 4.9.2).


14. System board voltage is not within range.

See Note below

a. Check system board.

b. Check PSU.



15. Digitizer board temperature is not within range.

See Note below

a. Check digitizer fan.

b. Check digitizer board.

c. Check operation of enclosure fan.

d. Check enclosure fan filter.

e. Check main carriage distribution flexicable.

f. Check 62-way flexicable.


h. Check PSU.


Replace digitizer fan (Section 4.20.7).

Replace digitizer board (Section 4.20.8).


Replace filter (Section 4.8).


Replace 62-way cable (Section 4.18.2).



Note: Power down and leave scanner to cool for 10 minutes.Do not operate the scanner if it is overheating.

Fault Diagnostics



SYMPTOMS

16. Digitizer board voltage is not within range.

See Note below

DIAGNOSIS

a. Check digitizer fan.

b. Check enclosure fan filter.

c. Check operation of enclosure fan.

d. Check system board.

e. Check PSU.

REMEDIES

Replace digitizer fan (Section 4.20.7).

Replace fan filter (Section 4.8).




17. Lamp driver boardtemperature is not within range.

See Note below

a. Check operation of enclosure fan.

b. Check fan filter.

c. Check lamp driver board.

d. Check Traverse distribution flexicable.

e Check 50-way flexicable to SK3 on system board.


g. Check PSU

a. Check operation of enclosure fan.

b. Check fan filter.

c. Check lamp driver board.

d. Check Traverse distribution flexicable.

e. Check 50-way flexicable to SK3 on system board.


g. Check PSU.




Replace X-slide / Traverse distributionflexicable (Section 4.18.3).







Replace X-slide / Traverse distributionflexicable (Section 4.18.3).




18. Lamp driver board voltage is not within range.

See Note below

Note: Power down and leave scanner to cool for 10 minutes.Do not operate the scanner if it is overheating.

Fault Diagnostics


B.2.6 Image Defects

Table B.4 Image Defects

DIAGNOSIS

a. Object mode selected when not required.

b. Lack of image detail tofocus on

c. Check for electro- mechanical faults.

d. Check for dirt on lens

e. Check for dirt on mirror.

f. Check filter of enclosure fan.

REMEDIES

Select correct mode in application (e.g.preview, overview, or high resolution).

Ensure original has sufficient detail invertical plane at centre / 1/4 point.


Clean lens if necessary (Section 8.3.5).

Clean mirror if necessary (Section 8.3.4) orreplace mirror (Section 4.15.4).

Clean or replace filter if necessary(Section 4.8).

SYMPTOMS

1. Lack of sharpness

2. Streaks a. Check transmission white-balance area of platen

b. Check for dirt on test target.

c. Check for electro- mechanical faults.

d. Check for dirt on ccd window.


f. Check enclosure fan filter.

Clean platen if necessary (Section 8.3.3)or replace platen (Section 4.14).

Use IPA to clean - or replace - the testtarget.


Clean ccd window if necessary(Section 8.3.6) or replace camera head(Section 4.20.4).

Clean mirror if necessary (Section 8.3.4) or replace mirror (Section 4.15.4).

Replace filter if necessary (Section 4.8).

Fault Diagnostics


Image Defects continued

4. Tonal problems or flare.

a. Check lightbar for atwisted extrusion.

b. Check transmission white-balance area of platen.

c. Check for dirt on test target.

d. Check brightness of lamps (e.g. insufficientdetail of shadows).


f. Check for dirt on lens.

Run diagnostics (Section 5.4).Run light_bar alignment (Section 6.4.2).

Clean platen if necessary (Section 8.3.3)or replace platen (Section 4.14).


Replace lamps if necessary (Section 4.15.1for reflection lamps) or (Section 4.4.2 fortransmission lamp).

Clean mirror if necessary (Section 8.3.4) or replace mirror (Section 4.15.4).

Clean lens if necessary (Section 8.3.5) or replace mirror (Section 4.15.4).

a. Discoloured test target.

b. Lamp not warmed up.

c. Ageing lamp.

d. Check Reflectionwhite-balance strip.

e. Check platen for clear film or adhesive tape over transmission white-balance area.

f. Check for glass in copy holder.

5. Subtle colour errors.



Replace lamps if necessary (Section 4.15.1for reflection lamps) or (Section 4.4.2 fortransmission lamp).

Use IPA to clean reflection white-balancestrip or replace (Section 4.11.1).

Clean platen if necessary (Section 8.3.3) or replace (Section 4.14).

Advise customer to avoid this practice ifquality scans are required.

SYMPTOMS

3. Distortions (skews, compression or stretching).

DIAGNOSIS

a. Check flatness of original on platen, or under reflection mat, or in a copy holder.

b. Check main leadscrew drive for physical damage.

c. Check setup calibrationof scanner.

e. Check focus rack for looseness.

REMEDIES

Make sure original is even and flat.

Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replacemain leadscrew if required (Section 4.19.2).

Run scanner calibration test (Section 6.5).

Re-align and tighten securing screws as required (Section 4.20.9).

Fault Diagnostics


Image Defects continued

a. Check scan head.

b. Check digitizer board.

c. Check system board.


Replace digitizer board (Section 4.20.8).

Replace system board (Section 4.9.2).Replace camera head (Section 4.20.4).Run calibrate tests (Section 6.5). Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6).

8. Graininess / Lackof surface smoothness.

7. Cropping errors. a. Calibration may have been lost.

b. Check for an electro- mechanical fault.

c. Check main carriage datum sensor.

d. Check X-slide carriage datum sensor.

Run Elec / setup / calibration (Section 6.5).Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6).

Replace units as required.

Replace datum sensor (Section 4.18.4).Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6).

Replace datum sensor (Section 4.21.1).Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6).

REMEDIES


Fit AV mounts to scanner.

Replace lamp detector board(Section 4.4.3 for transmission) orSection 4.15.3) or lamp driver module(Section 4.17).


Run calibrate tests (Section 6.5).Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6).

SYMPTOMS

6. Patterning.

DIAGNOSIS

a. Moiré silk screen effects.

b. Check digitizer fan for vibrations.

c. Check for illumination faults.

d. Check enclosure fan.

e. Check for electro- mechanical faults.

Run the digitizer or camera noise diagnostics test to check ifthe system is within limits.

Fault Diagnostics


B.2.7 Diagnostic Test Numbers

Table B.5 Diagnostic test numbers

REMEDIALACTION

Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2).



























Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8).





FAILED TEST ORCOMPONENT

Sync control - system bd




SCSI control - system bd



DSP control - system bd
















System board

System board

System board

System board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

TESTNo

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

Fault Diagnostics


Diagnostic test numbers continued


Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Digitizer board


DSP - system board

DSP - system board

System board

System board


System board

CCD headboard

CCD headboard

CCD headboard

CCD headboard

CCD headboard

CCD headboard

CCD headboard

System board

System board

Focus motor fault

Enlarge motor fault

X-slide motor fault

Datum fault

Datum fault

Datum fault

REMEDIALACTION




















Reserved for factory use









Replace motor (Section 4.20.10).



Perform calibration (Section 6.5.3).



TESTNo

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

Fault Diagnostics




Start of scan offset fault

Digitizer board

Digitizer board

Misalignment fault

MCB control - system bd




Data bus - system board

Data bus - system board


Focus motor control

Enlarge motor control

X-slide motor control

Carriage motor control

Servo encoder control

Lamp driver board

Lamp driver board

Lamp driver board

Lamp driver board

Lamp driver board

Lamp driver board

Lamp driver board

Unstable transmissionlamp

REMEDIALACTION




Perform alignment (Section 6.4.3).

Reserved for factory use.









See Table B.3 item 12.





Replace driver bd (Section 4.17).







Check transmission lamp. Run lampdiagnostics. (Section 5.7). Runsystem diagnostics (Section 5.5).Check error message (Section B.2.5).Replace transmission detector board(Section 4.4.3) or lamp driver board(Section 4.17).

TESTNo

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

Fault Diagnostics




Unstable reflectionlamps

Bad pixels identified

Misalignment fault

Servo motor fault

Limit stop sensors

Electro-mech fault

Electro-mech fault

Electro-mech fault

Electro-mech fault

Digitizer board

Copy holder registration

Non-uniformtransmissionillumination

Non-uniform reflectionillumination

Dirty CCD window

Camera head fault

Misalignment check

–

REMEDIALACTION

Check reflection lamp. Run lampdiagnostics. (Section 5.7). Run systemdiagnostics (Section 5.5). Check errormessage (Section B.2.5). Replacereflection detector bd(s)(Section 4.15.3) or lamp driver bd(Section 4.17).




Perform elimination (Section 6.5.7).



Check interlocks (Section 8.2), if OK,then replace system bd (Section 4.9.2).

Replace sensor (Section 4.18.5 (R) orSection 4.18.6 (L)).


Check movement of main carriage





Check lamp ends for blackening.Check mirror for cleanliness(Section 8.3.1). Check X-slidecalibration (Section 6.5.4). Performtransmission alignment procedure(Section 6.4.2). Replace camera headsub-assembly (Section 4.20.4).

Check lamp ends for blackening.Check mirror for cleanliness(Section 8.3.1). Check X-slidecalibration (Section 6.5.4). Replacecamera head sub-assembly(Section 4.20.4).

Clean CCD window (Section 8.3.6).

Replace camera head sub-assembly(Section 4.20.4).


TESTNo

97

98

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117 -125

Fault Diagnostics


Index-1Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800002

Index

AAccessories Kit, 1-20

A3 Cover Glass, 1-21Coded Copyholders, 1-20Long Registration Bar, 1-20

Alignments and Calibrations, 6-1Introduction, 1-18Overview, 6-1

C–dot SP Calibration, 6-2Camera Alignment, 6-1Carriage Alignment, 6-1System Calibration, 6-2

Annual Maintenance, 8-1, 8-2Cleaning Procedures, 8-3

CCD-Window Cleaning Procedure, 8-10Lens Cleaning Procedure, 8-9Mirror Cleaning Procedure, 8-9Optical Components, 8-3Platen Cleaning Procedures, 8-7Preparations and Completions, 8-6

Scanner Health Check, 8-11

Antistatic Precautions, 2-7

Application Error Messages, B-12

BBase & Structure Modules, 4-64

Display Board, 4-79Display Board Ribbon Cable, 4-79Enclosure Fan, 4-85Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly,

4-68LH Distribution Board, 4-80LH Ribbon Cable, 4-81

Main Carriage Cable - 50-Way, 4-64Main Carriage Cable - 62-Way, 4-66Main Carriage Datum Sensor, 4-72Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor, 4-75Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor, 4-74RH Distribution Board, 4-83RH Ribbon Cable, 4-84Standby Switch, 4-76Standby Switch Cable, 4-77

CC–dot, Calibrations, 6-29

C–dot Calibration For Sharpness At 36Lines/mm, 6-29

C–dot Calibration For Sharpness At 45Lines/mm, 6-34

Calibration Data, Saving To Disk, 6-41

Calibration FileSaving, 7-14Writing, 7-12

Cam Follower, 4-124

Carriage Alignment, 6-6Carriage Menu Introduction, 6-6

Carriage Tests Menu Path, 6-6Diff_Focus Alignment, 6-10

Adjustment Procedure for One–wheelCarriage, 6-14

Adjustment Procedure for Two–wheelCarriage, 6-11

Light_bar Alignment, 6-6Alignment Procedure, 6-9Lightbar Alignment Target, 6-7Procedure, 6-8

Index

Index-2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner

CCD setup data, 6-18

ClampEnlargement Leadscrew, 4-122X-Slide Leadscrew, 4-132

Colour Errors, B-5

Copymount Search Enable/Disable, 6-28

Cropping Errors, B-6

DDiagnostic Test Numbers, B-24

Digitizer Board Tests, 5-29Dig_brd Tests, 5-30

Basic Tests Menu Path, 5-30Function Tests Menu Path, 5-31

Digitizing System, 5-29Introduction, 5-29

Distortion of Image, B-3

Dongle, System Board, Replacement, 4-21

Downloading Firmware to Scanner, 7-39

EElectrical Module Locations, A-2

CCD Headboard, A-2Detector Boards, A-2Digitizer Board, A-2Display Board, A-2Lamp Driver Board, A-2LH Distribution Board, A-2Main Switch, A-2RFI Box, A-2

PSU, A-2System Board, A-2

RH Distribution Board, A-2Standby Switch, A-2

Electrical Reference Data, A-1CCD Headboard, A-21

Connector, A-22SK1 to Digitizer Board, A-22

Digitizer Board, A-24Connectors, A-25

PL1 to Enlargement Datum Sensor, A-25PL2 to Enlargement Motor, A-26PL3 to Focus Motor, A-26PL4 to Digitizer Fan, A-27

Test Points, A-27Flexicable Distribution Boards, A-41

Connectors, A-42Lamp Driver Board, A-28

Connectors, A-29PL1 to Reflection Lamps, A-29PL2 to Transmission Lamp, A-30PL3 to Light Table Lamps, A-31SK1 to Lamp Detector Boards, A-32

Lamp Detector Boards, A-34Connections, A-34

LEDs, A-33Links, A-34Test Points, A-33

LH Distribution Board, A-38Connectors, A-38

PL1 to Enclosure Fan, A-39PL2 to Display Board, A-39PL3 to Main Cover - LH Interlock, A-40PL4 to Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor,

A-40Module Locations, A-1

Flexicable Looms, A-3Power Supply Unit, A-7RH Distribution Board, A-35

Connectors, A-35PL3 to Main Carriage Datum Sensor, A-36PL4 to Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor,

A-36PL5 to Main Cover - RH Interlock, A-37PL6 to Lid Interlocks, A-37

System Board, A-9Connectors, A-11

PL1 to LH Distribution Board, A-12SK1 to RH Distribution Board, A-13SK2 to Main Carriage Servo Motor, A-14SK3 to Lamp Driver Board, A-15

Index


SK4 to Digitizer Board, A-17Fuses, A-19LEDs, A-19Links, A-20Relays, A-20Switches, A-19

Electrical Safety, 2-6

Electronic ModulesCCD Headboard, 1-5Detector Boards, 1-5Digitizer Board, 1-5Display Board, 1-5Lamp Driver Board, 1-5LH Distribution Board, 1-5Main Switch, 1-5PSU, 1-5RFI Box, 1-5RH Distribution Board, 1-5Standby Switch, 1-5System Board, 1-5

Electronic Repro, 1-19Purpose, 1-19

Electronics, 3-32CCD Headboard, 3-35

CCD Clock Drivers, 3-36Output Buffers, 3-37

Digitizer Board, 3-37Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC),

3-40CCD Signal, 3-38Correlated Double Sampling (CDS), 3-39Digital Control, 3-41Input Mux & Level Shifter - RGB, 3-38Operating Modes, 3-37RGB Multiplexer (Mux), 3-39Temperature Sensor, 3-41Voltage Sensor, 3-41

Display Board, 3-69Distribution Boards, 3-69, 3-70, 3-71Interlocks, 3-67Introduction, 3-32Lamp Driver Board, 3-54

+5V and +14V Regulators, 3-60Ballast Circuit, 3-63Boost Converter, 3-60Five Lamp Interlock Circuit, 3-61Heater Drivers, 3-62Input RFI Filter, 3-59Lamp Driver Block Diagram, 3-55Lamp Driver Blocks, 3-56Low Voltage Monitor, 3-60Serial ADC, 3-61Serial DAC, 3-61Soft Inrush Current Circuit, 3-59Temperature Monitor, 3-60Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCOs),

3-62Power Supply, 3-33

+18V, 3-34+24V, 3-34+5V, 3-33-12V, 3-34

Sensors, 3-64Enlargement Datum Sensor, 3-64Focus Datum Sensor, 3-64Main Carriage Datum Sensor, 3-66Main Carriage Limit Sensors, 3-67X–Slide Datum Sensor, 3-65

System Board, 3-43Clock Generation & Synchronization, 3-49Image Processor, 3-47Motion Control, 3-50SCSI Controller, 3-49Servo Motor, 3-52Stepper Motors, 3-50System Controller, 3-44

Enclosure Fan Filter, 4-16

Enlargement Motor, Moving Using MonitorCommands, 5-16

Index


FFans

Digitizer, 4-111Enclosure Fan, 4-85RFI Box, 4-26

Fault Diagnosis, 1-17, B-1Diagnostic Tests, 1-17Introduction, 1-17

Flares, B-5

Focus Motor, Moving Using MonitorCommands, 5-16

Functional Description, 3-1

Functional Descriptions, System Overview,3-1

GGeneral Precautions, 2-5

Safety Devices, 2-5Unattended Equipment, 2-5

Graininess, B-7Lack of Smoothness, B-7

HHealth and Safety at Work, 2-1

Warnings and Cautions, 2-1

IImage Defects

Descriptions, B-1Cropping Errors, B-6Distortion, B-3Graininess (Noise), B-7Introduction, B-1Lack of Sharpness, B-2

Patterning, B-6Streaks, B-2Subtle Colour Errors, B-5Tonal Problems (Flares), B-5

Distortion - Compression, B-4Distortion - Skew, B-4Streaks

In Shadows, B-3Light, B-3

Tonal Problems (Flares), B-5

Image Defects Table, B-21

Interlock Strategy, 2-8

InterlocksDetails, 3-67Lid, 4-47Lightbar, 4-10Main Cover, 4-45

LLack of Sharpness, B-2

Lamp Driver Board Tests, 5-32Introduction, 5-32

Lamp_brd Tests Menu Path, 5-33

Lamp Driver Module, 4-61

Lamp Driver Precautions, 2-8

LeadscrewsEnlargement, 4-120Main Carriage, 4-89X-Slide, 4-128

Light Table Assembly, 4-57LT-Lamp Holders, 4-60LT-Lamps, 4-58

Lightbar Assembly, 4-5Diffuser, 4-6Lightbar, 4-5Transmission Lamp, 4-6Transmission Lamp Detector Board, 4-8

Index


Lightbar Interlock, 4-10

Loss of Power Faults, B-10

MMain Cover, 4-34

Assembly, 4-38Close Procedure, 4-35Gas-Struts, 4-37Open Procedure, 4-34Reflection White–balance Strip, 4-35

Main Leadscrew Assembly, 4-87C-Bearing Assembly, 4-94Leadscrew, 4-89Leadscrew Nut Clamp Plate, 4-87Main Carriage Wheel Bearings, 4-98Servo Motor, 4-91Servo Motor Coupling, 4-93

Main Leadscrew Coupling, 4-93

Maintenance, 8-1

Mechanical Safety, 2-7

Mechanical Tests, 5-37Introduction, 5-37

Mech Menu Path, 5-38Service Menu Path, 5-39

Mirror, 4-54

Motion Control, 3-72Enlargement Drive Mechanism, 3-76Focus Drive Mechanism, 3-78Main Carriage Drive Mechanism, 3-72

Main Carriage Sensors, 3-72Stepper Motor Control, 3-73X–Slide Carriage Mechanism, 3-75

Moving the Main Carriage, 4-41Mechanical Method, 4-43Terminal Diagnostics Method, 4-42Workstation Method, 4-41

NNoise, Analogue, B-7

OOptical System, 3-19

CCD Image Sensor, 3-29CCD Clocks, 3-31CCD Description, 3-29

Illumination, 3-21Light Table Illumination, 3-25Reflection Illumination, 3-24Transmission Illumination, 3-23White Balance Areas, 3-22

Introduction, 3-19Lens, 3-28

Optical Baffles, 3-29Mirror, 3-28Platen, 3-25

Aqua Strip, 3-26Copy Holder Registration Edges, 3-27Reflection Format, 3-27Transmission Format, 3-27

Optics Tests, 5-36Introduction, 5-36

Optics Menu Path, 5-36

PPatterning, B-6

Platen, 4-49

POST Failures, B-11

Power-up Sequence, Power On Tests, 5-3

Preparation for Replacement Procedures, 4-2

Protective Covers and Gas Struts, 4-30

Index


Lid Assembly, 4-31Lid Gas-Struts, 4-30

RRecommended List of Tools, 4-1

Reflection Lamps Assembly, 4-51Mirror, 4-54Reflection Lamp Detector Boards, 4-54Reflection Lamp Holders, 4-53Reflection Lamps, 4-51

Reflection Tray, 4-12

Registration Bar Calibration, 6-23

Replacement Procedures, 4-3

RFI Box Modules, 4-17Cooling Fan, 4-26Cover, 4-17Main Power Switch, 4-27PSU and Cable Loom, 4-22System Board, 4-18

SSafety Interlocks, 4-45

Lid Interlocks, 4-47Main Cover Interlocks, 4-45

Safety Practices, 2-1Health and Safety at Work, 2-1Site Safety, 2-2

Scanner, Downloading Firmware, 7-39

Scanner Diagnostics, 1-16Introduction, 1-16

Scanner Modules, 1-6Electrical Modules, 1-10Electronic Components, 1-12Interlocks and Sensors, 1-14Mechanical Modules, 1-6Optical Components, 1-8

SensorsEnlargement Datum, 4-119Focus Datum, 4-117Main Carriage Datum, 4-72Main Carriage Fwd Limit, 4-75Main Carriage Rev Limit, 4-74X–Slide Datum, 4-127

Servo Motor, 4-91Coupling, 4-93Encoder Labels, 2-7Moving Using Monitor Commands, 5-13

Setup Introduction, 6-5Introduction, Setup Menu Path, 6-5

Site Safety, Safety Signs, Labels, andIndicators, 2-2

Stand Covers, 4-15

Standard Monitor Commands, 5-11Display Utilities, 5-17Monitor Mode Operation, 5-11Servo Motor Commands, 5-13Stepper Motor Commands, 5-15

Stepper MotorsEnlargement Motor, 4-123Focus Motor, 4-116Moving Using Monitor Commands, 5-16X–Slide Motor, 4-130

Streaks, B-2

Streaks - Deep, B-3

Streaks - Light, B-3

Structure, 3-79Base, 3-80Enclosure Fan Filter Housing, 3-82Introduction, 3-79Lid, 3-83Main Cover, 3-83Pedestal, 3-80Platen Support, 3-82Stand, 3-79

Swathe Platen Calibration, 6-34

Index


Symptom Indications, B-9

System Board Tests, 5-21CPU Tests, 5-21CPU_Test, CPU_Test Menu Path, 5-22Introduction, 5-21Mcb_brd Tests, 5-28

Mcb_brd Tests Menu Path, 5-28Sys_brd Tests, 5-23

DSP_Tests, 5-24DSP_Tests Menu Path, 5-25SCSI_Tests, 5-23SCSI_Tests Menu Path, 5-24Sync_Tests, 5-26Sync_Tests Menu Path, 5-26

System Calibration, 6-17All, 6-22

Procedure, 6-23Bad (CCD) Pixel Elimination, 6-22

Procedure, 6-22Calibrate Menu Introduction, 6-17

Calibrate Tests Menu Path, 6-18Copymount Search Enable/Disable, 6-28Enlargement & Focus Calibration, 6-21

Procedure, 6-21Main Carriage Datums, 6-19

Procedure, 6-19Registration Bar Calibration, 6-23Start of Scan Offsets, 6-21

Procedure, 6-21System Calibration Target, 6-19X–Slide Carriage Datums, 6-20

Procedure, 6-20

System Description, 1-1Overview of Features, 1-1

C-550 Scanner, 1-2Modules, 1-3Workstation, 1-2

System Operation, 3-10Basic Principles, 3-10

Autofocus, 3-12Automatic Calibration System, 3-14Control System, 3-15

Fixed Platen - Moving Camera, 3-11Fluorescent Illumination, 3-12Graphics and Line-art Scanning, 3-13Image Re-alignment, 3-13Line Scan CCD Camera, 3-10Reading Copymount Data from Platen,

3-14Three-Stripe CCD Colour Separation, 3-13Variable Magnification, 3-12X–slide Carriage Movement, 3-12

Introduction, 3-10Sequence of Scanning Operations, 3-15

Autofocus, 3-17Black Balance, 3-17Enlargement Setting, 3-16Exposure Control, 3-17Focus Setting, 3-16Lamp Control, 3-18Scan, 3-17Stabilize Lamps, 3-16White Balance, 3-17X–Slide Setting, 3-16

System Overview, 3-1Electronics, 3-4

Illumination System, 3-7Image Data Path, 3-6Power Supply & Distribution, 3-4System Control, 3-5

Introduction, 3-1Motion Control, 3-6Optical System, 3-4Structure, 3-8System Operation, 3-3

TTerminal Diagnostic Tests, 5-19

Terminal Diagnostics, 5-1Overview, 5-1Power-up Sequence, 5-3

Terminal Diagnostics User Interface, 5-5

Index


Diagnostics Display, 5-5Global Commands, 5-7

Command Line Editing, 5-9Soak Test Operation, 5-9Verbose Command, 5-10

The Terminal Diagnostics Display, VT100Emulation Operation, 5-5

VT100 Emulation Operation, EnteringCommands, 5-6

Test Films, 6-3

Transmission Column, 4-12

Troubleshooting Guide, B-9Introduction, B-9

UUnit Replacement Procedures, 4-1

User DiagnosticsLaunching the Application, 7-2Running the Diagnostics Tests, 7-28Tool Bar Buttons, 7-27

Utilities, 5-34Introduction, 5-34

Utilities Menu Path, 5-34

WWorkstation Diagnostics, 1-19, 7-1

Electronic Repro Test, 7-31Placement on Platen, 7-33Procedure, 7-36

Electronic Repro Test Subjects, 7-31Introduction, 7-1Menus, 7-4

Buffers Commands, 7-11Calibrate Command, 7-25

Configuration Commands, 7-7File Commands, 7-4Tests Commands, 7-21

Diagnostic Tests Command, 7-21Electronic Repro Command, 7-23Soak Tests Command, 7-24

View Commands, 7-6Window Commands, 7-6

Purpose, 1-19SCSI Buffers, 7-17

XX–Slide Carriage Assembly, 4-101

Bearings Assembly, 4-108Cam Follower, 4-124Digitizer Board, 4-112Digitizer Cover Plate, 4-110Digitizer Fan, 4-111Enlargement Clamp, 4-122Enlargement Datum Sensor, 4-119Enlargement Leadscrew, 4-120Enlargement Motor, 4-123Focus Datum Sensor, 4-117Focus Motor, 4-116Focus Motor Rack, 4-114Moving CCD Mount, 4-103Moving Lens Mount, 4-102Moving X–Slide Carriage, 4-102X–Slide Carriage, 4-104

X–Slide Leadscrew Assembly, 4-127X–Slide Clamp, 4-132X–Slide Datum Sensor, 4-127X–Slide Leadscrew, 4-128X–Slide Motor, 4-130

X–slide Motor, Moving Using MonitorCommands, 5-16